B5010-RP 697 Main 2019-12-18 4th Ballot - 01 PDF

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not
received all approvals required to become an API Standard. It shall not be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in
whole or in part, outside of API committee activities except with the approval of the Chairman of the committee
having jurisdiction and staff of the API Standards Dept. Copyright API. All rights reserved.
API 697 Pump Repairs
API RP 697
y
n nl
tio O
2019-12-18
bu se
tri U
4th Ballot Draft
is 0
D 01
Pump Repair
al 5
er lot
en al
B
API RECOMMENDED PRACTICE 697

rG e
1ST EDITION, XXXXXX 2019

Fo itte

Highlighting indicates technical changes after 3rd Ballot comment resolution
ot m

N m o
rC
Fo
1 of 241
Foreword

Nothing contained in any API publication is to be construed as granting any right, by implication or
otherwise, for the manufacture, sale, or use of any method, apparatus, or product covered by letters
patent. Neither should anything contained in the publication be construed as insuring anyone against
liability for infringement of letters patent.
y

n nl
Should: As used in a standard, “should” denotes a recommendation or that which is advised but not
required in order to conform to the specification.
tio O

This document was produced under API standardization procedures that ensure appropriate notification
bu se
and participation in the developmental process and is designated as an API standard. Questions
concerning the interpretation of the content of this publication or comments and questions concerning
the procedures under which this publication was developed should be directed in writing to the Director
tri U
of Standards, American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005. Requests for
permission to reproduce or translate all or any part of the material published herein should also be
is 0
addressed to the director.
D 01

Generally, API standards are reviewed and revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn at least every five years. A
al 5
one‐time extension of up to two years may be added to this review cycle. Status of the publication can
be ascertained from the API Standards Department, telephone (202) 682‐8000. A catalog of API
er lot
publications and materials is published annually by API, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.

Suggested revisions are invited and should be submitted to the Standards Department, API, 1220 L
en al
Street, NW, Washington, D.C. 20005, standards@api.org.
B

rG e

Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
2 of 241

SPECIAL NOTES

API publications necessarily address problems of a general nature. With respect to particular
circumstances, local, state, and federal laws and regulations should be reviewed.
y

n nl
API is not undertaking to meet the duties of employers, manufacturers, or vendors to warn and properly
train and equip their employees, and others exposed, concerning health and safety risks and
tio O
precautions, nor undertaking their obligations under local, state, or federal laws.
Information concerning safety and health risks and proper precautions with respect to particular
bu se
materials and conditions should be obtained from the employer, the manufacturer or vendor of that
material, or the safety data sheet.

tri U
API standards are published to facilitate the broad availability of proven, sound engineering and
operating practices. These standards are not intended to obviate the need for applying sound
is 0
engineering judgment regarding when and where these standards should be utilized. The formulation
D 01
and publication of API standards is not intended in any way to inhibit anyone from using any other
practices.
al 5
Any manufacturer marking equipment or materials in conformance with the marking requirements of an
er lot
API standard is solely responsible for complying with all the applicable requirements of that standard.
API does not represent, warrant, or guarantee that such products do in fact conform to the applicable
API standard.
en al
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
B
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written
permission from the publisher. Contact the Publisher,
rG e
API Publishing Services, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
Fo itte
Contents
ot m
Introduction
1 Scope
N m
2 Normative References
3 Terms and Definitions
o
4 Inspection of Installed Pump and Removal from Baseplate

C
5 Field Inspections (After the Pump Has Been Removed from Its Base)
6 Field Repair
7 Shipment of Equipment or Components to or from Repair Shop
r
8 Receipt of Pump and Components by Repair Shop or Owner

Fo
9 Disassembly and Cleaning of the Pump (in Repair Shop)

10 Shop Inspection of Disassembled Pump, Components and Casing
11 Pump Modifications and Re-Rates
12 Repair Processes and New Component Manufacture
13 Rotor Assembly and Balancing
14 Shop Assembly of Pump
15 Shipment of Equipment or Components from Repair Shop
16 Documentation
17 Receipt of Repaired Pump by Owner
3 of 241
18 Reinstallation of Pump and Systems in Field

19 Start-Up
Annex A (Informative) Pump Designations and Descriptions
Annex B (Informative) Flowchart of Pump Review of Problem and Repair

Annex C (Informative) Equipment and Process Information
y
Annex D (Informative) Non‐Destructive Testing Methods
n nl
Annex E (Informative) Total Indicator Reading
Annex F (Informative) Rolling Element Bearings
tio O
Annex G (Informative) Examples of Rolling Element Bearing Damage
Annex H (Informative) Hydrodynamic Bearings
bu se
Annex I (Informative) Examples of Hydrodynamic Bearing Damage
Annex J (Informative) Material Combinations ‐ Galling Resistance
tri U
Annex K (Informative) Impeller Measuring
Annex L (Informative) Coatings and Overlays for Pumps
is 0
Annex M (Informative) Weld Repair Flowcharts
Annex N (Informative) Composite (Non‐Metallic) Components (Typically Wear Rings and Bushings)
D 01
Annex O (Informative) O‐Ring Information
Annex P (Informative) Balancing Flow Charts
al 5
Annex Q (Informative) Procedure for Determination of Residual Unbalance
Annex R (Informative) Pressure Assembly Leak Test
er lot
Annex S (Informative) Torque Values, Cap Screw and Stud Identification
Annex T (Informative) Keys and Keyways
en al
Annex U (Informative) Imperfections in Flange Facing Finish for Raised Face Flanges

Annex V (Informative) Shipping Skid Examples
B

Annex W (Informative) Inspection Charts
rG e
W.1.0 Introduction
Fo itte
W.2.1 Couplings and Shaft Ends

W.2.2 Surface Finish, Mounting Surfaces, Gaskets and Shims
W.2.3 Seal and Seal Chambers
ot m
W.2.4 Oil and Flinger Rings for Bearing Housings

W.3.1 Not Used
N m
W.3.2 OH1 and OH2 Foot Mounted and Centerline Mounted Single-Stage Overhung Pumps
W.3.3 OH3 Vertical In-Line, Bearing Bracket, Single-Stage Overhung Pumps
o
W.3.4 OH4 Vertical In-Line, Rigidly Coupled Single-Stage Overhung Pumps

W.3.5 OH5 Close-Coupled, Vertical, In-Line, Single-Stage Overhung Pumps
C
W.4.1.1 BB Shaft & Rotor

W.4.1.2 BB Bearing Housings
r
W.4.1.3 BB Impellers
Fo
W.4.2 BB1 Horizontally Split Between Bearing Pumps

W.4.3 BB2 Single or Two Stage BB Pumps
W.4.4 BB3 Horizontally Split Between Bearing Pumps
W.4.5 BB4 Single-Casing, Radially Split, Multistage BB Pumps
W.4.6 BB5 Double-Casing Radially Split Multi-Stage BB Pumps
W.10 Additional Information Tables
Annex X (Informative) Checklists
4 of 241
X.2 Inspection of Installed Pump and Removal from Baseplate Checklist

X.3 Field Inspections after Pump Has Been Removed from Its Base Checklist
X.4 Field Repair Checklist
X.5 Shipment of Equipment or Components to Repair Shop Checklist
X.6 Receipt of Pump and Components by Repair Shop Checklist
X.7 Disassembly and Cleaning of Pump (in Repair Shop) Checklist
X.8 Inspection of Disassembled Pump, Components and Casing Checklist
y
X.9 Pump Modifications and Re-Rates Checklist
X.10 Repair Processes and New Component Manufacture Checklist
n nl
X.11 Rotor Assembly and Balancing Checklist
X.12.1 Shop Assembly of Pump Checklist
tio O
X.12.2 Conformance to Work Scope Checklist
X.13 Shipment of Equipment or Components from Repair Shop Checklist
bu se
X.14 Documentation Checklist
X.15 Receipt of Repaired Pump by Owner Checklist
X.16.1 Reinstallation of Pump and Systems in Field Checklist
tri U
X.16.2 Field Installation Data Form
X.16.3 Electric Motor Solo / Rotation Check Data Form
X.17 Start-Up Checklist
is 0
D 01
Annex Y (Informative) Pump Temperature Equalization
Bibliography al 5
er lot
Table of Figures
en al
To be added by API Editors

B
Table of Tables
rG e
Fo itte
To be added by API Editors

ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
5 of 241
Introduction
This document can be used for pumps and pump systems to guide the user along a path from perception
of a problem through the resolution of the problem. Sections are provided that identify the important
aspects of each topic encountered during the resolution of a problem. Topics include:
 inspections performed in the field and repair shop,
y
n nl
 shipping the pump to and from a repair shop,
tio O
 modifications and re-rates,
 repair techniques,
bu se
 rotor balancing,
tri U
 reassembly,
is 0
 reinstallation and startup,
D 01
 documentation.
al 5
Annex B is a high-level flowchart of the pump problem resolution process. The nature of the problem will
determine which portions of this document are applicable. The Field and Repair Shop Work Scopes
er lot
should indicate applicable portions of this practice.
The basic assumption of this practice is that the entire pump (pressure casing, rotor assembly, bearings
en al
and seals) is removed for repair with the possible exception of BB5 pumps.
B
Users of this Recommended Practice should be aware that further or differing recommendations may be
needed for individual applications. This Recommended Practice is not intended to inhibit a vendor from
rG e
offering, or the purchaser from accepting, alternative equipment or engineering solutions for the individual
Fo itte
application. This may be particularly appropriate where there is innovative or developing technology.
Where an alternative is offered, the vendor should identify any variations from this Recommended
Practice and provide details.
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
6 of 241
1 Scope
1.1 General
1.1.1 This Recommended Practice (RP) covers the minimum recommendations for the inspection and
y
repair of API 610 pumps type OH1-5 and BB1-5. Refer to Annex A for Figures and description of pump
n nl
types.
tio O
This document covers the entire process of field inspection, modifications, inspection, upgrades, repair
and / or new component manufacturer, reassembly of the pump casing and rotor in the shop and the
reinstallation and startup of the pump in the field.
bu se
Pumps in hydrofluoric acid service may require inspection and repair methods that are beyond the scope
of this RP.
tri U
Each phase of inspection will determine a work scope. The work scope will become more definitive as the
is 0
inspection process progresses.
D 01
NOTE A bullet (•) at the beginning of a paragraph indicates that either a decision is required or further
information should be provided by the owner. This information should be stated in the quotation request
al 5
or in the order.
1.1.2 The basis of repair recommendations should be to produce a safe reliable pump while:
er lot
 Returning dimensions required for spare parts interchangeability to the latest design fits and
en al
clearances.
B
 Maintaining interchangeability with other units.

rG e
 Using existing spare parts.

Fo itte
 Eliminating errors in manufacturing future spare parts that could be caused by undocumented
dimensional changes.
ot m
 Maintaining its torque transmission capabilities

N m
NOTE The latest design fits and clearances could be different than originally designed by the original
equipment manufacturer (OEM), because re-rates and/or upgrades could have been incorporated
o
into the machine design.

C
1.1.3 Use of previously manufactured components and their acceptance criteria should be mutually
agreed upon by all parties involved and documented in the work scope.
r
Fo
1.1.4 The repair shop should assume order responsibility.
1.2 Alternative Procedures
The repair shop or vendor may offer alternative procedures and designs. Any exception to this
recommended practice should be clearly stated in the proposal.
1.3 Conflicting Requirements
7 of 241
In case of conflict between this recommended practice and the inquiry, the inquiry should govern. At the
time of the order, the order governs.
1.4 Statutory Requirements
The purchaser and the vendor should determine the measures to be taken to comply with any
governmental codes, regulations, ordinances, or rules that are applicable to the equipment, its packaging
y
and preservation. Equipment installed in the European Economic Area should comply with all applicable
n nl
European Union Directives.
tio O
1.5 Unit Responsibility
The repair shop who has order responsibility should assure that all vendors comply with the requirements
bu se
of this recommended practice, all referenced standards, and all purchaser requirements.
1.6 Selection of a Repair Shop
tri U
1.6.1 General
is 0
1.6.1.1 The repair shop should be selected based on the organization’s ability to perform anticipated and
D 01
potential scopes of repair while meeting the expectations of the owner. The review of the repair shop and
their capabilities should include items such as:
a) Facilities.
al 5
er lot
b) Engineering capability and support.
en al
c) Experience repairing similar equipment.

B
d) Manufacturing of replacement components

rG e
e) Having a quality system in place including documentation

Fo itte
1.6.1.2 Qualification of a repair shop is usually accomplished by having the repair shop complete and submit
a qualification survey form (such as the one in API RP 687). Initial and follow up audits should be performed
by the owner to ensure the repair shop is capable of performing the repair.
ot m
1.7 Communication
N m
1.7.1 General
o
C
1.7.1.1 The success of a repair depends upon open communication. Communication is important in defining
the needs and expectations of the owner to the repair shop and to vendors. Verbal instructions,
recommendations and agreements should be confirmed in writing.
r
Fo
1.7.1.2 The owner, repair shop and vendors should each have a designated person to coordinate
communication.
1.7.1.3 The methods of communication should be defined before any repairs are initiated.
1.7.1.4 All written correspondence should be identified with the following information:
8 of 241
a) The owner’s corporate name.
b) The job/project number.
c) The equipment item number and service name.
d) The inquiry or purchase order number.
y
n nl
e) Any other identification specified in the inquiry or purchase order.
tio O
f) The repair shop’s identifying proposal number, repair shop order number, serial number, or other
reference to identify return correspondence completely.
bu se
1.7.1.5 The complexity of a repair will usually determine how many of the following meetings should be
planned. After the meetings are held, the meeting minutes should be published by the repair shop and
tri U
distributed to the attendees or other relevant personnel.
a) A meeting should be held to review the repair scope, timetable, establish points of contact, and assign
is 0
responsibilities for all parties. The owner’s desired service life and uninterrupted operation requirements
should be discussed.
D 01
b) Follow-up meetings may be necessary if deviations from the initial repair scope are found during the
al 5
repair process.
c) In the case of re-rates, additional meetings such as a pre-award/coordination and design audit may be
er lot
needed.
en al
1.7.2 Electronic Drawing and Data Transmittal

B
Appropriate lines of communication, such as electronic drawing and data transmittal should be used to
ensure that all members are kept informed. Examples are:
rG e
a) Direct electronic links between computer aided design (CAD) systems.

Fo itte
b) Electronic mail including digital photography transmission.
c) Video and telephone conferencing.

ot m
2 Normative References
N m
2.1 This RP refers to American standards. Other international or national standards may be used as
o
agreed between owner and repair shop provided it can be shown that these other standards meet or
C
exceed the American standards referenced.
2.2 The following referenced documents are indispensable for the application of this document. For dated
r
references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced
Fo
document (including any amendments) applies.
API Standard 610, Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries
API Standard 614, Lubrication, Shaft-sealing and Oil-control Systems and Auxiliaries
API Standard 670, Machinery Protection Systems
API Standard 682, Pumps—Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps
9 of 241
API Recommended Practice 686, Recommended Practice for Machinery Installation and Installation
Design
API Recommended Practice 687, Special Purpose Rotating Equipment Repair
AGMA 9002-B04, Bores and Keyways for Flexible Couplings
y
ANSI B11.19, Machines – Performance Criteria for Safeguarding
n nl
ANSI/HI 9.5, Pumps General Guidelines - Decontamination Of Returned Products Procedure
tio O
ASME B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250
bu se
ASME B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
tri U
ASME B16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 150 and 300
is 0
ASME B16.47, Large Diameter Steel Flanges NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch Standard
D 01
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section V: Nondestructive Examination Article 5, 6 and 23
al 5
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section VIII: Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
er lot
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications
en al
ASTM A388/A388M, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Forgings

B
ASTM A435/A435M, Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates
rG e
ASTM A516/A516M, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and
Lower-Temperature Service
Fo itte
ASTM A577/A577M, Standard Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates
ot m
ASTM A578/A578M, Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel
Plates for Special Applications
N m
ASTM A609, Standard Practice for Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel,
o
Ultrasonic Examination Thereof

C
ASTM B23, Standard Specification for White Metal Bearing Alloys (Known Commercially as “Babbitt
Metal”)
r
Fo
ASTM E94, Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination
ASTM E125, Standard Reference Photographs for Magnetic Particle Indications on Ferrous Castings
ASTM E186, Standard Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled 2 to 4 1⁄2 in. (50.8 mm to 114 mm)
Steel Castings.
ASTM E165/E165M, Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry
10 of 241
ASTM E280, Standard Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled 4 1⁄2 to 12 in. (114mm to 305 mm)
Steel Castings.
ASTM E446, Standard Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings Up to 2 in. (50.8 mm) in Thickness
ASTM E709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
y
ASTM E1417/E1417M, Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Testing
n nl
MSS SP-55, Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges, Fittings, and Other Piping
tio O
Components – Visual Method for Evaluation of Surface Irregularities
SSPC SP 1, Solvent Cleaning
bu se
SSPC SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning
tri U
3 Terms, Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations
is 0
3.1 Terms and Definitions
D 01
For the purposes of this document, the following definitions apply.
3.1.1
accuracy
al 5
er lot
The closeness of a measurement value to the true value.
3.1.2
en al
as found
The condition in which the pump arrives at the repair shop, prior to any repair work.
B
3.1.3
rG e
as repaired
The condition in which the pump leaves the repair shop, after repair work is complete.
Fo itte
3.1.4
axial float
ot m
rotor float
Clearance between the rotor and stationary components measured in the direction parallel to the shaft.
N m
3.1.5
axially split
o
Joint split with the principal face parallel to the shaft centerline.
C
3.1.6
r
balance line
Fo
Internal or external line used to equalize pressure between higher pressure in the seal chamber (stuffing
box) or balance chamber (as found on multi-stage pumps with balance drums or discs) and the lower
pressure at the suction of the pump.
3.1.7
baseplate
Structure used to mount, support, and align machinery and its auxiliary components.
3.1.8
bearing isolator
11 of 241
Mechanical device that isolates a bearing from its environment, so that the bearing will be kept properly
lubricated and uncontaminated throughout its projected design life.
3.1.9
burnished area
proximity probe target area
Area that has been plastically deformed (polished) by sliding contact with another object, typically a
y
diamond burnishing tool, to minimize electrical and mechanical runout in the location where an eddy
current (proximity) vibration probe takes its readings.
n nl
tio O
3.1.10
cartridge
Assembly of all the parts of the pump except for the casing.
bu se
3.1.11
cartridge seal
tri U
Completely self-contained mechanical seal unit (including seal faces, flexible elements, seal gland plate,
sleeve and mating ring) which is pre-assembled and preset before installation.
is 0
3.1.12
D 01
cavitation
The formation of vapor cavities in a liquid.
3.1.13
channel ring
al 5
er lot
A device in BB3 and BB5 pumps used to separate discharge side of prior stage and the suction of the
next stage and diverts/controls flow into eye of the impeller.
en al
3.1.14
B
clearance fit
The dimensional relationship between assembled parts in which the inner component is smaller than the
outer component.
rG e
Fo itte
3.1.15
contact verification
transfer contact verification
blue check
ot m
an inspection used to characterize the contact pattern and contact percentage between two surfaces.
The inspection typically uses a soft, uniform paste, that is nondrying, non-hardening, remains pliable an is
N m
transferable.
o
Note: This is often referred to as a “blue check” because the paste is typically blue although the paste can
C
be in other colors such as red.
3.1.16
r
distance between shaft ends

Fo
DBSE
The axial dimension between two adjacent machinery shaft reference points including any threaded end
or in the case of integral flanges, the distance from the mating faces.
Note: Coupling detail drawings and manufacturers alignment drawings typically identify the DBSE
reference points.
3.1.17
element bundle
Assembly of the rotor plus the internal stationary parts of a centrifugal pump.
12 of 241
3.1.18
fretting
Wear process that occurs at the contact area between two materials under load and subject to minute
relative motion by vibration or some other force.
3.1.19
galling
y
Wearing caused by adhesion between sliding surfaces.
n nl
3.1.20
tio O
gauss
unit of measure for residual magnetism or magnetic flux density.
bu se
3.1.21
gear wheel
bull gear
tri U
The lowest speed rotor of a gear set.
is 0
3.1.22
Go, No-Go gauge
D 01
An inspection tool used to check a work piece against its allowed tolerances.
Note: Its name derives from its use: the gauge has two tests; the check involves the work piece having to
al 5
pass one test (Go) and fail the other (No Go).
er lot
3.1.23
gouge
en al
An indentation, groove or hole appearing to be scooped out with a chisel or sharp tool.
B
3.1.24
hydrodynamic bearing
Bearing that uses the principles of hydrodynamic lubrication.
rG e
Fo itte
3.1.25
indications
A response or evidence of a discontinuity that requires interpretation to determine its significance.
ot m
3.1.26
interference fit
N m
The dimensional relationship between assembled parts in which the inner component is larger than the
outer component.
o
C
3.1.27
labyrinths (rotating and stationary)
Non-contacting seals that provide a tortuous path to reduce leakage.
r
Fo
3.1.28
match-mark
A mark placed on the adjacent separable parts of a device to aid in the reassembling of the parts.
3.1.29
measurement device resolution
The smallest division of the measurement device.
13 of 241
3.1.30
oil mist lubrication
Lubrication provided by oil mist produced by atomization and transported to the bearing housing, or
housings, by compressed air.
3.1.31
oiler
y
Device used for supplying non-pressurized oil to lubricate pump bearings.
n nl
3.1.32
tio O
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OEM
Company that originally designed and manufactured the equipment or component.
bu se
3.1.33
owner
tri U
Final recipient of the equipment who may delegate another agent as the purchaser of the equipment.
is 0
3.1.34
phase-referenced
D 01
Measurement of the relative timing angular location between two points (measurement point and a
reference point). The phase angle (measured in degrees or radians) is the difference between the
measurement point and a reference point.
al 5
NOTE: A phase-referenced runout (TIR) has two components: 1) the TIR, and 2) the angle between the
er lot
measurement point and the reference point.
en al
3.1.35
positive material identification
B
PMI
Analysis of a metallic alloy to establish composition by percentage of its constituent elements.
rG e
3.1.36
Fo itte
pressure casing
Composite of all stationary pressure containing parts of the unit, including all nozzles and other attached
parts.
ot m
3.1.37
radially split
N m
Split with the joint perpendicular to the shaft centerline.

o
3.1.38
C
recirculation
Flow reversal at the inlet or discharge tips of impeller vanes.
r
3.1.39
Fo
register fit
A joint that causes two stationary parts, when assembled, to be concentric to each other when fasteners
are tightened.
3.1.40
repair shop
Agency that provides unit responsibility for the inspection and repair services. The repair shop may or
may not be an owner’s shop.
14 of 241
3.1.41
re-rate
A change in the operating performance that may or may not require hardware changes. A rerate usually
requires the addition of a data plate (nameplate).
3.1.42
residual magnetism
y
magnetization remaining in a magnetized body no longer under external magnetic influence.
n nl
3.1.43
tio O
rolling element bearings
An assembly of mechanical components that utilizes rolling contacts between the rolling elements and
race rings to support load while permitting constrained motion of one race ring relative to the other race
bu se
ring.
3.1.44
tri U
ruptured surface
Surface containing a crack, break or hole.
is 0
3.1.45
D 01
scribe
A shallow line used to represent a position of a part to another part for reference.
3.1.46
soft foot
al 5
er lot
Distortion caused if one or more feet of a machine differ in height from the others (are not in the same
plane).
en al
3.1.47
B
solo test
Operation of the pump driver uncoupled from the pump.
rG e
3.1.48
Fo itte
special tool
Tool that is not a commercially available catalogue item.
3.1.49
ot m
thermal gaps
Axial gaps between adjacent components on a shaft that allow for thermal expansion and operation
N m
above the 1st critical speed.

o
3.1.50
C
thread lubricant
Lubrication applied to reduce the loss of torque when tightening due to friction between the external and
internal threads.
r
Fo
3.1.51
total indicator reading
total indicated runout
TIR
Difference between the maximum and minimum readings of a dial indicator or similar device, monitoring a
face or cylindrical surface during one complete revolution of the monitored surface.
NOTE For a cylindrical surface, the indicated runout implies an eccentricity equal to half the reading. For
a flat face the indicated runout implies an out-of-squareness equal to the reading.
15 of 241
3.1.52
tolerance
Allowable variation in the measured parameter(s).
3.1.53
tooth contact
Interface between gear teeth that transmits the torque from one gear to another gear.
y
n nl
3.1.54
truth band
tio O
Locations on the component (such as a shaft) that are used to reference concentricity and or
perpendicularity of a repaired location to the original geometric centerline of the component.
bu se
3.1.55
upgrade
An improvement in the equipment design, which can increase reliability, but does not result in a change in
tri U
the performance.
is 0
3.1.56
vendor
D 01
Agency selected for service support by the repair shop.
NOTE This RP addresses the responsibilities between two parties, defined as the repair shop and the
al 5
owner. The repair shop can utilize vendors to repair, refurbish or supply components.
er lot
3.1.57
volute
en al
The area of casing that receives the fluid being pumped by the impeller, reducing the fluid's velocity.
B
3.1.58
water jacketed
Fully enclosed internal chambers or passages through which water can be circulated to aid in cooling.
rG e
Fo itte
3.1.59
wiped
Damage that involves the displacement of Babbitt from one location to another location in the bearing.
ot m
3.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations

N m
For the purposes of this document, the following acronyms and abbreviations apply.
o
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

C
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association

r
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

Fo
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
16 of 241
AUS austenitic stainless steel
BB between bearing (type of pump with a number typically following the BB)
BPVC boiler and pressure vessel code (part of ASME)
BEP best efficiency point
y
Dx diameter at a specific location x identified with a number for x
n nl
DBSE distance between shaft ends
tio O
DE drive end (identifies location of end of equipment)
bu se
DOT United States department of Transportation
tri U
DN diamètre nominal/nominal diameter/Durchmesser nach Norm
is 0
EN European Standard
D 01
FWS field work scope
HVLF high velocity liquid fuel (type of coating)

al 5
HVOF high velocity oxygen fuel (type of coating)
er lot
ID inside diameter
en al
ISO International Standards Institute

B
L loose (degree of fit of resulting dimensions)

rG e
LH left hand
Fo itte
MIC microbially induced corrosion
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society

ot m
MT magnetic particle inspection

N m
MTR mill test report

o
C
NDE non-drive end (identifies location of end of equipment)
NDT nondestructive testing

r
Fo
NPS nominal pipe size
NPSH net positive suction head
NPSHA NPSH available
NPSH3 NPSH at 3 % head loss
OD outside diameter
17 of 241
OEM original equipment manufacturer
OH overhung (type of pump with a number typically following the OH)
P-P peak to peak (amplitude of electrical signal)
P&ID process and instrumentation drawing
y
PdM predictive maintenance
n nl
PH precipitation hardened
tio O
PM preventative maintenance
bu se
PMI positive material identification
tri U
PT liquid penetrant inspection
PTE pump temperature equalization
is 0
D 01
PTEP pump temperature equalization piping
PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
al 5
PWHT postweld heat treatment
er lot
Ra arithmetic average of the roughness profile
en al
RMS root mean square

B
RO runout (measurement)
rG e
RSWS repair shop work scope

Fo itte
RT radiographic inspection
RTD resistance temperature device

ot m
SAE Society of Automative Engineers

N m
SG specific gravity
o
SNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing

C
T tight (degree of fit of resulting dimensions)

r
Fo
TI temperature indicator
TIR total indicator runout
TYP typical
UN Unified constant pitch (a thread form)
UNC Unified National Coarse (a thread form)
18 of 241
UNF Unified National Fine (a thread form)
UNS Unified Numbering System (for metal and alloys)
UT ultrasonic inspection testing
VT visual inspection testing
y
WPS welding procedural specification
n nl
4 Inspection of Installed Pump and Removal from Baseplate
tio O
4.1 Scope
bu se
This section describes the data to be recorded and the recommendations of field inspection of the pump
assembly and auxiliaries.
tri U
The field inspections and documentation should capture the as-found condition of the equipment,
is 0
determine the “Field Work Scope (FWS)” and ensure that key steps or inspections are not overlooked.
D 01
The amount of field data and information obtained can be determined by the severity of the pump
problem.
al 5
Equipment that has already been shut down should have the data and information reviewed prior to any
restarting attempts.
er lot
4.2 Obtaining Data
en al
4.2.1 Annex C should be utilized to evaluate the perceived problem with the pump.
B
4.2.2 Equipment information such as data sheet(s), pump performance curve, and equipment and seal
system drawings as identified in Annex C should be obtained. The owner should provide this information
rG e
to the repair shop.

Fo itte
4.2.3 Process conditions, auxiliary systems, and associated components referenced in Annex C should
be evaluated.
ot m
4.2.4 Review pump nameplate for consistency with information in 4.2.2.

N m
4.2.5 Observe and document the type of lubrication system. Verify that the lube oil system is functioning
correctly and observe its condition. When necessary, obtain a lube oil sample for analysis.
o
C
4.2.6 Review the perceived pump problem with people such as operations, maintenance or others.
4.2.7 Review field data and information with respect to the equipment design data and information to
r
Fo
determine possible cause of perceived problem.
4.2.8 Based upon the results from the review performed in 4.2.6, and any current practices or upgrades
recommended, prepare a “Field Work Scope (FWS)”. The “Field Work Scope” may or may not require the
pump to be shut down to correct the perceived problem.
4.2.9 Items that do not require the equipment to be shut down should be completed to finish the “Field
Work Scope”. (Equipment is still in operation).
4.3 Preparations for Pump Shut-Down
19 of 241
4.3.1 Considerations when shutting down a pump:
a) Obtain site approval for shut-down. Follow all procedures.
b) Confirm installed spare train (driver and driven) (if utilized) is satisfactory for operation prior to starting
c) If problem pump is still in operation, verify the condition of spring piping hangers and supports/locking
y
devices (gags) that would affect the alignment of the piping for the pump prior to shutting down the
n nl
pump. Determine if they are set according to the latest piping assembly drawings
tio O
d) Review the operating condition of the other equipment to determine if additional work scopes are
necessary.
bu se
e) Spare pump should be confirmed that it is operating satisfactorily by running it for a minimum of 4 hours.
tri U
f) Shut down problem pump and record coast down information, such as vibration, rotor shuttling, time,
abrupt stop, noise from the equipment.
is 0
g) For steam turbine drivers, consider manually tripping the turbine to verify that the turbine trip valve and
D 01
system are operating properly.
h) Confirm the pump that was shut down is not rotating backward such as from a leaking check valve. In
al 5
the event the pump is running backwards and driven by an electric motor do not attempt a restart.
er lot
i) To verify that the perceived problem is with the shut-down pump, compare operation and equipment
indicators of the spare pump placed in service to the pump removed from service.
en al
j) Obtain an oil sample for analysis if not taken during analysis of lube system as described in 4.2.5
B
4.3.2 Follow all site procedures for energy isolation including blinding and plugging. Prior to performing
work scope, equipment should be isolated from all energy sources and brought to zero energy.
rG e
Fo itte
4.4 Inspections After Shut-down
4.4.1 Perform inspections / corrections from the “Field Work Scope” and 4.2.7 that can be done only if
equipment has been shut down and prior to pump removal. These inspections are typically completed
ot m
after the pump has been shut down and prior to disconnecting pump, auxiliary piping, or removal of
pump.
N m
a) Data or information should be obtained for potential upgrades identified in Section 11.
o
C
b) Determine location of any reported leak(s) by performing field pressure test.
c) Identify fasteners associated with leakage of corrosive liquids.

r
Fo
d) Survey the surrounding area and equipment for possible causes of problems affecting equipment in
question.
e) Verify the condition of spring piping hangers and supports/locking devices (gags) that would affect the
alignment of the piping for the pump prior to draining the pump.
i. Determine if they are set according to the latest piping assembly drawings.
ii. Determine if the spring piping hanger or support stops/locking devices should be installed prior to
disconnecting the pump piping flanges.
20 of 241
iii. For applications that require the spring piping hanger or support/locking device to be removed
during piping removal, determine if any additional temporary piping supports are necessary for
the remaining piping.
f) Externally corroded or eroded piping on the pump should be inspected further to determine its fitness for
service.
g) Obtain and record shaft alignment readings between train (driver and driven) components for reference.
y
The piping and equipment should be close to ambient temperature, so that the information can be
n nl
compared to the alignment readings obtained after the piping is disconnected and removed.
tio O
h) Photograph pump installation with auxiliaries still in place for use during reassembly.
bu se
i) Decontaminate piping, pump, bearing housings, and other auxiliary systems per site and governmental
regulations.
tri U
4.4.2 Review of “Field Work Scopes”
is 0
Review the results of the completed Field Work Scope and determine if the perceived problem has been
resolved or whether further work is recommended. If additional field work is recommended, develop a
D 01
revised field work scope such as FWS rev 01 for the items to be completed in the field. If it is determined
that the pump should be removed and sent to a repair shop, then a “Repair Shop Work Scope (RSWS)”
should be developed. The FWS should also include any known abnormal condition of the other
al 5
equipment associated with the pump such as the driver, auxiliary systems, piping and
foundation/baseplate identified in section 5.
er lot
4.4.3 Review of “Field Work Scope Revisions”
en al
Additional Field Work Scope revisions may be necessary until the problem has been resolved. If it is
B
determined that the pump should be removed and sent to a repair shop, then a “Repair Shop Work Scope
(RSWS)” should be developed.
rG e
4.4.4 If root cause “failure” analysis is contemplated for the equipment, preservation of information useful
Fo itte
in determining possible causes of wear as well as possible failure mechanisms (forensic evidence) should
be considered.
Additional care should be exercised during disassembly and inspection to preserve and document failure
ot m
modes and mechanisms such as pipe strain, misalignment or foundation condition.

N m
4.5 Pump Removal Considerations

o
4.5.1 Disconnecting Pump Process or Auxiliary Piping

C
4.5.1.1 Prior to loosening piping flanges at the pump, install the stops for the piping spring hangers and
supports if required.
r
Fo
4.5.1.2 Observe and document pipe strain per recommendations of API 686.
Maximum Shaft movement in either vertical or horizontal direction after all flanges have been loosened
should be no more than 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) in the vertical or horizontal direction.
4.5.1.3 Observe and document piping to pump flange alignment and flange face parallelism per
recommendations of API 686. This information should be used for inclusion in the work scope that is
developed in 5.9.
21 of 241
4.5.1.4 Obtain the shaft alignment readings between train (driver and driven) components. This
information can be compared to historical information, and information that was obtained in 4.4.1 prior to
the piping being removed. For acceptable alignment procedures and tolerances, refer to API 686.
4.5.1.5 After review of piping and shaft alignment data, determine the need to modify or adjust the
process piping.
y
4.5.1.6 As the auxiliary piping and components such as buffer fluid seal pots, plugs, coolers, cyclone
n nl
separators or valves are being disconnected to allow the pump’s removal, document their orientation with
sketches or photographs. The termination ends should also be tagged with pump number and service
tio O
connection description and protected in accordance with 4.5.1.7 and 4.5.1.8. Wire any orifice plate to the
flange where it was installed.
bu se
Plug any oil mist connections. Locate and identify any reclassifiers. Tag and store for reinstallation.
4.5.1.7 Follow all site procedures for piping and tubing terminations, including blinding and plugging,
tri U
while the pump is removed.
is 0
4.5.1.8 Any open flanged connection in the piping or on the pump should be covered with a solid metal
cover with a rubber gasket to prevent debris from entering or leaking. Tubing should be plugged with a
D 01
metal plug.
Molded plastic flange covers or plugs, rags and towels are not acceptable.
al 5
4.5.1.9 Permanent or temporary suction strainers should be inspected and cleaned. Consider if
er lot
temporary strainer baskets should remain.
en al
4.6 Removing Pump from Baseplate

B
4.6.1 In order to fully inspect and repair a pump, the entire pump should be sent to the repair shop.
However, with a BB5 pump, the outer casing may not always be removed from the baseplate unless there
is a problem requiring the removal.
rG e
Fo itte
4.6.2 Prior to removing the coupling spacer, observe for match marking of the coupling components. If
there are no match markings, create such match markings.
ot m
a) Remove coupling guard and spacer, observe and document position of hubs on the shaft and the
distance between shaft ends (DBSE).
N m
b) Evaluate data by comparing against alignment requirements, general arrangement and coupling
drawings. Revise work scope if necessary.
o
C
Note: Not all couplings require assembly with match markings, however the match markings can provide
some information that can be beneficial during investigations.
r
Fo
4.6.3 Remove, tag, protect, and document location of externally mounted auxiliary devices such as
proximity probes, temperature indicating devices, and other instrumentation.
4.6.4 To verify a soft foot condition, install a dial indicator to measure the deflection of each pump foot
while loosening the respective pump hold down bolt. Record this information.
Refer to API 686 for soft foot checking procedure and tolerance. Modify work scope if necessary to bring
within tolerance.
Perform a soft foot check on any other equipment that can be removed from the base.
22 of 241
4.6.5 When removing the pump from the baseplate, document the location of each hold-down bolt with
respect to the pump foot bolt hole. Tag the bolt with the location it was installed.
4.6.6 Equipment hold-down bolts should be checked for bolt undercutting. This information can be used
to determine if the holes in the pump feet should be enlarged. In no case should the bolt shank be
undercut below the root diameter. Modify the work scope in 5.9 to correct any bolt/hole alignment which
will prevent proper pump alignment on re-assembly.
y
n nl
4.6.7 If shims or spacers are utilized, they should be tagged and identified for their foot location. Shims
should comply with section 5.5 and API 686.
tio O
4.6.8 Components left in the field should be properly tagged and protected from environmental conditions
such as moisture, sand, and dirt.
bu se
4.6.9 Clean the area.
tri U
4.6.10 For on-site locations, decontaminate the pump and or components to comply with site and
governmental regulations.
is 0
4.6.11 The owner and repair shop may discuss and arrange for cleaning and decontamination by the
D 01
repair shop and disposal of contaminants.
al 5
4.6.11.1 Any pump or component(s) containing hazardous or flammable material that will be transported
to an off-site location should be cleaned and decontaminated (some disassembly can be required) to
comply with governmental codes, regulations, ordinances, directives, or rules that are applicable.
er lot
NOTE 1 The United States Department of Transportation (DOT) regulates hazmat transportation within
en al
the territory of the US.

B
NOTE 2 Refer also to Hydraulic Institute Standard 9.5, “Decontamination of Returned Products
Procedure”.
rG e
4.6.11.2 Safety Data Sheets should be included.

Fo itte
4.6.12 Seal any openings of the pump and seal(s) to prevent leakage of product possibly left in the pump
or components during transportation. Sealing should be accomplished by using steel plugs and flange
ot m
covers consisting of a gasket and steel plate.

N m
4.6.13 Pumps should be properly rigged and lifted to avoid damage. See API 686 for rigging and lifting
information. Pumps should be lifted so as to not distort or stress the bearing housing(s) or shaft.
Reference manufacturer’s recommendation on proper lifting.
o
C
4.6.14 Keep all personnel from working under the lift and keep them a safe distance away until the
machinery is secured in place on its transport.
r
Fo
4.7 BB5 Inner Bundle Removal
4.7.1 Remove inner bundle in accordance with pump manufacturer’s requirement. Special tools can be
required.
4.7.2 Once the inner bundle assembly has been removed, visually inspect as follows:
23 of 241
a) Overall condition of the outside of the bundle
b) Gasketed surfaces and condition of any gaskets
c) Signs of leakage
d) The face(s) in contact with the pump case should be inspected for erosion
y
n nl
e) Document any deposits and obtain samples for analysis.
tio O
f) Record barrel dimensions as needed
4.8 Discussion of Work Scope with Repair Shop
bu se
The owner should discuss with the repair shop information such as the following:
tri U
a) Why the pump was sent in for repair and any time constraints for the repair.
is 0
b) Brief history of the pump’s service record since its last repair. Any changes incorporated by previous
D 01
repairs, such as changes of material, dimensions or operating parameters should be provided.
c) Description of the conditions in which the pump is operating. It is important to identify the presence of
al 5
any corrosives such as H2S, chlorides, abrasives or any other chemical or substance that is important
for consideration.
er lot
d) General documentation related to the pump obtained in 4.2.3. Documents such as the pump materials,
the use of any coatings, data sheet, previous repair records, general arrangement drawings, and pump
en al
assembly drawings.
B
e) The extent to which the repair shop will be involved in root cause analysis and expectations for evidence
preservation and documentation.
rG e
Fo itte
f) Any required hold or witness points.
4.9 Transportation recommendations from equipment field location to the Repair Shop are identified in
ot m
section 7.
5 Field Inspections (Following Pump Removal from Baseplate)

N m
5.1 General
o
C
5.1.1 Inspections in 5.2 through 5.9 should be performed in addition to the “Field Work Scope” including
revisions in section 4.0.
r
Fo
5.1.1.1 Inspections should be documented with test reports, photographs, and forms as needed
5.1.1.2 Results of these inspections should be evaluated, and the work scope revised as necessary.
5.1.1.3 Take samples of any residues and deposits for analysis.
5.1.2 Consider performing Preventive Maintenance (PM) or Predictive Maintenance (PdM) activities on
the driver, gearbox, coupling and auxiliary systems as applicable.
24 of 241
5.1.3 All lifting devices, tooling and measurement tooling should meet current certification and calibration
requirements. See API 686 for rigging and lifting information.
5.1.4 Clean equipment prior to inspections to remove dirt, rust and other foreign material using a
procedure appropriate for the component.
5.1.4.1 Protect all critical areas during cleaning.
y
n nl
5.1.4.2 Abrasive cleaning methods for some components can leave residue that could damage
equipment and should not be used.
tio O
5.1.4.3 NDT may require additional cleaning as identified in Annex A1.1 of ASTM E165/E165M.
bu se
5.1.4.4 Once the equipment or components have been cleaned, inspected and repaired as necessary,
store and protect these items so they are ready for use once the pump has been repaired and installed.
Auxiliary components should be tagged and placed in containers to keep the items grouped together.
tri U
5.2 Pump Driver
is 0
5.2.1 If the driver is not removed, the electric motor or steam turbine driver should have a solo run in
D 01
accordance with API 686 to determine if any additional work is necessary. Follow site safety procedures
to safely operate the driver for the solo test run. It may be necessary to install the coupling guard for this
test run. al 5
For hydrodynamic bearing motors, the shaft should be fully extended and hard bluing should be sprayed
er lot
onto the shaft for scribing:
en al
a) With motor power off, and with motor shaft fully extended, use a scribe to mark the bluing while turning
the shaft by hand. Apply axial load to keep the shaft extended during the scribing.
B
b) Push shaft fully in the other direction and scribe again.

rG e
c) These two scribe marks give a visual indication of the extreme positions of the shaft.
Fo itte
d) If it can be done safely, with the motor running during the solo test, scribe the running position which
should be approximately in the center of the two other scribe marks. The running position is typically
ot m
termed the magnetic center.

N m
Note: The position of the rotor during the solo test can be influenced by the operation of any cooling
fan(s) installed on the motor, motor electrical characteristics, or motor levelness.
o
C
e) These scribe marks can be helpful during assembly and initial operation to verify the motor is not running
at one extreme of the axial float and for the setting of the coupling. Operation of the driver may require
some or all the auxiliary systems to be placed in operation.
r
Fo
5.2.2 Unless the gearbox is suspected to have a problem, it is not recommended to include the gearbox
in the solo test. If the gearbox is operated without driven equipment, consult the gear manufacturer for
operation of the gear in an unloaded condition.
5.2.3 Take driver and gearbox (if applicable) coupling hub runout readings. Readings should be taken on
each coupling hub rim on the machined surface perpendicular to the centerline of rotation. Readings
should also be taken on the face of each coupling hub machined surface as far as practical from the shaft
center of rotation. When taking the face runout reading for each hub, verify that the shaft does not axially
25 of 241
change position by using a second indicator on that shaft end. Installed coupling hubs should have 0.002
in. (0.05 mm) or less total indicated runout (TIR). This limitation applies to the coupling rim and to the
coupling face.
Special-purpose equipment coupling hub runout requirements often will be more restrictive.
5.3 Gearbox
y
n nl
5.3.1 Clean the gearbox exterior before removing the inspection cover or upper case half.
tio O
5.3.2 Visually inspect the gear teeth for signs of pitting, tooth distress, tooth breakage or corrosion.
5.3.3 Record the gear backlash. Visually inspect gear contact pattern through the inspection cover.
bu se
Rotate the gear elements and inspect all the gear teeth for any abnormalities. Document the results with
written notes and/or photos.
tri U
5.3.4 If the gear contact pattern is not discernible, a gear contact check can be performed. The gear
contact is verified by applying a thin coating of color transfer material (such as Prussian blue) at three
is 0
locations 120 degrees apart to 4 or more teeth of the dry degreased gear wheel. Layout dye should not
be used for this contact check. The coated teeth should be rotated through the mesh with a moderate
D 01
drag torque applied in a direction that will cause the teeth to contact on the normally loaded faces. The
contact verification pattern transfer should show evidence of contact distributed across each helix.
al 5
The results of the contact check should be preserved by lifting the contact verification pattern from a tooth
by applying and peeling off a strip of clear adhesive tape and then applying the tape to an annotated
er lot
sheet of white paper.
en al
Typically, the contact verification check should show a minimum of 80% contact across the tooth length.
B
5.3.5 For future contact check, clean and coat a minimum of 5 teeth across the full face of each helix at
four locations equally spaced around the gear wheel and two locations equally spaced around the pinion
with hard layout lacquer. The actual operating contact pattern can be observed later by visual inspection
rG e
after some operating time.

Fo itte
5.3.6 If accessible, check oil spray nozzles for damage along with oil spray pattern on gears to ensure oil
spray direction is properly aligned with teeth.
ot m
5.3.7 Special Purpose Gear repairs should be in accordance with API RP 687.
N m
5.4 Coupling Components

o
5.4.1 Coupling components such as hubs, shaft nuts, keys, spacers, disc packs, or bolts should be
C
inspected per 10.6.3.
5.4.2 Grease lubricated couplings should be inspected for grease condition such as lack of grease,
r
Fo
grease separation and hardened grease.
5.4.3 Inspect exposed shaft guards for integrity and safety. Corrections can be completed by replacing
per 5.8.
5.4.4 If the coupling guard is not a spark-resistant guard, consider upgrading to a spark-resistant guard
per 11.8.2.
NOTE Many users consider pure aluminium and aluminium alloys with a maximum content of 2 %
magnesium or 0.2 % copper, all copper, and copper-based alloys (e.g. brass, bronze) to be spark-
26 of 241
resistant. However, local standards, such as EN 13463-1, might not allow aluminium or non-metallic
materials within potentially explosive atmospheres.
5.5 Baseplates
5.5.1 The pump baseplate should be cleaned for inspection. The baseplate drains should be functional.
y
5.5.2 The baseplate should be visually inspected to identify any problems such as corrosion, weld joint
n nl
failure or other deterioration.
tio O
5.5.3 If stepped or tapered equipment shims were used, check the level of the mounting pads. Equipment
mounting pads should be per API 686.
bu se
5.5.4 Shims and spacers, if any, should be cleaned and checked for flatness.
5.5.4.1 Shim(s) and spacers should be evaluated for re-use. Existing shims that are not austenitic
tri U
stainless steel should not be cleaned or reused.
is 0
5.5.4.2 Shims should be per API 686.
D 01
5.5.4.3 Shim thickness and location should be documented.
al 5
5.5.4.4 Evaluate the thickness of the shim packs under each foot of the pump and driver to determine if
machining of the baseplate mounting surface is necessary to eliminate or to provide for shims. If multiple
shims were installed under the pump feet, consider replacing with a single piece spacer.
er lot
5.5.4.5 Multiple shims for drivers that exceed the requirements in API 686 can be minimized by including
en al
a spacer in addition to the allowable shims.

B
5.5.5 Mounting pads should be cleaned and free from rust, burrs, etc.
5.5.6 The threads of holes and fasteners should be visually inspected for gross defects. This visual
rG e
inspection should be made without magnification and is intended to detect such gross defects as missing
Fo itte
or incomplete threads, defective thread profile, torn or ruptured surfaces, yielding, cracks and bent
fasteners. Record any damage found during the inspection. If cupping of washers has occurred, consider
replacing the washer with hardened washers per ASTM F436/F436M.
ot m
5.5.7 Mounting pads should be protected with an appropriate preservative including reinstalling the
N m
equipment’s mounting bolts with a preservative
5.5.8 Pedestal dowel pin holes, if present, should be brushed cleaned and free from any burrs, rust or
o
debris. Lightly cleaning with a hand held tapered reamer can also help.
C
5.5.9 The baseplate should be checked for grout voids by doing “ring test” on the top of the baseplate.
Map findings.
r
Fo
5.6 Foundation
5.6.1 The foundation should be cleaned and inspected to locate any problems such as cracked or loose
concrete or grout.
5.6.2 Baseplate anchor bolts should be visually inspected. Loose or sheared anchor bolts or nuts should
be evaluated for corrective action.
5.6.3 Inspect for foundation settlement such as by:
27 of 241
a) Cracks in the foundation or grout
b) Out of level baseplate
c) Corrosion of the baseplate
d) Piping misalignment
y
n nl
5.7 Auxiliary Systems
tio O
5.7.1 General
5.7.1.1 Piping / Tubing
bu se
5.7.1.1.1 Piping should be visually inspected for:
tri U
a) thread damage,
is 0
b) pitting,
D 01
c) gouges,
d) wear, al 5
er lot
e) cracking,
f) cleanliness,
en al
g) joint upgrade opportunities such as in 11.5.4.2.

B
If piping is damaged in a way that would affect the integrity, the damaged components should be replaced
rG e
and hydrostatically tested.

Fo itte
5.7.1.1.2 Tubing should be visually inspected for:

ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
28 of 241
a) missing fitting components,
b) incorrectly compressed components,
c) thread damage of fittings,
d) pitting,
y
n nl
e) gouges,
tio O
f) wear,
g) cracking,
bu se
h) cleanliness,
tri U
i) kinks.
is 0
If tubing is damaged in a way that would affect the integrity, the damaged components should be
D 01
replaced.
5.7.1.1.3 Inspect auxiliary piping connections to the pump pressure casing. Pipe nipples should not be
al 5
more than 6 in. (152 mm) long and should be a minimum of Schedule 160 seamless for sizes NPS 1 (DN
25) and smaller and a minimum of Schedule 80 for NPS 1½ (DN 40) and larger. Specific piping
er lot
specifications for the application should be reviewed to determine if a heavier schedule for the piping
components is necessary.
en al
5.7.1.1.4 Inspect auxiliary piping connections for gusseting for integrity and potential upgrade such as
noted in 11.5.4.8 and Figure 5.1
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
C
Figure 5.1 – Typical Gusset Design

r
Fo
5.7.1.2 Orifices
5.7.1.2.1 Check for wear or blockage. There should be free flow through the orifice(s). Visually inspect
and measure each orifice diameter. The inlet edge of the bore should be sharp, free of burrs and not
worn. The bore inside diameter should be square and not tapered. Replace as necessary.
For some high pressure applications, the orifice(s) can be a multi-pass (series of orifice discs
circumferentially offset in one assembly) orifice. Refer to Figure 5.2.
29 of 241
Metering orifices can have a beveled edge and the orientation of this beveled edge is critical. The beveled
edge should face downstream
Square edge orifices are the most common, but other edge geometries can be employed, therefore verify
the design prior to replacing the orifice.
Compare the results of the measurements to the orifice style and dimension per the documented
y
recommendations.
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 5.2 – Multi-pass Orifice Assembly
en al
B
5.7.1.2.2 For threaded and drilled orifices manufactured from bar stock, inspect the threads and orifice
size.
rG e
5.7.1.2.3 All orifices, if used, should have the bore size and identification number attached to an austenitic
Fo itte
stainless-steel tag, etched on the bar stock, or for plate orifices with a tab, have the information etched on
the tab.
5.7.1.3 Steam Traps

ot m
5.7.1.3.1 Visually inspect any steam traps for damage or other problems. Repair or replace as necessary.
N m
5.7.1.3.2 Steam traps can be ultrasonically tested (UT) to determine if they are properly functioning. The
o
steam trap should be in service for the testing.

C
5.7.1.4 Instrumentation
r
The set points, calibration, and functionality of instrumentation should be checked and verified. It is also
Fo
good to inspect wiring for loose or corroded connections, kinks, pinches around sharp corners, cracked,
cut or abraded insulation, burn marks, and other integrity issues.
5.7.1.5 Valves
Valves that are defective should be repaired or replaced.
30 of 241
5.7.1.6 Sight Glasses
Any sight glass should be checked for cracks, gasket damage, function, and replaced as necessary.
Removable sight glasses should be removed and cleaned. Weld pad type sight glasses should be
disassembled and cleaned. New gasketing should be used for reassembly.
5.7.1.7 Cleanliness
y
n nl
5.7.1.7.1 All components should be cleaned, inspected, tested, operation verified and replaced, as
applicable
tio O
5.7.1.7.2 Clean the area upon completion of all inspections.
bu se
5.7.1.8 Equipment installation
5.7.1.8.1 Verify that the equipment that is/was installed on the baseplate, mounting plate or plates had
tri U
mounting bolts and alignment devices that are/were centered.
is 0
5.7.1.8.2 If bolt bound situations had previously occurred, determine whether corrections are necessary
and how the corrections should be completed.
D 01
5.7.1.8.3 Review the condition of any washers used and whether hardened washers should be used for
al 5
the re-installation.
5.7.1.9 Auxiliary components

er lot
5.7.1.9.1 Review auxiliary systems for proper installation and sufficient instrumentation such as pressure
en al
or temperature measuring devices.

B
5.7.1.9.2 Review any component openings to determine if blinds or solid pipe plugs need to be installed.
5.7.1.9.3 Review any components for recommended vents and drains.

rG e
Fo itte
5.7.2 Seal System
5.7.2.1 Auxiliary Seal System

ot m
Auxiliary seal system components can include:

N m
a) heat exchangers
o
b) reservoirs
C
c) cyclone separators
r
Fo
d) strainers
e) accumulators
f) filters
g) flow indicator
h) instrumentation
31 of 241
5.7.2.1.1 Auxiliary system and components should be drained of all fluids for complete inspection of the
components
a) Auxiliary components should be cleaned or replaced.
b) Remove any piping or tubing to allow for cleaning and inspection.
y
n nl
c) Any internal coils should be removed, where possible, cleaned, and inspected.
tio O
d) Cover any open ends to prevent contamination per 4.5.1.8.
e) If the reservoir has a bottom flange, it should be removed to allow complete cleaning.
bu se
tri U
5.7.2.1.2 Cooling coils (removable or non-removable), should have the outside of the coils cleaned,
typically with high pressure water, and the inside of the coils cleaned by flushing with a cleaning solution.
is 0
5.7.2.1.3 Auxiliary components, including flanges and fittings, should be visually inspected for
D 01
deterioration or pitting. Any dents, scratches, or gouges should be investigated to verify that the integrity
of the component has not been jeopardized. Pitting damage should be measured, and the remaining
thickness should be reviewed to verify that the component continues to meet the datasheet and
al 5
nameplate design information. If the nameplate is not clearly readable, it should be renewed or replaced
as needed. Nameplates should not be removed.
er lot
a) The connections and flange faces should be visually inspected. Refer to Annex U for allowable flange
face surface imperfections.
en al
b) Vessels should be inspected in accordance with site regulations.

B
5.7.2.1.4 If repairs are made to the auxiliary component the component should be hydrostatically tested
rG e
per 12.4.12.
Fo itte
5.7.2.2 Accumulators
5.7.2.2.1 With the accumulator out of service, verify the pressure of the bladder and compare to the
ot m
specified pre-charge set pressure.

N m
5.7.2.2.2 If the bladder has the correct pressure, the component should be considered OK.
o
5.7.2.2.3 If the bladder does not have the correct pressure, verification should be done to determine if the
bladder leaks or has other problems that will not maintain the pressure.
C
Replace bladder or component as necessary.

r
Fo
5.7.2.3 Filters
Seal Filter elements(s) or filter should be cleaned or replaced.
5.7.2.4 Air Cooled Exchangers
Clean coils or fins and straighten bent fins as needed. For exchangers with motor driven fans, remove fan
assembly, clean, check for loose or damaged components, and that the motor turns freely.
5.7.3 Lube Oil System
32 of 241
5.7.3.1 Lube Oil Reservoir
5.7.3.1.1 Lube oil systems may not need to be drained if the lube oil analysis indicates the oil is
acceptable. If lube oil system is drained, components should be drained of all fluids for complete
inspection of the components. Clean and inspect oil drain lines and reservoir. After cleaning and
inspection, cover any open ends per 4.5.1.8 to prevent contamination. Any heaters should be de-
energized and locked out prior to draining reservoir. Clean components in a manner which removes all
y
contaminants and foreign material. Lint free device should be used in the cleaning process.
n nl
5.7.3.1.2 Remove, clean, inspect for damage and replace as applicable: inspection covers, vent
tio O
breathers, relief and check valves, and pump suction strainers.
5.7.3.1.3 Clean, inspect and test heater.
bu se
5.7.3.2 Lube Oil Heat Exchangers
tri U
5.7.3.2.1 Exchangers should be cleaned or replaced. Remove any piping or tubing to allow for cleaning
and inspection. Cover any open ends to prevent contamination.
is 0
5.7.3.2.2 Exchangers should be visually inspected for deterioration or pitting including tube sheets,
D 01
internal tubing, flanges, anodes and fittings.
al 5
a) Any dents, scratches, or gouges should be investigated to verify that the integrity of the component has
not been jeopardized.
er lot
b) Pitting damage should be measured, and the remaining thickness should be reviewed to verify that the
component continues to meet the nameplate’s design information.
en al
c) If the nameplate is not clearly readable, it should be renewed or replaced as needed.

B
d) The connections and flange faces should be visually inspected. Refer to Annex U for allowable flange
rG e
face surface imperfections.

Fo itte
e) Nameplates should not be removed.
f) Vessels should be inspected in accordance with site or regulations.

ot m
5.7.3.2.3 The higher pressure side of the exchanger should be hydrostatically tested per 12.4.12.
N m
5.7.3.3 Lube Oil Accumulators/Pulsation Dampeners

o
With the accumulator/pulsation dampener out of service, verify the pressure of the bladder and compare
C
to the specified pre-charge set pressure.

r
a) If the bladder has the correct pressure, the component should be OK.
Fo
b) If the bladder does not have the correct pressure, verification should be done to determine if the bladder
leaks or has other problems that will not maintain the pressure.
Replace bladder or component as necessary.
5.7.3.4 Lube Oil Filter housings should be completely drained and elements replaced.
5.7.3.5 Lube Oil Air Cooled Exchangers
33 of 241
Clean coils or fins and straighten bent fins as needed. For exchangers with motor driven fans, remove fan
assembly if necessary, clean, check for loose components, and that the motor turns freely.
5.7.3.6 Lube Oil Pumps should be cleaned along with the suction screen, driver, and coupling. Confirm
free rotation of the pump.
5.7.4 Oil Mist System
y
n nl
5.7.4.1 Oil mist re-classifier(s) should be visually inspected for plugging or damage and should be
cleaned.
tio O
5.7.4.2 Verify that each reclassifer is the proper size. Maintain the oil mist reclassifer in the correct
location and orientation.
bu se
5.7.4.3 Oil mist manifold should be drained and checked for broken or cracked sight glass.
tri U
5.7.4.4 Clean the oil mist manifold, sight glass, and collection bottle.
is 0
5.7.4.5 Drain oil accumulators.
D 01
5.7.4.6 Inspect tubing and replace if damaged even slightly.
al 5
5.7.5 Cooling Water System
Cooling Water System components should be cleaned, inspected and replaced as necessary. If fouled,
er lot
remove a sample for possible analysis.
en al
5.7.6 Electrical and Instrumentation

B
5.7.6.1 Verify that all electrical components, instrumentation and electrical isolation components are
identified, function properly and are in good condition.
rG e
5.7.6.2 Verify all ground wiring is properly connected, functioning and is included for all equipment
Fo itte
5.8 Guards for exposed shaft areas

ot m
5.8.1 Verify that the guard(s) for exposed shaft areas meet ANSI B11.19 and API 610. If a guard is not
included, review 11.8.2.
N m
5.8.2 Visually inspect the guard(s) for:

o
a) Structural integrity
C
b) Indications of rubbing or contact that indicate it has been deformed or distorted

r
c) Discoloration of non-metallic components

Fo
d) Fastener condition
e) Spark-resistant material construction
5.9 Work Scopes and Revised Work Scopes
34 of 241
Additional Field Work Scope revisions may be necessary until the problem has been resolved. If it is
determined that the pump should be removed and sent to a repair shop, then a “Repair Shop Work Scope
(RSWS)” should be developed.
6 Field Repair
This section covers repairs made to the items left in the field after the pump has been removed for
y
repairs. This section does not cover any pump repair or process piping repair.
n nl
6.1 Work Scopes
tio O
The work scope developed in 5.9 from field inspections should be completed. ASME Code items should
be repaired per the code.
bu se
6.2 Foundation
tri U
6.2.1 The baseplate can be removed to correct broken or loose baseplate anchor bolts or foundation
settlement.
is 0
6.2.2 Damaged concrete should be removed to sound aggregate and replaced.
D 01
6.2.3 Re-grouting and leveling should be per API 686.
6.3
al 5
Grouting
er lot
6.3.1 Cracked, broken or loose grout should be repaired by chipping out the damaged grout and
replacing per API 686 with epoxy grout – or other grout materials as approved. Small cracks can be filled
en al
with grout or epoxy to prevent further deterioration.

B
6.3.2 Void areas under the top deck plate that are located around equipment supports should be drilled
and filled with fluid epoxy grout in accordance with the methods in API 686.
rG e
6.4 Baseplates
Fo itte
6.4.1 Tapped holes for equipment hold-down bolts should be cleaned and "chased" for ease of
installation. Bolts should be wire brushed and threads "chased", cleaned and protected until re-use.
ot m
Chasing taps should be used to prevent over sizing threads. Recheck for any raised burrs after thread
chasing.
N m
6.4.2 Holes for pump hold down bolts should be per 12.4.10.4.
o
6.4.3 Equipment mounting pads that are out of level can be repaired by machining per API 686.
C
6.4.3.1 Mounting pads should be protected with an appropriate preservative.

r
Fo
6.4.3.2 If mounting pads have provision for taper pin dowels, the holes should be cleaned by hand turning
a taper pin reamer lightly in the hole.

6.4.4 Damaged metal portion of the baseplate can be repaired by welding using the appropriate
procedures for the material being welded. Repairs to equipment mounting pads should have an
engineering review to verify that the integrity of the baseplate is sufficient. Caution should be taken when
welding on the baseplate to prevent affecting grout to base plate bond, distortion of mounting pads and
damage to other equipment from stray currents.
6.5 Pump Driver
35 of 241
Details for the repairs of the driver are not included within this Recommended Practice.
6.6 Gearbox
Gearbox repairs should be per API RP 687.
6.7 Coupling and Exposed Shaft Guards
y
n nl
6.7.1 Couplings should be inspected per 10.6.3.
tio O
6.7.1.1 Disc packs on general purpose metal flexible disk style couplings should be replaced if damaged
and the coupling re-balanced if necessary.
bu se
6.7.1.2 During coupling removal and disassembly keep the disc pack in the same orientation/position in
relation to the hub and spacer. Do not separate disc packs that will be reused.
tri U
6.7.1.3 Consider sending these couplings to the owner’s selected coupling vendor for refurbishment.
Other general purpose couplings are generally not repaired.
is 0
6.7.1.4 Special purpose couplings should be repaired by a coupling vendor selected by the owner that
D 01
can maintain the integrity of the coupling per API RP 687 Chapter 1, Appendix C.
6.7.2 al 5
Refer to 11.8.1, ANSI B11.19 and API 610 for guidance on replacement or repair of shaft guards.
6.8 Auxiliary Systems

er lot
Auxiliary System repairs are described in section 5.7.
en al
6.9 Electrical Grounding

B
Electrical Grounding systems should be repaired by correcting the grounding lugs or wiring. Typically,
rG e
these items are replaced.

Fo itte
6.10 Piping Strain
Piping strain correction should be in accordance to API 686.

ot m
7 Shipment of Equipment or Components to or From Repair Shop

N m
7.1 Preparation for Shipment

o
7.1.1 The repair shop or owner has the authority to reject any shipment not in compliance with their
C
rules and regulations.

r
7.1.2 Consult with the repair shop for:

Fo
a) shipping container or skid requirements
b) communications when shipping is initiated
c) photographs
d) liquid draining
36 of 241
e) preservation
f) warning tags
g) necessary tooling or fixtures
h) hold points established before shipping
y
n nl
i) identification of the length of shipping or storage time
tio O
j) additional cleaning/decontamination
7.1.3 Shipping Containers or skids should be per 7.3.
bu se
7.1.4 All shipments not in containers should have a canvas tarp to avoid miscellaneous damage by
tri U
foreign objects and moisture.
7.1.5 Preservation should be applied to the equipment and/or components to prevent damage during
is 0
shipping and possible storage. Safety Data Sheet information should be provided for the preservative.
D 01
7.1.6 The pump or component(s) should be adequately supported and restrained to prevent movement
during shipment. Block the shaft to prevent axial movement.
al 5
7.1.7 Rotors being returned for repair should be adequately preserved to prevent any damage or
er lot
environmental deterioration (see API 686). Each proximity probe target area (burnished areas) of the
shaft should be protected during disassembly with material such as non-adhesive vinyl tape. Each area
should further be easily identified such as with a brightly colored wrapping indicating a probe area and
en al
“PROBE AREA, DO NOT CUT” wording. The rotor should be supported per the recommendations of
7.3.
B
7.1.8 Verify that all openings of the pump and seal(s) have been sealed using flange covers and metal
rG e
plugs.
Fo itte
7.1.9 Verify that decontamination and /or draining has been completed.
7.1.10 The repair shop should provide unique identification number(s) to allow tracking of all owner
ot m
components at that shop.

N m
7.1.11 The owner should identify all components with a common unique job related number, such as a
purchase order or requisition number.
o
7.1.11.1 Material(s) shipped separately should be identified with securely affixed, corrosion-resistant
C
metal tags indicating the unique number.

r
7.1.11.2 Crated equipment should be shipped with duplicate packing lists, one inside and one outside of
Fo
the shipping container. The packing list should have the unique number and describe each item in the
crate.
7.2 Shipment
7.2.1 General
7.2.1.1 The equipment and/or components should be tagged with the owner’s description. Equipment
inside enclosed shipping containers should also have tagging attached to the equipment.
37 of 241
7.2.1.2 Any pump or component(s) containing hazardous or flammable material should be cleaned and
decontaminated (some disassembly can be necessary) in accordance with applicable governmental
codes, regulations, ordinances, directives, or rules prior to being transported to an off site location. Safety
Data Sheets should be included. A repair shop may require owner certification that the pump has been
sufficiently cleaned of all hazardous materials. The owner should communicate with the repair shop of the
possibility of trapped liquids or gases that can result in either a safety situation or that can be affected by
the use of flame torches to facilitate disassembly. Consideration should be given to differences with
y
regulations and languages of the shipping and receiving locations.
n nl
The owner and repair shop may discuss and arrange for cleaning and decontamination at the repair shop.
tio O
Note 1: The United States Department of Transportation (DOT) regulates hazmat transportation within the
territory of the US.
bu se
Note 2: Refer also to Hydraulic Institute Standard 9.5, “Decontamination of Returned Products
Procedure”.
tri U
Consider requirements for other countries that may be used for shipping or receiving.
is 0
The repair shop has the authority to reject any shipment not in compliance with their rules and
D 01
regulations.
7.2.1.3 The vehicle, the type of vehicle and method of securing the equipment should be adequate for
al 5
the load being transported.
er lot
7.2.1.4 Hold down methods should not damage the equipment.
en al
7.2.1.5 Tooling and fixtures for lifting, disassembly and assembly should be provided, if requested by the
repair shop.
B
7.2.2 Transporting to or from an on-site repair shop should be done per the recommendations of the
site.
rG e
Fo itte
7.2.3 Transport to or from Off-Site Repair Shop
7.2.3.1 The shipping location should document what is included with the shipment. Attach a copy of this
ot m
document to the equipment and another copy to the outside of any shipping container. Transmit a copy to
the repair shop upon departure of the shipment to the repair shop.
N m
7.2.3.2 Take photographs for documentation of the equipment as loaded onto the vehicle.
o
7.3 Shipping Containers/Skids

C
7.3.1 Shipping containers/skids should be adequate to perform the intended service of support,
protection, handling, and the length of shipping and storage time.
r
Fo
7.3.2 Hold down methods should not damage the equipment.
● 7.3.3 If specified, the containers should have a dual purpose of shipping and storage.
7.3.4 Labeling to include as a minimum (depending if the shipment is from the owner or the repair
shop):
38 of 241
a) owner name, location, address, phone contact;
b) description of equipment or components;
c) net and gross weight of equipment or components;
d) purchase order;
y
n nl
e) the box or container number and the total number of boxes or containers in the shipment, example box
#1 of 4;
tio O
f) center of gravity or sling marks-location-fork location;
bu se
g) repair shop name, location, address, phone contact.
tri U
● 7.3.5 If specified, the shipping containers, skids or pallets should be returned to the owner.
is 0
7.3.6 The shipping container should be:
D 01
a) designed for the specific weight and configuration;
al 5
b) welded construction and NDT all welds;
c) constructed to allow for lifting with a fork truck or crane;

er lot
d) have lifting points or lifting lugs that are clearly identified on the equipment or equipment package with
en al
recommended lifting arrangement identified;

B
e) allow clearance for small bore piping and tubing that maybe attached to pump –seal flush and case drain,
etc.;
rG e
f) painted or coated;
Fo itte
g) chamfer or radius all sharp corners;

ot m
h) Flat and level mounting areas.

N m
7.3.7 If rotors are shipped separately, cradles for the rotor’s shipment should be provided that minimize
bending and flexing. Do not support rotors on bearing, proximity probe target areas or seal areas or at
o
any exposed critical location. Pump rotors can typically be supported on impeller outer diameters. Rotor
retainers should be used to prevent axial and radial movement during transit. A material such as micarta
C
or mylar having a minimum thickness of 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) should be used between the rotor and the cradle
at the support areas. Rotor should be blocked to prevent axial movement.
r
Fo
7.3.8 Containers or skids considerations include the following:
a) Shipping skids can also be used to facilitate the repair in the repair shop by supporting the pump case.
b) The skid design should be proportioned to reduce roll over during shipping or repair shop activities.
c) Design for “bump” protection of the shaft extension. (Consider a post)
d) The design will resemble the pump base, less the driver base.
39 of 241
Refer to Annex V for pictures of Shipping Containers, skids and shaft positioning tooling.
7.3.9 The shaft should be locked into position so that it cannot move axially. Figure 7.1 shows an
example of a device that can be used to prevent the shaft axial movement.
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 7.1—Shaft Axial Prevention Device Example

B
7.3.10 Lumber used should be of sound construction materials with no adverse checks or knots.
7.3.11 Steel strapping should be un-annealed.

rG e
Fo itte
7.3.12 If weight is under 50 lbs. (23 kg) cardboard boxes can be used with urethane foam, wadding or
corrugated paper.
7.3.13 Export shipping can require additional details.

ot m
8 Receipt of Pump and Components by Repair Shop

N m
8.1 Receiving of Pump

o
C
8.1.1 The repair shop should assign personnel trained in the correct lifting procedures and equipment
selection for moving pumps.
r
Fo
8.1.2 Equipment and vehicles that are used for lifting and moving parts should be maintained and exhibit
current certifications of inspection and rating.
8.2 Receiving Inspections
8.2.1 The repair shop should make provisions for identification, verification, segregation, storage,
maintenance, and release of all owner-supplied parts, materials, or items.
8.2.2 The repair shop should log in all owner-supplied materials upon receipt and verify against the
received bill of lading and/or packing list.
40 of 241
8.2.3 The repair shop should photograph the “as received” condition of the shipping container, skid and
box.
8.2.4 Any apparent damage to the shipping container, skid, or box should be documented on a
receiving record, photographed to clearly show details of any damaged areas and immediately reported
to carrier, repair shop representative, and owner representative. If shipping damage is present, a
schedule should be set to proceed to the disassembly of the pump to determine what, if any, damage
y
occurred to the pump assembly as a result of shipping. Any damage due to shipping or handling should
be resolved prior to proceeding. The owner will notify the repair shop when work may proceed.
n nl
tio O
8.2.5 All owner-supplied material will be clearly marked with the repair shop job number and/or owner
reference number and clearly identified as “customer property.”
bu se
8.2.6 Owner-supplied items should be stored in a location which will preserve the integrity of the items.
Regular monitoring and checks will be performed by the repair shop to detect the effectiveness of the
storage procedure. Any deterioration will be reported to the owner representative.
tri U
9 Disassembly and Cleaning of the Pump (in Repair Shop)
is 0
9.1 Disassembly of the Pump
D 01
9.1.1 Prior to disassembly of the pump complete the following:
al 5
a) Fluids can be trapped in subassemblies or components. Consider exposure to these materials prior to
er lot
disassembly.
b) Obtain instruction and operating manual, cross sectional drawings, data sheets, seal information and
en al
clearance information for comparison as the pump is being disassembled. Record any differences
between the actual and the drawings or data sheets.
B
c) Verify that all tooling and fixtures for disassembly and assembly are available
rG e
Fo itte
d) Perform a visual inspection of the pump. Observe the components for any evidence of discoloration,
erosion, corrosion, leakage areas, improper assembly or physical damage. Take photographs to
document the as-received condition, including nameplate(s), any piping arrangements such as the
pump’s vents, drains, balance lines if used, seal lines, orifices, valving orientation, coupling hub, special
ot m
pump features, and seal gland and port orientation.

N m
e) Verify that the pump rotor freely turns, if applicable.

o
f) Record installed coupling hub radial and axial runout.

C
g) Record the location of the coupling hub on the shaft. Confirm if the entire keyway in the shaft and hub
r
are filled with a key.

Fo
h) Remove coupling hub.
i) With coupling hub removed, record radial runout of shaft end extension.
j) Prior to disassembling bearing housings, do a bearing lift on each end of the rotor with the indicator
positioned as close as possible to the bearing housing and a rotor axial float check and record the
information. These checks apply to rolling element or hydrodynamic bearings. The lift check may not
41 of 241
represent the actual bearing clearance.
k) Record location of installed component dowels.
9.1.2 During disassembly complete the following:
a) Photograph the components as the pump is being disassembled. A photo log should be maintained for
y
all work performed. Clearly photograph in detail any unusual or abnormal condition. Record on a sketch
n nl
the size and photograph the location, and orientation (including a physical reference point and angular
location along with viewed direction) of any leakage areas, discoloration, erosion, corrosion damage
tio O
resulting in loss or displacement of material, deposits, and buildup.
bu se
b) Take “as-found” samples of any remaining residues and deposits without further contaminating the
sample. Return the sample to the owner, if requested, for laboratory analysis. If deposits are suspected
to have caused damage such as cracks or corrosion, the repair work may be delayed until a complete
tri U
analysis is performed, at the discretion of the owner.
is 0
c) Match-mark all pump components to assure repeatability of the assembly. Markings should be durable
enough to withstand the cleaning process of the components. If the parts have previous marking that
D 01
will not apply to this particular repair, remove them or identify these markings as not current.
al 5
d) Identify all visible areas of concern and take sufficient photographs to document critical pump
components in the as- received condition and prior to cleaning. The area of interest on the photograph
er lot
should be identified.
e) Check for rubbed, wiped, galled or loose components. Fracture surfaces of failed components should be
en al
protected and not abrasively cleaned or otherwise modified. Broken components should not be
reassembled due to potential damage to the fracture surface. Debris of broken parts should be
B
collected and kept together with the assembly. These components, pieces, and debris should be kept
by the repair shop until the owner has decided if failure analysis should be performed. If a failure
rG e
analysis is performed, it should be determined who will perform the analysis and the scope.
Fo itte
f) Record the orientation, type, location of the bearings and any bearing identification markings. For
hydrodynamic bearings record rotation arrows and anti-rotation pin positions. For rolling element
bearings record if the thrust arrangement is back-to-back, face-to-face, or other.
ot m
g) Identify and record instrumentation and its positioning.

N m
h) Check for debris in piping or passageways.

o
C
i) All parts and components should be kept until inspections and investigations are completed. Parts should
be marked for their location within the pump and parts that are in multiple pieces should be kept together
and bagged. Consider that some parts can be damaged during disassembly.
r
Fo
j) Unless removal of wear rings or bushings is necessary for pump disassembly, they should not be
removed until inspection has been completed.
k) Disassembly and cleaning of the pump and components at the repair shop can generate hazardous
waste. Parts such as spent gaskets, O-rings and other items can require special handling. The owner
42 of 241
and the repair shop should discuss handling and disposal of the generated waste.
9.1.3 Overhung style pumps (OH1 through OH5), and two stage overhung style pumps should be
disassembled for inspection. These pumps require the rotor to be disassembled during pump
disassembly.
9.1.4 Between bearing style pumps BB1 through BB5 should be disassembled according to the
y
following criteria.
n nl
a) For BB1 pumps the entire pump should be removed from the field and sent to the repair shop for
tio O
disassembly and inspection. The rotor should not be unstacked.
bu se
b) For BB2 pumps the entire pump should be removed from the field and sent to the repair shop for
disassembly and inspection. Single stage volute style pump rotors should not be unstacked. For two
stage style pumps the rotor requires unstacking during pump disassembly.
tri U
c) For BB3 pumps the entire pump should be removed from the field and sent to the repair shop for
is 0
disassembly and inspection. Volute style pump rotors should not be unstacked unless otherwise
specified. The inspection and possible disassembly for these rotors is identified in 10.2.3. For diffuser
D 01
style pumps the rotor requires unstacking during pump disassembly.
d) For BB4 pumps the entire pump should be removed from the field and sent to the repair shop for
al 5
disassembly and inspection. The rotor requires unstacking during pump disassembly.
er lot
e) For BB5 pumps the outer casing (barrel) is not always removed from the field but should be inspected
per 10.4.2.9. The cartridge assembly or bundle assembly with end head(s), seals, bearing housings
en al
and bearings is sent to the repair shop for disassembly and inspection. Rotors for volute style pumps
should not be unstacked unless otherwise specified. The inspection and possible disassembly for
B
these rotors is identified in 10.2.3. For diffuser style pumps the rotor requires unstacking during pump
disassembly.
rG e
f) For all BB pumps:

Fo itte
1) Record the axial position of the impeller(s) with relation to the diffuser(s)/volute with the rotor at its
running position in the active thrust direction. Once the thrust bearing has been removed the
running position of the rotor cannot be determined unless this reference dimension has been
recorded. This dimension can be used to determine if the impeller(s) are in their proper operating
ot m
location and to align the rotor and diffuser/volute on reassembly of the pump.
2) Refer to 10.3.5.3 for sleeve length inspection because deviation of a sleeve length can result in
N m
misalignment of the impellers with diffusers/volutes.

3) After bearing removal measure axial and radial rotor float/clearance.
o
C
g) Refer to 10.2.2 for criteria to unstack assembled rotors which do not require unstacking during pump
disassembly.
r
9.1.5 Rolling Element Bearings

Fo
9.1.5.1 Record the axial position of the radial bearings. Record the as found face orientation of the two,
single-row thrust bearings.
9.1.5.2 If present, remove lock nut and lock washer.
9.1.5.3 Remove rolling element bearings using pullers or presses. Use of grinders for cutting rings off a
shaft is a last resort and the use of cutting torches is not permitted. Refer to Annex G for examples of
rolling element bearing damage and the cause of the damage. Figure 9.1 and Figure 9.2 show tooling for
43 of 241
removing bearings. If using a puller or press, apply an even force to the inner ring and at a right angle to
the bearing.
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U

is 0
Figure 9.1—Set-up for Bearing Puller to Remove Bearings
D 01
Wrong Correct
al 5 Use soft material
to protect shaft
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Support inner ring
Fo itte

Figure 9.2—Set-up for Hydraulic Press Removal of Bearings
ot m
9.1.5.4 Used rolling element bearings should be replaced with new bearings upon reassembly. Refer to
N m
Annex F for information on rolling element bearings and Annex G for examples of rolling element bearing
damage.
o
C
9.1.6 Hydrodynamic Bearings
Prior to removing hydrodynamic bearings, identify match marks. If the bearings are not match marked,
r
mark the top and bottom halves and direction of installation. Hydrodynamic bearings should be removed
Fo
and inspected in accordance with Annex H. Refer to Annex I for examples of hydrodynamic bearing
damage. During inspections it is important to identify if the bearings were properly installed.
9.1.7 Bearing Housings
9.1.7.1 Remove components on the bearing housing such as:
44 of 241
a) oilers;
b) vents;
c) orifices;
d) plugs;
y
n nl
e) sump drain;
tio O
f) sight glasses;
g) labyrinths;
bu se
h) bearing isolators;
tri U
i) cooling coils;
is 0
j) instrumentation;
D 01
k) oil ring retainers (positioners);
al 5
l) any oil mist fittings if the oil mist fittings were not removed per 4.5.1.6, record the position of any
directional reclassifiers, verify that each reclassifier is the proper size.
er lot
9.1.7.2 The inside of bearing housings should be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner. To prevent
contamination, sand or bead blasting should not be used.
en al
9.1.7.3 Consideration should be given to removing excessive paint on the outside of the bearing housing
B
to improve the cooling efficiency of the bearing housing.

rG e
9.1.7.4 Cooling coils, cartridges or water jacketed bearing housings should be cleaned by using a
Fo itte
solution that dissolves the build-up without damaging the assembly.
9.1.7.5 Inspect bearing housing assemblies and components in accordance with paragraph 10.5.
ot m
9.1.8 Remove any shaft driven oil pumps and visually inspect pump and coupling and replace as
necessary. Confirm pump turns freely.
N m
9.1.9 Mechanical Seals

o
C
9.1.9.1 Mechanical seals should be removed and returned to the owner’s selected seal vendor for
analysis, refurbishment. If possible, allow the seal repair vendor to clean the seal to preserve any
possible failure evidence. Safety Data Sheet information should be supplied with seal to be refurbished.
r
Fo
9.1.9.2 Refer to 10.6.2 for seal inspection and repair
9.1.10 Refer to 5.7 for inspection and repairs for the auxiliary systems, seal systems, lube oil systems,
and cooling water systems.
9.1.11 Pumps with proximity probes should have the location of the proximity probes identified on the
shaft using a non-permanent marker to properly locate the burnished area. The burnished areas of the
pump shaft should be protected during disassembly with material such as non-adhesive vinyl tape.
45 of 241
9.2 Cleaning Methods and Precautions.
9.2.1 Protect all critical areas such as journals, seal areas, burnished areas (probe targets), thermal
gaps, rotating labyrinths, shaft ends, thin blades, non-metallic wearing components and coupling surfaces
during cleaning.
9.2.2 The repair shop should clean the components to remove dirt, rust and other foreign material
y
using a procedure appropriate for the NDT methods to be used.
n nl
9.2.2.1 If abrasive cleaning is used, the abrasives should be a light abrasive such as glass beads which
tio O
removes/cleans the dirt, rust or foreign substances from the surface without a dimensional change to the
surface of the base component. ASTM E165/E165M gives typical cleaning methods and precautions that
are suitable for LPI and may be suitable for other NDT methods.
bu se
9.2.2.2 Protective coatings, used to prevent erosion or corrosion or for performance enhancement,
should be cleaned with a non-abrasive media to prevent coating damage. The coating should not be
tri U
removed for base metal inspection without owner approval. If coatings or foreign material are removed
from the component, caution should be used during abrasive cleaning to prevent component damage.
is 0
9.2.3 Clean and dry lube oil, oil mist, and seal piping and tubing in a manner which removes all
D 01
contaminants and foreign material. After cleaning and inspection, cover any open ends to prevent
contamination.
al 5
10 Shop Inspection of Disassembled Pump, Components and Casing
er lot
10.1 General
en al
10.1.1 In addition to the recommendations of this Recommended Practice, the scope of pump inspection
and repair should be defined by the owner’s performance expectations such as hydraulic performance,
B
vibration criteria and material performance. The inspections of the pump or auxiliary components
including visual, dimensional and other inspections should be sufficient to adequately evaluate the
condition of the pump or auxiliary components. Therefore, while typical inspections are indicated in this
rG e
Recommended Practice, other inspections may be deemed necessary by the owner or the repair shop to
Fo itte
ensure proper evaluation and repair. The Repair Shop Work Scope (RSWS) developed in section
5should be completed during this section.
10.1.2 This section covers the proper inspection methods for the pump, pressure casing, assembled rotor
ot m
(as appropriate), rotor components and other components for all the types of pumps covered in this
document.
N m
10.1.3 The repair shop should record all visual and dimensional inspections on owner approved forms.
o
C
10.1.4 Refer to the instruction manuals and cross-sectional drawings to become familiar with the
components, how they fit together and their function.
r
10.1.5 Recommended dimensional inspections along with resultant fits and clearances are identified in
Fo
Annex W. OEM values for this information should be used. If OEM information is not available, values in
Annex W should be used.
Note 1: The existing component’s fits and clearances may not be as originally designed by the original
equipment manufacturer (OEM), because re-rates and/or upgrades may have been incorporated into the
machine design.
Note 2: The design clearance may be different than the API 610 clearances to improve efficiency,
balance axial thrust, provide rotor stability or maintain desired pressures within the seal chamber.
46 of 241
10.1.6 Unless otherwise specified, tThe measurement device’s resolution should be:accuracy (smallest
division on the measuring device) of the measurements should be:
a) For diameters, the degree of accuracy should be within 0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
b)m) For radial runouts, , the degree of accuracy should be within 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm).
y
c)n) For shaft fits, journals, and coupling area diameters, the degree of accuracy should be within 0.0001 in.
n nl
(0.003 mm).
tio O
o) For diameters other than b), the degree of accuracy should be within 0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
bu se
d)p)For axial stack-up locations, the degree of accuracy should be within 0.0015 in. (0.038 mm).
e)q)For axial runouts, the degree of accuracy should be within 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm).
tri U
r) For axial runouts of shaft shoulders, thrust collar faces, and coupling flanges, the degree of accuracy
is 0
should be within 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm).
D 01
10.1.6.1 A measuring device with the proper resolution should be used. If the component being measured
is not defined in 10.6.1, the resolution should be 1/10th of the tolerance of the measured parameter.
al 5
10.1.6.2 The measuring device should have current calibration and be in good working order. At the
owner’s request, the vendor should demonstrate that all standards and tools have traceable calibration
er lot
certifications.
en al
10.1.6.3 The technician collecting measurements should be competent and be able to demonstrate
repeatability when measuring against a standard.
B
10.1.6.4 For consistency, measurements should be done under stable and repeatable conditions such as
rG e
temperature, orientation and holding of the workpiece.

Fo itte
10.1.7 The result of this section is a revised work scope (Repair Shop Work Scope – rev 01) based on
evaluation of pressure casing, bearing housing, bearings, assembled rotor and rotor components
inspection data. Inspections include:
ot m
a) Visual inspection including existence and extent of any coatings or overlays

N m
b) Dimensional inspections
o
c) Non-destructive testing
C
d) Positive Material Identification (PMI)

r
Fo
10.1.8 Photograph the assembled rotor, rotor components, and stationary components before and after
cleaning. A photo log should be maintained for all work performed. Identification of all items, including
equipment number and part name should be clearly shown on all photographs.
Photograph any unusual or abnormal conditions.
47 of 241
a) Take a distance photo to help in pinpointing location
b) Zoom as tight as possible to the problem area
c) Note on a sketch the photo locations, including a physical reference point and angular location along
with viewed direction for:
y
1. any erosion, corrosion damage resulting in loss or displacement of material
n nl
2. locations of deposits
3. position of stationary components
tio O
● 10.1.9 For any additional disassembly that did not occur in section 7, take “as is” samples of any
residues and deposits without further sample contamination. If requested, return samples to the owner for
bu se
laboratory analysis. If deposits are suspected to have caused damage such as cracks or corrosion, the
repair work may be delayed until a complete analysis can be performed, at the discretion of the owner.
tri U
10.1.10 Visually inspect all components for:
a) Cleanliness
is 0
b) Erosion damage
D 01
c) Corrosion damage
d) Damaged parts
al 5
e) Missing parts
er lot
f) Discoloration
g) Scoring
en al
h) Cracks
B
i) Wear
j) Yielding
rG e
k) Fretting
Fo itte
l) Galling
m) Leakage
ot m
n) Thread damage
N m
o) Gasket surfaces and gasket condition

p) Mating surface damage
o
q) Jackscrew marks
C
r) Burrs
r
s) Sharp corners
Fo
t) Shear rings and groove condition

u) Previous repair evidence
10.1.11 Visually inspect all visible keyways and keys for non-conformances. Refer to Annex T and AGMA
9002-B04 for more information on non-conformances. Refer to Annex W for keyway fit tolerances.
10.1.12 Inspect dowels, dowel holes, anti-rotation pins and slots for mushrooming, burrs, sharp corners,
and galling. Verify dowels properly fit into the dowel holes and that tapered dowels do not bottom out.
10.1.13 Visually inspect components to identify coating and overlays. Measure and record the depth,
length, location, and type of any coatings or overlays.
48 of 241
Note 1: Some coatings or overlays are difficult to identify.
Note 2: Coatings or overlays are typically applied to components that are in abrasive or corrosive services
such as wear rings bushings and sleeves.
Note 3: Other applications of coatings include shaft coatings at locations such as bearings fits or journals,
y
impeller fits, or packing areas.
n nl
Note 4: Use of a non-magnetic thickness tester or solution of copper phosphate or copper sulfate can
assist in locating plating, however this solution can be incompatible with the materials.
tio O
● 10.1.14 Non-destructive testing (NDT) procedures as outlined in 10.1.21 should be used to determine
bu se
the existence and location of any indication. Record the size, location, and orientation of any indications
on a sketch or appropriate form.
tri U
10.1.14.1 The type of NDT should be selected based on material of construction and suspected flaws.
Prior to NDT, residual magnetism should be measured and recorded.
is 0
a) Non-magnetic components should be (PT) Penetrant inspected.
D 01
b) Ferro-magnetic components should be (MT) Magnetic Particle inspected.
al 5
c) When inspecting to ensure a void does not exist between coatings or Babbitt, a (UT) Ultrasonic
Inspection should be completed.
er lot
d) In all cases, the component is to receive a VT (Visual Inspection Test)
en al
e) Only techniques providing quantitative results should be used. Mill test reports (MTR’S), material
composition certificates, visual stamps or markings should not be considered substitutes for PMI testing
B
of metallic parts. OEM certification is acceptable for non-metallic components.

rG e
10.1.14.2 Table 10.1 and Table 10.2 provide the recommended inspection methods for components that
Fo itte
are to have a NDT. The inspection method will depend on the component configuration and the
metallurgy. Other inspection methods may be recommended.
Table 10.1 - General Components

ot m
COMPONENT NDT METHOD

N m
Shaft VT, MT or PT and UT

Shaft Sleeves VT and MT or PT
o
Impellers VT and MT or PT or RT
C
Hydrodynamic Journal / Thrust VT, PT and UT

Bearings (Side Separation & Bond
contact)
r
Thrust Collar VT and MT or PT

Fo
Casing VT and MT or PT or RT
Studs VT and MT or PT
Thermal Spray Coating Areas VT and PT
Plating Areas VT and PT
Piping Connections on Pressure VT, MT or PT and UT or RT
Containing Component
Process Piping VT, MT or PT and UT
Lubrication Feed Lines VT and UT (UT for
Thickness)
49 of 241
Oil Drain Lines VT and UT (UT for

Thickness)
Case Drain Lines VT and UT (UT for
Thickness)
y
Table 10.2- General Components Repaired
n nl
COMPONENT NDT METHOD
tio O
Babbitted Bearing Repairs VT, UT and PT
Shaft Plating on Shaft VT and FPI
Thermal Spray on Shaft VT, UT and FPI
bu se
Weld Repairs
Before machining VT, MT and UT
After Welding & Rough Machining VT, MT and UT
tri U
Weld Quality Inspection VT, MT and UT
After PWHT VT, MT and UT
is 0
D 01
10.1.14.3 Refer to Table 10.4 for maximum allowable residual free air gauss levels in components and
record the results of gauss measurements.
al 5
10.1.14.4 Original equipment inspection methods and acceptance criteria should be used as a minimum
for NDT of components if available.
er lot
10.1.15 Components which exhibit deterioration such as erosion, corrosion or failures and the material is
unknown or unclear should receive a PMI inspection.
en al
● 10.1.16 If specified, chemistry analysis and hardness of component(s) should be determined for any
B
identified component.
10.1.17 Shaft Ends for Couplings
rG e
10.1.17.1 On shaft ends with a threaded area for the nut, the threads should be visually inspected for
Fo itte
damage and that the nut will properly screw onto the threads. Inspect for set-screw marks and the
condition of the face of the shaft. On nuts with left handed threads mark direction of tightening rotation or
“LH Tighten” if not previously marked onto the nut.
ot m
10.1.17.2 On tapered shaft ends, install the hub on the shaft to a line-to-line condition and verify that
there is sufficient overhang of the hub on the shaft to accommodate the axial pull-up and verify that the
N m
retaining nut will bottom against the hub and not the shaft.
10.1.17.3 Tapered shaft end—record minor and major diameters, keyway dimensions (as applicable)
o
length of taper, and percent of contact area from the contact verification check, using a ring gauge as
C
outlined in the procedures per API RP 687 Chapter 1 Appendix C. The standoff dimension of the ring
gauge should also be recorded.
r
10.1.17.4 For hydraulic fit coupling arrangements, inspect O-ring grooves for sharp edges or burrs and
Fo
that the hydraulic fluid holes are clean and the threads are in good condition.
10.1.17.5 For straight keyed shaft end – record diameter, length of fit, and keyway dimensions.
10.1.17.6 For integrally flanged shaft end—record runout (TIR) of the flange face, bolt circle diameter, bolt
hole size, pilot diameter, and whether male or female.
10.1.18 Rolling element bearings were removed in section 9.1.5 and should be inspected using Annex F
and Annex W and the data from section 9.1.5 for bearing positioning.
10.1.19 Hydrodynamic bearings were removed in section 9.1.6 and should be inspected using Annex H
and Annex I.
50 of 241
10.1.20 The rotor or bundle may require disassembly. If heat is required for disassembly, the component
should be uniformly heated. The component should be heated to nominally 350°F (177 °C). In no case
should a component be more than 500°F (260 °C). Non-metallic components may have a temperature
limit less than 500°F (260 °C) which should be verified before heating.
a) Heating components for disassembly is a critical step. Components should be heated uniformly to
minimize circumferential temperature variations that could cause permanent distortion. To prevent
y
distortion, care should be exercised to prevent a heat rate that is too rapid.
n nl
b) In general, the temperature gradient across an impeller should never exceed approximately 50°F (10
tio O
°C) during the heating process otherwise permanent distortion can occur.
bu se
c) The absolute temperature and temperature variation of the component should be carefully monitored
using temperature indicating sticks or a non-contacting infrared surface temperature gun. Temperature
indicating temperature sticks should not contain sulfur components.
tri U
d) Heating can be accomplished by using flare tip or rosebud torches. Two torches may be necessary for
is 0
large components to maintain an even temperature. Induction heaters can be also used to remove
parts with magnetic materials of construction.
D 01
e) The impeller is generally heated from the outside diameter to the inside diameter.
al 5
10.1.21 Inspection Methods and Testing
er lot
10.1.21.1 General
● 10.1.21.1.1 The repair shop should make the following data available prior to shipment and maintain it
en al
per 14.3.1.
B
a) Necessary or specified certification of materials, such as mill test reports or PMI results.
rG e
b) Test data, such as NDT results

Fo itte
c) Fully identified records of all heat treatment whether performed in the normal course of manufacture or
as part of a repair procedure.
ot m
d) Results of quality control tests and inspections.

N m
e) Details of all repairs.

o
● f) If specified, final-assembly, maintenance, and running clearances.

C
g) Other data specified by the owner or required by the applicable codes and regulations.
r
10.1.21.1.2 In addition to 10.1.14, the owner may specify the following:

Fo
a) Parts that should be subjected to surface and subsurface examination.
b) Specific NDT for pumps in cyclic or hot services
c) Specific NDT where visual examination cannot adequately determine presence of relevant indications
d) The type of examination, such as magnetic particle, liquid penetrant, radiographic and ultrasonic
51 of 241
examination.
10.1.21.1.3 Components with protective coatings should have the coating removed prior to NDT
inspection. Before removal of the protective coatings used to prevent erosion or corrosion or for
performance enhancement, the vendor should have authorization from the owner or the representative.
y
NOTE: Protective coatings limit inspection of the underlying material.
n nl
10.1.21.1.4 Components that will have protective coatings applied after repairs or manufacturing should
tio O
be inspected prior to coating.
10.1.21.1.5 The application of NDT inspection criteria to components should be performed and
bu se
interpreted by technicians qualified to the applicable non-destructive testing methods by the SNT TC1A
guidelines to assure the reliability of the testing performed.
tri U
10.1.21.1.6 Pressure-containing parts should not be painted until the specified inspection and testing of
the parts is complete.
is 0
Note: Purchased auxiliaries typically arrive at the packager already tested and painted. The above is not
D 01
intended for such components if subsequently included in assembly testing.
10.1.21.2 Component Inspection

al 5
10.1.21.2.1 If radiographic, ultrasonic (UT), magnetic particle (MP) or liquid penetrant (PT) inspections are
er lot
recommended, the criteria in 10.1.21.2.6 through 10.1.21.2.8 should apply unless other corresponding
procedures and acceptance criteria have been specified. Cast iron should be inspected only in accordance
en al
with 10.1.21.2.8. Welds, cast steel and wrought material should be inspected in accordance with
10.1.21.2.6 through 10.1.21.2.8.
B
Note 1: Radiographic and ultrasonic inspections are not acceptable for cast iron.
rG e
Note 2: Items such as pitting, erosion, and corrosion may not show up as an indication using the NDT
Fo itte
methods in this section. Visual examination and engineering judgement is generally recommended to
evaluate the acceptability of the component. MSS SP-55 contains visual inspection criteria for castings.
10.1.21.2.2 These recommended practices describe examination techniques that are applicable to great
ot m
varieties of sizes and shapes of materials and widely varying examinations. Because the specification for
the actual component being inspected depends on metallurgy, component configuration, and method of
N m
manufacture, specific procedures and acceptance standards for the application should be covered by
written standards developed by the repair shop for the specific application.
o
C
10.1.21.2.3 The repair shop should review the design of the equipment and impose more stringent criteria
than the generalized limits in 10.1.21.2.6 through 10.1.21.2.8 if necessary.
r
10.1.21.2.4 Dispositions of indications larger than those acceptable for the applicable procedures in
Fo
10.1.21.2.6, 10.1.21.2.7, and 10.1.21.2.8 should be reviewed with the owner.
10.1.21.2.5 Refer to ASTM E1316 for standard terminology used in non-destructive testing.
10.1.21.2.6 Radiograph Inspections
10.1.21.2.6.1 Radiography should be in accordance with ASTM E94.
10.1.21.2.6.2 Radiography acceptance criteria
52 of 241
a) ASTM E446 Standard Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings Up to 2 in. (50.8 mm) in Thickness.
b) ASTM E186 Standard Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled 2 to 4 1⁄2 in. (50.8 mm to 114 mm)
Steel Castings.
c) ASTM E280 Standard Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled 4 1⁄2 to 12 in. (114mm to 305 mm)
Steel Castings.
y
n nl
10.1.21.2.7 Ultrasonic Inspections
tio O
10.1.21.2.7.1 Ultrasonic inspection should be based upon the procedures ASTM A609 (castings), ASTM
A388 (forgings), or ASTM A578 (plate) and ASME BPVC, Section V, Article 5.
bu se
10.1.21.2.7.2 Additional inspection of the base material may be specified using ASTM A516, which has
acceptance criteria. Supplemental recommendations are:
tri U
a) S-8 requires UT inspection per ASTM A435
is 0
b) S-11 requires UT inspection per ASTM A577
D 01
c) S-12 requires UT inspection per ASTM A578.
NOTE 1
al 5
Typical specifications used for material in fabrication, for example ASTM A516 do not have
er lot
specific default inspection of the base material plate.
NOTE 2 ASTM A516 references ASTM A220 which only calls for visual inspection of the plate edges
en al
and allows indications up to 1 in. length.

B
NOTE 3 The inspection requirements of the ASME BPVC depend on the quality factor of a casting
and joint efficiency of fabrication selected for the design or the material requirements.
rG e
Fo itte
10.1.21.2.7.3 Component finish prior to examination should be 250 RMS or better.
10.1.21.2.7.4 Ultrasonic acceptance criteria - Pressure Containing Stationary Components

ot m
a) Straight beam examination 15% of standard back reflection or 50% loss in back reflection not due to
N m
geometry.
o
b) Angle beam examination Indication exceeding the 75% base level from reference notch are cause for
rejection. Indications over 40% but not exceeding the 75% reference level should be reported for
C
information only.
r
c) Weld repaired pressure containing stationary components should be inspected by the same criteria as
Fo
noted in a) and b).
10.1.21.2.7.5 Ultrasonic acceptance criteria - Non-Pressure Containing Stationary Components
a) Unless otherwise specified, discontinuities should not exceed the following limits per ASTM A 609 noted
53 of 241
below:
1. Up to 2 in. (50.8 mm) (including all areas to be machined regardless of thickness) Discontinuity
Level 1
2. 2 in. up to 4 in. (50.8 mm up to 101.6 mm) Discontinuity Level 2
3. 4 in. (101.6 mm) and above Discontinuity Level 3

y
b) Castings identified with defects exceeding the limits ASTM A609 above should be rejected or repaired
n nl
and be re-examined by Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with this specification.
tio O
c) Weld repaired castings should be inspected by the same criteria as noted in a) above
bu se
10.1.21.2.7.6 Ultrasonic acceptance criteria - Rotating Components
tri U
a) A straight beam should be employed in both a longitudinal and radial direction. Back reflection technique
of calibration should be used.
is 0
D 01
b) Indications exceeding 15% of the reference back reflection or indications resulting in a 50% or greater
loss of back reflection are cause for rejection.
al 5
c) Weld repaired rotating components should be inspected using both straight and shear beam transducers.
Calibration procedure and establishment of a digital to audio converter for inspection should utilize as
er lot
a minimum, 0.0625 in. X 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm X 1.6 mm) flat bottom notches and 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm)
diameter side drilled holes for either shear or longitudinal wave testing and for near field testing. Any
discontinuity should be evaluated in accordance with the following minimum acceptance criteria.
en al
B
1. Shear Wave - Any linearly disposed discontinuity, not attributable to geometry which causes an
indication equal to, or greater than the response obtained from the 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) notch at a
rG e
comparable test metal distance should be the basis for rejection.

Fo itte
2. Longitudinal Wave - All discontinuities, not attributable to geometry which causes an indication
equal to, or greater than 40% of the response obtained from the 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) diameter flat
bottomed hole at a comparable test metal distance should be noted and recorded. Any indication
equal to or greater than 80% of the response from a 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) diameter flat bottom hole
ot m
should be the basis for rejection.

3. Multiple discontinuities not attributable to geometry, with a response of greater than 40%
N m
response obtained from the 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) notch at a comparable test metal distance and
separated by the lesser of than 3 times the largest measured single discontinuity length should be
o
considered as one continuous discontinuity and evaluated as rejectable.

C
10.1.21.2.8 Magnetic Particle and Liquid Penetrant Inspections

r
10.1.21.2.8.1 Wet magnetic particle inspection should be in accordance with ASTM E709.
Fo
Note: Generally, the dry method is not used due to the problems with arcing on finish machined surfaces.
10.1.21.2.8.2 Liquid penetrant inspection should be in accordance with Section V, Article 6, of the ASME
Code. Ref. ASTM E165. The sensitivity should be Level 3 per ASTM E1417.
10.1.21.2.8.3 Generalized acceptance criteria used for magnetic particle and liquid penetrant inspections
should be in accordance with 10.1.21.2.8.4. Original equipment acceptance criteria should be used for
non-destructive examinations of components if referenced by drawings or equipment manufacturer’s
documents.
54 of 241
10.1.21.2.8.4 Stationary pressure containing components
10.1.21.2.8.4.1 Acceptance criteria
a) For cast or wrought components Inspection and acceptance criteria should be in accordance with API
610 unless otherwise agreed.
y
n nl
b) Castings should meet the minimum acceptance standards of MSS SP-55.
tio O
c) Any linear indication 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) or longer should be cause for further investigation.
bu se
d) End to end indications, i.e., in line, spaced less than 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) apart should be considered as
one indication.
tri U
e) Areas requiring further investigation can be ground to minimum casting section thickness but not to
exceed a depth of 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) and blended to the original surface. The component should then
is 0
be rechecked.
D 01
f) Except for raised face flanges, gasketed and/or sealing surfaces should be free of linear indications
exceeding 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) in length.
al 5
g) Other areas should be free of any indications exceeding the following ASME Section V, Article 7 and
ASTM-E125 classifications:
er lot
1. Type I, Degree 1
en al
2. Type II, Degree 2

3. Type III, Degree 2
B
4. Type IV, Degree 1

5. Type V, Degree 1
6. Type VI, Degree 1
rG e
Fo itte
10.1.21.2.8.4.2 Reasons for rejecting a component
a) Any laps, bursts, seams, or laminations make the component rejectable.

ot m
b) Elongated slag inclusions that have length greater than 1.5 in. (38 mm) for wall thickness under 3 in. (76
N m
mm) and 2 in. (51 mm) for wall thickness over 3 in. (76 mm).
o
c) Grouped slag inclusions, in line, that have an aggregate length of 12 times the wall thickness, unless the
C
individual inclusions in the line are separated by 6 times the length of the longest slag inclusion.
d) Any linear indication greater than 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) in length.
r
Fo
e) More than five linear indications, 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) or greater in length, in any one square foot of
surface area.
f) Linear indications, 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) or greater in length, and equal to or less than two inches apart.
10.1.21.2.8.5 Acceptance criteria for stationary non-pressure containing components
55 of 241
a) Castings should meet the minimum acceptance standards of MSS SP-55.
b) All accessible surfaces should be magnetic particle inspected.
c) Any linear indication 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) or longer should be cause for further investigation.
d) End to end indications, i.e., in line, spaced less than 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) apart should be considered as
y
one indication.
n nl
e) Areas requiring further investigation can be ground to minimum casting section thickness but not to
tio O
exceed a depth of 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) and blended to the original surface. They should then be
rechecked.
bu se
NOTE: A Corrosion allowance should have been included in the minimum wall thickness by design.
tri U
f) Areas failing to meet (e), after grinding, should be liquid penetrant inspected.
i. Linear indications 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) or longer should be rejected
is 0
ii. end to end indication spaced less than 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) apart should be considered one
D 01
indication.
10.1.21.2.8.6 Acceptance criteria for stationary weld repaired components

al 5
Acceptance criteria for critical areas on any component that has been repaired by welding should be
er lot
based on information in a) and b).
a) Any indication with the major dimension greater than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) in any direction is considered
en al
relevant and recordable.

B
b) Indications in 1 through 4 as defined by location are considered rejected and should be repaired or
should have an engineering review.
rG e
1. Linear indications, i.e., those having a length greater than three times the width, which have a
Fo itte
length greater than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm).
2. More than two linear indications, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or less in length, in any one square inch area
ot m
of weld.
N m
3. Rounded indication 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) or greater.

o
4. Four or more rounded defects, having a maximum dimension of at least 3/32 in. (2.4 mm), in a
line separated by 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or less.
C
10.1.21.2.8.7 Acceptance criteria for rotating wrought components (impellers, shafts, etc.).
r
Fo
Only indications with major dimensions greater than 0.03125 in. (0.79 mm) are considered relevant. The
following relevant indications cause the part to be rejected or repaired:
a) Relevant indications of cracks of any length or linear defects 0.09375 in. (2.38 mm) in length or
greater.
b) Rounded indications with dimensions greater than 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm)

c) Four or more rounded indications in a line separated by 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) or less from edge to
edge.
56 of 241

d) Five or more indications greater than 0.03125 in. (0.79 mm) in any 6 in2 (39 cm2) of area.
10.1.21.2.8.8 Acceptance criteria for weld repaired rotating elements
The following relevant indications cause the part to be rejected or repaired:

a) indications whose major dimension is equal to or exceeds 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) the impeller bore fit area.
y
n nl
b) two or more relevant indications separated by 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) or less in the bore or labyrinth diameter;
tio O
c) three or more relevant indications in the labyrinth to cover radius;
bu se
d) three or more relevant indications in any 3 in. (76.2 mm) square area in the bore or labyrinth diameter;
e) any indication 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) in length on a finished machined corner;
tri U
f) any indication greater than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) in a non-critical area of the impeller bore, bore face labyrinth
is 0
seal diameter, face or inside diameter;
D 01
g) any cracks or crack like indication.
10.1.21.2.8.9al 5 Acceptance criteria for weld repaired shafts.
Only indications with major dimensions greater than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) should be considered relevant. The
er lot
following relevant indications cause the part to be rejected or repaired:
a) relevant indications of cracks of any length or linear defects 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) in length or greater;
en al
b) rounded indications with dimensions greater than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm);
B
c) four or more rounded indications in a line separated by 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or less from edge to edge;
rG e
Fo itte
d) five or more indications greater than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) in any 6 square in. 38.7 square cm) of area.
10.1.21.2.8.10 Acceptance criteria for thermal spray coated components

ot m
The acceptance criteria for critical areas on any component that has thermal spray coating should be
based on the criteria in Table 10.3. Final disposition of micro porosity indications should have an
N m
engineering review.
o
C
Table 10. 3 - Indication Acceptance Criteria
Severity
r
Indication Type Measurement

A B C
Fo
Porosity2 Individual 0.03125 in. (0.8 mm) 0.03125 in. (0.8 mm) 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm)
Scattered Porosity 1,2 Area / sq. in. 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm) 0.125 in. (3.2 mm)
Cracking Individual None None None
Linear 3D (L/W) > 0.0625 in. (1.6mm) > 0.0625 in. (1.6mm) > 0.125 in. (3.2mm)
Flaking N/A None None None
Lack of Bond N/A None None None
Severity Levels:
57 of 241
A. Applicable to rotating components critical areas such as any shaft diameter, impeller & thrust disc
bores or any area specified as a high stress location. Sealing areas on any component should be
evaluated to a severity level A
B. Applicable to rotating hardware such as sleeves & spacers, impeller labyrinth seal diameters,
thrust disc OD’s, or other rotating component.
C. Applicable to any non-rotating components or any area specified as non-critical
y
Note 1 Scattered porosity is defined as more than one pore in a 2 in. square area. Total size of the
scattered porosity is determined by adding the individual size of pore diameters.
n nl
Note 2 Areas of Micro-porosity are classified as scattered porosity and evaluated per Table 10.3 criteria
tio O
after two (2) additional cleaning cycles with the measurement of the extreme outer edge of the indications
evaluated as the total diameter of the area.
bu se
10.1.21.2.8.11 To prevent buildup of potential voltage in the equipment, all components should be
demagnetized to the free gauss levels in Table 10.4 if measured with a calibrated Hall effect probe. The
tri U
free air gauss is measured while suspending the component from a non-conductive strap with no
influence from stray magnetic fields.
is 0
D 01
Table 10.4 – Maximum Gauss Levels
Component Maximum Residual

al 5
Shaft and all rotating components
Free Gauss Level
±2
er lot
Bearing and seal assemblies ±2
including all components
en al
Bearing Housings (without bearing and seal assemblies) ±4

Casing and all stationary components except bearing ±4
B
and seal assemblies

Fastener Allowable Residual Magnetism ±4
rG e
10.1.21.2.9 Pressure Containing Parts

Fo itte
10.1.21.2.9.1 The repair shop should review the design of the equipment and propose to the owner more
stringent criteria than the generalized limits in this section, if necessary. Defects that exceed the limits
imposed in section 10.1.21.2.8 should be removed to meet the quality standards cited, as determined by
ot m
additional magnetic particle or liquid penetrant inspection as applicable before repair welding.
N m
10.1.21.2.9.2 If radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or liquid penetrant inspection of welds or

materials is required by the ASME BPVC Section V and Section VIII or specified, the procedures and
o
acceptance criteria in Table 10.5 should apply, except as recommended by 10.1.21.2.9.4. Alternative
C
standards may be proposed by the repair shop or owner.
Table 10.5 – Materials Inspection Standards for Pressure Casings

r
Fo
58 of 241
Type of inspection Methods Acceptance criteria

For Fabrications For Castings
Radiography Section V, Articles 2 and Section VIII, Division 1, Section VIII, Division 1,
22 of the ASME BPVC UW-51 (for 100 % Appendix 7 of the
radiography) and UW-52 ASME BPVC
(for spot radiography) of
y
the ASME BPVC
n nl
Ultrasonic inspection Section V, Articles 4, 5 Section VIII, Division 1, Section VIII, Division 1,
tio O
and 23 of the ASME UW53 and Appendix 12, Appendix 7, of the
BPVC of the ASME BPVC ASME BPVC
bu se
Magnetic particle Section V, Articles 7 and Section VIII, Division 1, See acceptance criteria
inspection 25 of the ASME BPVC Appendix 6 of the ASME in 6.4.20.6 and table 2
tri U
BPVC
Liquid penetrant Section V, Articles 6 and Section VIII, Division 1, Section VIII, Division 1,
is 0
inspection 24 of the ASME BPVC Appendix 8 of the ASME Appendix 7, of the
D 01
BPVC ASME BPVC
al 5
10.1.21.2.9.3 The owner should be notified before making a major weld repair to a pressure containing
er lot
part. Major weld repairs, for the purpose of owner notification only, is any defect that equals or exceeds
any of the three criteria defined below.
en al
a) The component has leaked on hydrostatic test

B
b) The depth of the cavity prepared for welding exceeds 20 % of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25.4 mm],
whichever is smaller
rG e
c) The extent of the cavity exceeds approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm2].

Fo itte
10.1.21.2.9.4 All repairs to pressure containing parts should be made to the following documents:
a) The repair of plates, prior to fabrication, should be performed in accordance with the ASTM standard to
ot m
which the plate was purchased.

N m
b) The repair of castings or forgings should be performed prior to final machining in accordance with the
ASTM standard to which the casting or forging was purchased.
o
C
c) The repair of a fabricated pressure casing or the defect in either a weld or the base metal of a cast or
fabricated pressure casing, uncovered during preliminary or final machining, should be performed in
accordance with ASME BPVC Section VIII.
r
Fo
10.1.21.2.9.5 Plate used in fabrications should be 100% Ultrasonic inspected prior to starting fabrication
in accordance with the ASTM standard to which the plate was purchased.
10.1.21.2.9.6 Cast and Nodular iron should be inspected only in accordance with magnetic particle and
liquid penetrant methods.
10.1.21.2.9.7 Spot radiography should consist of a minimum of one 6 in. (152 mm) spot radiograph on
each pressure casing. As a minimum, one spot radiograph is required for each welding procedure and
welder used for pressure-containing welds.
59 of 241
10.1.21.2.9.8 For magnetic particle inspections, linear indications should be considered relevant only if
the major dimension exceeds 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm). Individual indications that are separated by less than
0.0625 in. (1.6 millimeters) should be considered continuous.
10.1.21.2.9.9 Cast steel pressure casing parts that are magnetic should be examined by MT methods.
Acceptability of defects should be based on a comparison with the photographs in ASTM E125. For each
y
type of defect, the degree of severity should not exceed the limits specified in Table 10.6.
n nl
Table 10.6 - Maximum Severity of Defects in Castings
tio O
Type Defect Degree
I Linear discontinuities 1 (Code all)
bu se
II Shrinkage 2
III Inclusions 2 (Code 3)
IV Chills and chaplets 1
tri U
V Porosity 1
VI Welds 1
is 0
10.2 Additional Inspection, Evaluation and Possible Disassembly of Assembled Rotor (9.1.4 c and
D 01
9.1.4 e for Volute Style Rotors)
al 5
10.2.1 Inspection of Assembled Rotor
10.2.1.1 BB1, volute & diffuser, BB2 single stage volute, and BB3 & BB5 volute pump style rotors should
er lot
be inspected as assembled rotors. Inspection of any BB3 diffuser pump rotor requires that diffusers and
impellers be removed. The rotor is then reassembled without diffusers and the shaft nut tightened to the
en al
same position as it was prior to rotor disassembly.

B
10.2.1.2 Based on the inspection results, determine whether to disassemble the rotor.
10.2.1.3 A visual inspection of the rotor and components should be completed. Inspections should
rG e
include appropriate items as listed in 10.1.

Fo itte
10.2.1.4 Measure and record all runouts with the shaft supported at the bearing journals on V-blocks.
Refer to the procedures in Annex E. Runouts should be measured at shaft fit areas, seal areas, bearing
journals, integral coupling hubs, and all other running clearance areas such as wear rings (if accessible).
ot m
Annex W provides recommendations for these dimensional inspections.

N m
a) As a minimum, axial runout should be recorded for both sides of the thrust collar (or the thrust collar
shaft shoulder if the thrust collar is removed).
o
b) Check both ends of bearing journal area (hydrodynamic and rolling element bearing) and sealing area
C
diameters for roundness and taper.

r
10.2.1.4.1 For BB3 diffuser pumps, if the rotor has excessive runout, the lock nut can be cocked or can
Fo
be too tight. Loosen the lock nut to determine if the shaft straightens and measure and record
perpendicularity of the mating components.
10.2.1.5 Identify dimensions from a distinct shaft feature such as a shaft shoulder or shaft end, to the
location of the axial and radial proximity probe areas on each end of the rotor. If proximity probe areas are
not easily identified, the owner should be consulted. Afterwards, the proximity probe areas should be
adequately protected from damages such as rusting or scratches.
10.2.1.6 Record axial dimensions of components from a common distinct shaft feature; such as a shaft
shoulder or shaft end. A dimensional inspection of the components assembled on the rotor should be
60 of 241
performed in accordance with Annex W and 10.3 as applicable for the assembled rotor. Inspection results
should be evaluated in accordance with 10.2.2. The calculation of all running clearances should be
completed and recorded.
10.2.1.7 Weigh and record the total weight of the rotor using an appropriately sized scale.
● 10.2.1.8 If a previous problem indicates a possible out of balance situation, a check balance of the rotor
y
may be specified, using fully crowned half-keys in all exposed keyways. Some rotors may require
“hanging” of the wear rings.
n nl
a) For double keyways that are equal in size and 180° apart, half-keys are not required. Record amounts
tio O
and locations of imbalance.
b) Record the types of keys, configuration, locations and the weights of all half keys and keys for keyways
bu se
that are longer than the component.
tri U
c) Prior to running the rotor in the balance machine, verify that there is no debris that could come out during
rotation.
is 0
10.2.2 Evaluation of the Assembled Rotor
D 01
10.2.2.1 The repair shop should prepare an inspection documentation package (report) consisting of
information identified (as applicable) in:
a) Section 9
al 5
er lot
b) 10.1
en al
c) 10.2
B
d) Annex W
rG e
10.2.2.2 Once the rotor has been inspected and the results reviewed, the results of the assembled rotor
inspection should be used to determine the work scope for the rotor and whether the rotor should be
Fo itte
disassembled per 10.2.3.
Some reasons for disassembly can include but are not limited to:
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
61 of 241
a) Shaft damage such as fretting, cracking, journal bearing/ shaft end damage
b) Impeller / flow path damage requiring removal of impeller
c) Severe corrosion / erosion
d) Over-speed of rotor where yielding of material is a concern or evident
y
n nl
e) Re-rate requiring new components
tio O
f) Shifting of components
g) Bowed rotor due to excessive rotor runouts or impeller runouts that are out of phase.
bu se
h) Balance level not repeatable in the shop or field.
tri U
i) Previous operating and repair history suggests full disassembly.
is 0
j) Replacement of wear parts such as wear rings, throttle, throat and balance bushing if there are
D 01
indications of excessive rubbing or other damage.
10.2.2.3 If the rotor does not require disassembly, the pump work scope should include any other
al 5
identified work for the rotor.
er lot
10.2.3 Rotor Disassembly (Rotors from 9.1.4c and 9.1.4e) [if necessary from 10.2.2]
10.2.3.1 Prior to dismantling, 10.2.2.1 should be completed and recorded. If coatings are present, refer to
en al
10.2.3.7 prior to unstacking the rotor.

B
10.2.3.2 BB1, volute & diffuser, BB2 one stage volute, and BB3 & BB5 volute pump style rotors should
not be unstacked unless specified or as the result of inspection performed in section 10.2.
rG e
10.2.3.3 Following rotor disassembly, the inspection of the rotor components should be per 10.3.
Fo itte
10.2.3.4 Match mark components and record location and orientation for evaluation purposes and to
assure proper reassembly.
ot m
10.2.3.5 Care should be exercised in the disassembly to prevent the damaging of components.
N m
Depending on the pump style, components may or may not have interference fits. An interference fit will
require heating of the component to allow disassembly. A non-interference fit can require slight heating of
o
the component to allow disassembly. A thorough understanding of the rotor construction is required to
safely disassemble the rotor without causing component damage. Some interference fit couplings require
C
hydraulic pressurization for removal and thus heat is not to be used.

r
10.2.3.6 Impellers that do not have an interference fit should be removed from the shaft by removing any
Fo
locking devices and tapping with a soft faced mallet or brass pry bars against the base of the impellers
back shroud. If this is unsuccessful, heat in accordance with paragraph 10.1.20 may be necessary. Do
not use bearing pullers.
10.2.3.7 If components are coated, the temperature limitation of any coating should be reviewed.
10.3 Rotor Component Inspections
10.3.1 General
62 of 241
10.3.1.1 Visual Inspections
10.3.1.1.1 The repair shop should perform visual inspections as indicated in 10.1
10.3.1.1.2 All mating fits should be visually inspected for signs such as yielding, distress, fretting or
galling.
y
10.3.1.1.3 Each impeller should be visually inspected for damage such as wear, cavitation, re-circulation
and mechanical damage. Each vane tip transition between the shroud and hubs should be visually
n nl
inspected for cracks. Figure 10.1 provides information identifying the typical areas of damage from the
different types of cavitation.
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
Figure 10.1 – Cavitation Damage

N m
10.3.1.1.3.1 Refer to Figure 10.1 for examples of cavitation damage locations on impellers. Refer to
Figure 10.2 through 10.6 for photos of impellers damaged by cavitation.
o

rC
Fo
63 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 10.2 - Example of Cavitation Damage to Impeller Vanes
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.3 - Example of Cavitation Damage to Impeller Vanes
64 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01

al 5 Figure 10.4 - Example of Cavitation Damage
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.5 - Example of Cavitation Damage to Vane
65 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 10.6 - Example of Cavitation Eroding Blades
en al
B
10.3.1.1.3.2 Refer to Figure 10.7 for an example of recirculation damage to an impeller.

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.7 - Example of Discharge Recirculation damage
10.3.1.1.3.3 Refer to Figures 10.8 through 10.10 for examples of erosive / abrasive wear.
66 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
Figure 10.8 - Example of Erosive Wear on an Impeller
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
Figure 10.9 - Example of Abrasive Wear

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.10 - Example of Abrasive Wear
10.3.1.1.4 Each impeller should be visually inspected for previous locking of wear parts.
Note: Excessive wear part locking holes can weaken the impeller.
67 of 241
10.3.1.2 Dimensional Inspections
10.3.1.2.1 The repair shop should perform dimensional inspections for the components identified in
Annex W.
10.3.1.2.2 All fits should be dimensionally inspected. Fits should be calculated to determine if component
y
rework is required to restore the design fit.
n nl
10.3.1.2.3 Record the following data.
tio O
a. Shaft per 10.3.5
bu se
b. Impeller(s):
1) bore sizes and lengths
2) shroud diameter and thickness
tri U
3) widths and number of vanes
4) vane type of trimming
5) vane tip diameter and thickness
is 0
6) impeller eye vane thickness
D 01
7) wear ring diameter(s) (wear ring land if wear ring removed)
8) number and diameter of balance holes
9) back shroud pump-out vanes size and number
al 5
10) wear ring, wear ring land, and hub run outs
er lot
c. Balance piston (drum) outside diameter, bore size and length
d. Balance Disc: outside diameter; bore size; and face width

en al
e. Determine if impellers without wear rings have a hard facing applied to the wear surface and if present
B
determine thickness and composition of the hard face surface.

rG e
10.3.1.2.4 Remove impeller wear rings if they indicate signs of excessive rubbing and the running
Fo itte
clearances exceed those referenced in 10.3.2.2. If removed, record the impeller mating diameter (ring
land) and wear ring inside diameter.
10.3.2 Wearing Parts

ot m
10.3.2.1 Visual Inspections

N m
a) Components should be visually inspected for excessive wear, degradation or galling.

o
b) Visual inspections should be accompanied by dimensional and NDT results.

C
c) Refer to Annex J for galling tendencies.

r
Fo
d) Figures 10.11 and 10.12 show acceptable and non-acceptable wear as indicated.
68 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
Figure 10.11 - Normal wear marks for component – acceptable to reuse
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
Figure 10.12 - Excessive wear for non-metallic component – not acceptable to reuse

ot m
a) Components, such as wear rings and bushings, should be typically replaced if the clearance exceeds
1.5 times the maximum clearances identified in Annex W regardless of material.
N m
b) Review of previous repair data is recommended to determine the rate of dimensional change to
o
determine an optimum change-out dimension.

C
c) The design clearance may be different than the clearance in Annex W

r
Fo
1. To improve efficiency, balance axial thrust, provide rotor stability or maintain desired pressures
within the seal chamber.
2. Therefore, the decision to replace wearing components, such as wear rings and bushings, should
consider driver power limitations, efficiency, rotor dynamics and seal cavity / vapor pressure
issues.
10.3.3 Component Bores
10.3.3.1 Refer to Annex W for:
69 of 241
a) allowable taper of straight fit designs for interference fit applications.
b) surface finish and runout criteria of the thrust collar and shaft shoulder against which the thrust collar fits
c) surface finish and runout criteria of the balance drum and shaft shoulder against which the balance drum
fits
y
d) sleeve to shaft clearance and shaft sleeve (spacer sleeves between impellers) face runout
n nl
e) seal sleeve to shaft clearance
tio O
f) impeller / shaft fits
bu se
10.3.3.2 Impellers with tapered bores should have a contact verification check.
a) The contact verification check should be per API RP 687Chapter 1 Annex C.
tri U
b) If ring and plug gauges are not available, use the actual impeller for the matching shaft taper. The
is 0
minimum contact percentage is 80%.
D 01
10.3.4 Thrust Collar Inspections
al 5
10.3.4.1 The thrust collar (thrust disc) surface face and bore should be visually inspected.
a) The bore should be inspected for fretting. Refer to Figure 10.13 for an example of fretting. This part can
er lot
have a very light interference fit to the shaft.
b) Excessive shrink or excessive clearance can result in non-repeatability of the assembly and loss of the
en al
perpendicularity of the faces to the bore. However, the majority of centrifugal pumps will probably have
a slightly loose fit for ease of assembly.
B
c) Any deviation from the conditions defined should be documented.

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.13 - Fretting Under Thrust Collar
70 of 241
10.3.4.2 Measure and record thrust collar and thrust collar spacer(s) bore sizes and lengths. Determine
thrust collar to shaft fit.
10.3.4.3 Faces of the spacer should be parallel per Annex W to avoid cocking of the thrust collar.
10.3.5 Shaft Inspections
y
10.3.5.1 General Shaft Inspection
n nl
10.3.5.1.1 Shaft fit dimensions should be measured and recorded as recommended in Annex W. Shaft
diameters for rolling element bearings should comply with Annex W. Chronic bearing failures can be an
tio O
indication of bearing interference fit issues that may benefit from an engineering study. Additional
information should be considered such as:
bu se
a) Older pumps may have different fits. Modification of these fits should be agreed upon between the owner
tri U
and repair shop.
b) The actual fits and clearances used in a design depend on many factors such as load, bearing size and
is 0
type, material properties and other design and performance requirements.
D 01
c) Lighter interference fit can be required for some austenitic stainless steel shafts that have a high
coefficient of thermal expansion.
al 5
d) Bearing and shaft material with different coefficients of thermal expansion or parts with the same
er lot
coefficient of thermal expansion operating at different temperatures could either increase or decrease
the interference fit.
en al
10.3.5.1.2 Shaft location(s) for impellers with tapered bores should have a contact verification check.
B
a) The contact verification check should be per API RP 687, coupling annex.
rG e
b) If ring and plug gauges are not available, utilize the actual impeller to the shaft for the matching shaft
taper.
Fo itte
c) The impeller to shaft minimum contact percentage is 80%.

ot m
10.3.5.1.3 Measure and record overall shaft length

N m
10.3.5.1.4 Measure and record mechanical runout on shaft fit areas, seal areas, bearing journals, and all
other running clearance areas with the shaft supported at the bearing journals on V-blocks. Refer to
o
Annex E for guidance.

C
10.3.5.1.5 Refer to Annex W for dimensional criteria and allowable shaft radial runout.
r
10.3.5.1.6 Determine if the coupling is General Purpose or Special Purpose. Refer to Annex W for
Fo
coupling to shaft fits. See 10.6.3 for coupling related inspections.
10.3.5.1.7 Visually inspect shaft for damage such as:
a) Set-screw marks
b) Sharp corners
c) Galling
71 of 241
d) Missing or incomplete threads
e) Torn or ruptured surfaces
f) Cracks and yielding
g) Burrs (use a thread file on external threads if necessary to remove any burrs that are detected)
y
n nl
h) Discoloration
tio O
i) Corrosion
j) Wire wooling
bu se
k) Fretting
tri U
10.3.5.1.8 The condition of shaft threads can typically be inspected by threading the component onto the
is 0
shaft by hand while checking for any looseness or tightness. Thread gauges such as a thread
D 01
micrometer or “3–wire” can be used in addition to the visual inspections.
10.3.5.1.9 If shaft cracks are present, the shaft should be replaced.

al 5
10.3.5.1.10 If proximity probe target areas are present, electrical and mechanical runouts of each location
er lot
should be measured and continuously recorded along with the phase relationship as specified in Annex
E.
en al
a) The marking provided in 9.1.11 should be reviewed per API 670 for placement of the proximity probe to
the burnished area and to other components.
B
b) Proximity probe areas should be protected to prevent damage during handling of the rotor or shaft.
rG e
10.3.5.1.11 Visually inspect locknut and washer for damage such as:
Fo itte
a) damage at the slots from tightening or loosening
b) burrs on the nut face

ot m
c) galling on the nut face or threads

N m
d) peening or spalling of the locking tab slots

o
C
e) missing or distorted locking tabs
f) missing or incomplete threads

r
Fo
g) torn or ruptured surfaces
h) cracks and yielding
Figures 10.14 and 10.15 identify these components.
NOTE: Typically, the lock washer is replaced.
72 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
Figure 10.14 - Locknut Figure 10.15 - Lock Washer
bu se
10.3.5.2 Shaft Shoulders
tri U
10.3.5.2.1 Inspect all shaft shoulders for perpendicularity to shaft centerline at the location where any
component seats such as the balance drum, thrust collar, thrust bearing spacers, rolling element bearing
is 0
and any locknut/split ring. Refer to Annex W for general acceptance criteria.
D 01
10.3.5.2.2 If a thrust bearing failure has occurred, measure and record the height and radius of the shaft
shoulder at the location where the rolling element bearing seats. Refer to Annex W for general
al 5
acceptance criteria.
er lot
10.3.5.3 Shaft Sleeve Inspection (spacer sleeves between impellers)
10.3.5.3.1 Visually inspect shaft sleeve(s) for:

en al
a) wear marks
B
b) fretting and / or corrosion between shaft and sleeve. Refer to Figure 10.13 for examples of fretting.
rG e
c) noticeable non-perpendicularity of mounting surfaces and parallelism of end faces

Fo itte
d) other damage
ot m
10.3.5.3.2 Dimensionally inspect shaft sleeve(s):

a) Outside diameter and bore measured at three diameters on each end
N m
b) Length of sleeve at four points around circumference

o
C
c) Review the data in 9.1.4. The length of the sleeve is critical on a multistage pump where deviation of the
length can result in misalignment of the impellers with diffusers/volutes.
r
Fo
d) surface finish of the sleeve OD and ends
e) perpendicularity of the sleeve faces
10.4 Stationary and Pressure Casing Components Inspections
This section describes the data to be recorded and the inspection recommendations of a pump pressure
casing and stationary components.
10.4.1 General
73 of 241
10.4.1.1 A visual inspection should be completed on all mating fits should be visually inspected for signs
of yielding, distress, fretting, or galling.
10.4.1.2.1 The repair shop should perform dimensional inspections for the components identified in the
y
appropriate Annex W. Fits should be calculated to determine if component rework is recommended to
restore the design fit.
n nl
10.4.1.2.2 Record the following data. Refer to Annex W for generally accepted criteria:
tio O
a) Flatness of mating surfaces
bu se
b) Gasket fit depths
tri U
c) O-ring groove dimensions
d) Register fit inside and outside diameters
is 0
D 01
e) Concentricity of bores
f) Parallelism of mating faces

al 5
10.4.1.2.3 Remove case wear rings if they indicate signs of excessive rubbing and the running clearances
er lot
exceed those referenced in 10.3.2.2. If removed, record the case mating diameter (ring land) and case
wear ring outside diameter.
en al
10.4.1.2.4 The pressure casing minimum required thickness is a difficult measurement as it takes into
account both pressure and structural capabilities. The OEM should be consulted to determine the
B
required pressure casing thickness. Reductions to pressure casing thickness can reduce MAWP.
rG e
10.4.1.3 Hydrostatic Test recommendations are identified in Table 12.5. The hydrostatic test work scope
Fo itte
should be included in 10.9
10.4.1.4 Inspection of Areas Prone to High Velocity Erosion

ot m
10.4.1.4.1 Erosion damage needs to be reviewed to determine if the erosion is in a pressure boundary
location so that it meets the minimum wall thickness requirements. Other erosion damage areas should
N m
be reviewed to determine the effect on the pump’s performance. Refer to OEM requirements for
additional guidance.
o
10.4.1.4.2 Visually inspect all liquid passages on stationary components and Volute tongue (cutwater) for
C
signs of erosion or wear. Refer to Figures 10.16 through 10.18 for examples of a diffuser pump cutwater
new, worn and repaired. Refer to Figures 10.19 through 10.21 for examples of erosive wear.
r
Fo
74 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01

al 5 Figure 10.16 - Diffuser Pump Cutwater

er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo

Figure 10.17 - Eroded Volute Cutwater
75 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 10.18 - Repaired Volute Cutwater
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.19 - Abrasive Wear
76 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0

Figure 10.20 - Abrasive Wear
D 01

al 5 Figure 10.21 - Abrasive Wear

er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
C
10.4.1.5 Foot Inspection

r
Fo
● 10.4.1.5.1 Pump case feet should be inspected for flatness and parallelism using a straight edge, as
practical. If specified, the case should be set up in a tool for inspection. Refer to Annex W for allowable
tolerances. Review the condition of the holes and the top surface of the bolting/washer to verify there is
no damage that needs correcting.
NOTE: This check is typically done if a “soft foot” condition or varying shim pack thickness under each
foot was discovered during pump removal.
10.4.1.6 Gasket Surfaces
77 of 241
10.4.1.6.1 General
10.4.1.6.1.1 Visually inspect the surface finish at the gasket location for scratches, gouges, pits, dents,
erosion, worm holes, or other damage. Do not locally polish, grind, or buff seating surface (remove burrs
only). Refer to Annex U for Imperfections in Flange Facing Finish for Raised Face Flanges.
10.4.1.6.1.2 Gasketed surfaces should have a surface finish per the requirements of Annex W. The finish
y
of gasket contact surfaces should be judged by comparison with Ra standards and not by instruments
having stylus tracers and electronic amplification.
n nl
10.4.1.6.1.3 Stone the surface(s) to remove any raised metal.
tio O
10.4.1.6.2 Pipe Flange Gasket Surface
bu se
10.4.1.6.2.1 Refer to Annex U for Imperfections in Flange Facing Finish for Raised Face Flanges.
tri U
10.4.1.6.2.2 For ductile iron or gray iron flanges refer to MSS SP-6.
10.4.1.6.3 Confined Controlled Compression Spiral Wound Gasket Surface
is 0
D 01
10.4.1.6.3.1 Spiral wound gasket compression should be calculated from measured dimensional data.
The resulting compression for spiral wound gaskets should be per Annex W
al 5
Refer to Figure 10.22 for an example of a confined controlled compression spiral wound gasket.
er lot
en al
B
Confined
rG e
Controlled
Fo itte
Compression
Spiral Wound
Gasket
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.22 Confined Controlled Compression Spiral Wound Gasket
10.4.1.6.4 Horizontal Joint Surface of Gasketed Axially Split Pressure Casing Style Pumps
a) Surfaces for axially split pressure casing gaskets should have a surface finish and flatness per Annex
78 of 241
W.
b) A straight edge and feeler gauges or laser are typically used to determine flatness.
10.4.1.6.5 Horizontal Joint Surface of Axially Split Non-gasketed Pressure Casing Style Pumps

10.4.1.6.5.1 Surfaces for the non-gasketed pressure boundary sealing surfaces should have a surface
y
finish per Annex W.
n nl
10.4.1.6.5.2 Perform contact verification of the split line to determine any high spots. Inspection should be
tio O
performed without bolting. The acceptance criteria should be per Annex W. If the acceptance criteria
recommended in Annex W are not met, then installation of all the bolting at 50% torque value (using
proper tightening sequence) may be allowed with owners’ approval.
bu se
Note: Excessive contact verification paste can cause inaccurate evaluation.
tri U
10.4.1.6.6 O-ring and O-ring Groove Inspections
is 0
10.4.1.6.6.1 Sealing surfaces for O-rings should have a surface finish per Annex W.
D 01
10.4.1.6.6.2 Refer to Annex O for O-ring information
10.4.1.6.6.3 All O-rings should be replaced.

al 5
10.4.1.7 Corrosion Damage
er lot
10.4.1.7.1 Visually inspect all liquid passages on components for signs of corrosion or wear. Refer to
en al
Figure 10.23 for an example of corrosion damage.

B
10.4.1.7.2 Verify thicknesses with OEM wear or corrosion allowance.
NOTE: Corrosion damage and erosion damage can appear similar.

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
79 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 10.23 - Corrosion Damage

B
10.4.2 Pressure Casing, Casing internals and Cover Inspections

rG e
10.4.2.1 General
Fo itte
10.4.2.1.1 The general section 10.4.2.1 covers pressure casings for all pump types.
Paragraphs 10.4.2.2 through 10.4.2.9 are specific for the pump types identified.
ot m
10.4.2.1.2 Stationary components should be disassembled and inspected in accordance with section 10.1
N m
10.4.2.1.3 Wearing parts should be inspected in accordance with 10.3.2.

o
10.4.2.1.4 The repair shop should perform the dimensional inspections in Annex W and paragraphs
C
10.4.2.1.5 through 10.4.2.1.9 after the rotor has been removed from the pressure casing
10.4.2.1.5 The diameter(s), concentricity, perpendicularity and finish of interference, register and sealing
r
surfaces should be measured and recorded.

Fo
10.4.2.1.6 Dimensional inspection of the pressure casing and cover (head) should be performed as
follows:
80 of 241
a) Interface dimensions with the pump case
b) all register fits
c) axial depth of the pressure casing cover (head)
d) Interface dimensions with the bearing housing
y
n nl
e) Interface dimensions with the seal/packing housing or gland
tio O
f) Perpendicularity of the bearing housing mounting surface
g) Surface finish of gasket areas
bu se
h) Length of the raised spigot register entrapping the gasket (Not applicable to BB1, BB3, or BB5 Volute
tri U
type)
10.4.2.1.7 All interface dimensions should create a proper fit with mating components to assure alignment
is 0
of the theoretical center line of pump casing assembly with the center line rotor assembly within the limits
D 01
specified in Annex W. This alignment is a combination of the fits between the case, cover(s), bearing
housing(s) and bearings.
al 5
10.4.2.1.8 The casing and/or cover surface in contact with the bearing housing should be perpendicular to
the pump case centerline per Annex W.
er lot
10.4.2.2 BB5 Barrel Cartridge Assembly / Bundle Assembly Inspection
en al
10.4.2.2.1 Visually inspect the cartridge as follows:

B
a) Overall condition of the outside of the cartridge

rG e
b) Gasketed surfaces and condition of any gaskets

Fo itte
c) Signs of leakage
ot m
d) The face(s) in contact with the pump case should be inspected for erosion
N m
e) Obtain samples of any deposits for analysis.

o
f) Wear
C
g) Damage
r
h) Failed fasteners
Fo
10.4.2.2.2 Clean per 9.2
10.4.2.2.3 Prior to disassembly of the inner pressure casing the axial length of the internal case assembly
should be measured and recorded. Reference Figures 14.17 through 14.20.
10.4.2.2.4 Dimensionally inspect the inner case dimensions.
10.4.2.2.5 The inner case is held concentric with the head by register fit(s). These register fits should be
inspected for distress such as galling or washing.
81 of 241
10.4.2.2.6 The diameter of all guide lugs or guide ring on the inner case should be inspected.
10.4.2.2.7 The inner case to barrel register outside diameter should be inspected and recorded. Typically,
this is located at the suction side of the inner case and coincides with the inner to outer gasket location
that separates the suction and discharge sections of the pump.
y
10.4.2.2.8 Inspect inner to outer case gasket location surfaces for erosion.
n nl
10.4.2.2.9 With the bearings and seals removed, measure and record the overall axial float of the rotor.
tio O
10.4.2.3 BB1, BB3 and BB5 Barrel Cartridge / Bundle Disassembly - Horizontally Split
bu se
When disassembling cartridge:
a) Remove all bolting holding sections together
tri U
b) If provisions for jackscrews are provided, clean and lubricate the jackscrew threads
is 0
c) Utilize jackscrews to carefully split sections evenly to prevent binding
D 01
10.4.2.4 At this phase of the inspection process, rotors for BB1, BB3 and BB5 pump types should be
disassembled (unstacked) and inspected in accordance with 10.1, 10.2, and 10.4.
al 5
10.4.2.5 BB1, BB3 and BB5 Barrel Cartridge / Bundle Inspection of Stationary Components - Horizontally
er lot
Split
10.4.2.5.1 Visually inspect the stationary components as follows:

en al
a) Overall condition of the cartridge fluid passages

B
b) Internal fluid bypassing

rG e
c) Signs of leakage
Fo itte
d) Erosion of the non-gasketed split line

ot m
e) Erosion of the cutwaters

N m
f) Obtain samples of any deposits for analysis

o
g) Rubbing
C
h) Wear
r
i) Damage
Fo
j) Wear ring groove damage
k) Wear ring anti-rotation pins
10.4.2.5.2 The inner case split line should be verified for flatness per Annex W.
10.4.2.5.3 Surface finish of the inner case split line should be measured and recorded. Refer to Annex W.
82 of 241
10.4.2.5.4 Stationary wear parts such as wear rings, throttle, throat and balance bushing should be
replaced if there are indications of galling.
10.4.2.5.5 All stationary wear components should be dimensionally inspected for the fit to the inner
pressure casing and running clearances. Indications of rubbing should be evaluated to determine the
need for component replacement.
y
Refer to Annex W for wear ring fit to inner pressure casing.
Refer to Annex W for wearing part running clearances.
n nl
10.4.2.5.6 Dimensionally inspect wear ring tongue and grooves. See Annex W for guidance.
tio O
10.4.2.6 BB2, BB4 and BB5 Barrel Cartridge Assembly / Bundle Assembly Disassembly - Radially split
bu se
10.4.2.6.1 Due to the construction, this design requires sequential unstacking of the rotor and diffuser for
inspection of the rotor and diffusers. This can be done with the inner pressure casing in the vertical
tri U
position.
10.4.2.6.2 Care should be exercised in the disassembly to prevent the damaging of components.
is 0
Components can have interference or non-interference fits. An interference fit will require heating of the
D 01
component to allow disassembly. A non-interference fit can also require heating of the component to
allow disassembly. A thorough understanding of the cartridge construction is recommended to safely
disassemble the cartridge without causing component damage.
al 5
10.4.2.6.3 When disassembling cartridge:
er lot
a) Remove all bolting holding sections together
en al
b) If provisions for jackscrews are provided, clean and lubricate the jackscrew threads
B
c) If disassembling in horizontal orientation, be sure diffusers are supported to prevent dropping them onto
the shaft.
rG e
d) Utilize jackscrews to carefully split sections evenly to prevent binding

Fo itte
Diffusers that do not have an interference fit with each other can require tapping with a soft faced mallet
or brass pry bars to separate. If this is unsuccessful, heat in accordance with paragraph 10.1.20
ot m
10.4.2.6.4 Diffusers that have an interference fit with each should be uniformly heated for disassembly.
N m
10.4.2.6.5 Dimensionally inspect and record the inner case dimensions in accordance with the Annex W.
o
10.4.2.6.6 Mating surfaces should be protected after disassembly.

C
10.4.2.7 Rotors for BB2, BB4 and BB5 Barrel - Radially Split pumps should be unstacked and inspected
r
in accordance with section 10.1 and 10.3.

Fo
10.4.2.8 BB2, BB4 and BB5 Cartridge Assembly / Bundle Assembly Component Diffuser Inspection-
Radially split
10.4.2.8.1 Visually inspect the components as follows (see Figure 10.24 as an example):
83 of 241
a) Sealing faces between diffusers (stage casing) should be inspected for erosion
b) Overall condition of the cartridge fluid passages
c) Internal fluid bypassing
d) Signs of leakage
y
n nl
e) Erosion of the non-gasketed split line
tio O
f) Erosion of the cutwaters
g) Note any deposits and obtain samples for analysis
bu se
h) Rubbing
tri U
i) Wear
is 0
j) Damage
D 01
k) Wear ring groove damage
al 5
l) Wear ring anti rotation pins
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
84 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot

Figure 10.24 - Diffuser Vane Leading Edge Erosion
en al
B
10.4.2.8.2 Dimensionally inspect stage positioning of individual diffuser segments. Compare this data with
the stage positioning of the rotor to determine rotor axial position within the diffusers (refer to 9.1.4 f). If
deviation is found between these measurements, analyze the data.
rG e
Fo itte
NOTE: In a radially split, multi-stage pump, even small deviations on the stage length between stationary
and rotating components can result in misalignment of the impeller and diffuser and consequently in a
loss of the pump performance, reduction of efficiency and possibility of increased axial thrust.
ot m
10.4.2.8.3 Visually inspect the diffuser mating surfaces and record the size, depth, type (such as punch
marks, wash out, dents, scratches, machining marks, spot welding or of any imperfection) and if damage
N m
transverses sealing face.

o
10.4.2.8.4 Perform contact verification inspection of the diffuser mating surfaces to determine any high
C
spots.
10.4.2.8.5 Surface finish of each diffuser’s split line should be measured and recorded. Refer to Annex W.
r
Fo
10.4.2.8.6 All stationary wear components should be dimensionally inspected for the fit to the inner
pressure casing and running clearances.
10.4.2.8.7 Wear parts such as wear rings and bushings should be replaced if there are indications of
rubbing and/or the running clearances exceed those referenced in 10.3.2.2
10.4.2.8.8 Inspect and record radial fits between suction cover and barrel. Inspect radial fit between last
stage cover to discharge head.
10.4.2.9 BB5 Outer Casing and Cover Inspection
85 of 241
Note 1: BB5 barrel pumps have a double casing design consisting of an outer case and an internal
assembly (e.g. bundle or cartridge). Based on the pump design, internal assembly can be vertically split
(diffuser) or horizontally split (volute).
Note 2: As outlined in 9.1.4, the outer casing for this type of pump is not always removed from the field
and only the cartridge assembly or bundle assembly with end head(s), seals, bearing housings and
y
bearings is sent to the repair shop.
Note 3: Refer to Annex A for the various casing configurations.
n nl
10.4.2.9.1 Dimensional inspections in Annex W should be performed.
tio O
10.4.2.9.2 Visually inspect the outer case as follows:
bu se
a) The face(s) in contact with the inner bundle should be inspected for erosion.
tri U
b) Condition of shear rings and grooves
10.4.2.9.3 The inner case is held concentric with the head by a register fit(s). These register fits should be
is 0
inspected for distress such as galling or washing.
D 01
10.4.2.9.4 The inside diameter of the outer case at the inner bundle register and lug fits should be
inspected, measured and recorded. Typically, this is located at the suction side of the inner case and
al 5
coincides with the inner to outer sealing surface or gasket location that separates the suction and
discharge sections of the pump.
er lot
10.4.2.9.5 Inspect inner to outer case gasket location or sealing/mating surfaces for erosion.
en al
10.4.3 Seal Chambers

B
10.4.3.1 Measure and record the seal chamber bore(s).

rG e
10.4.3.2 The concentricity of the seal chamber register fit should be measured and recorded. Refer to
Annex W for acceptance criteria.
Fo itte
10.4.3.3 The seal chamber face runout should be measured and recorded. Refer to Annex W for
acceptance criteria.
ot m
10.4.3.4 The clearance between the seal gland pilot and the seal chamber bore should be measured and
N m
recorded. Refer to Annex W for acceptance criteria.

o
10.4.3.5 The minimum radial clearance between the rotating components of the seal and the stationary
surfaces of the seal chamber and gland plate should be in accordance with Annex W.
C
10.4.3.6 Refer to Annex W for shaft to seal sleeve fit.

r
Fo
10.4.3.7 Refer to Annex W for the clearance recommendations for throat bushings. API 682 seal vapor
pressure margin compliance may require smaller clearances based on an engineering review.
10.4.4 Check auxiliary piping including balance line, drains, and vents for obstructions/plugging. NDT
examine any welded sections and PMI alloy piping.
10.4.5 Fasteners and threaded holes
10.4.5.1 Fasteners include set-screws, studs, bolting, washer and nuts.
86 of 241
10.4.5.2 Fasteners should be removed.

a) The threads of holes and fasteners should be visually inspected for gross defects.
b) This visual inspection should be made without magnification and is intended to detect such gross defects
as missing or incomplete threads, defective thread profile, torn or ruptured surfaces, yielding, cracks
and bent fasteners.
y
c) Record any damage found during the inspection.
n nl
d) If cupping of washers has occurred, consider replacing the washer with hardened washers per ASTM
tio O
F436/F436M.
bu se
10.4.5.3 All threads and threaded holes used on non-commercial fasteners should be inspected using
GO, NO-GO gaging.
tri U
● 10.4.5.4 If specified, fasteners in service(s) which can promote stress corrosion cracking should be
replaced.
is 0
10.4.5.5 Fasteners in highly corrosive services that have been associated with a leaking gasket identified
D 01
in 4.4.1c should be replaced.
● 10.4.5.6 If specified, fasteners on pressure containing joints should be magnetic particle inspected.
al 5
Refer to Annex W for acceptance criteria and allowable residual magnetism. Fasteners with cut threads
may not pass magnetic particle inspection.
er lot
10.4.5.7 Fasteners should have markings which identify material, class, grade or hardness of the
fastener.
en al
10.4.5.8 To verify that the threaded holes are in good condition and allow proper installation, run the
B
correct tap (bottom tap if bottom hole design) into the threaded hole to clean the threads, remove the tap,
flush with a solvent and using a needle air gun, carefully blow the hole clean. Run the stud or bolt with an
rG e
appropriate thread lubricant into the threaded hole to verify an adequate installation and remove. Do not
Fo itte
install the studs or bolts until necessary for the assembly steps.
10.5 Bearings and Bearing Housing Assembly Inspection

ot m
10.5.1 Bearing Housing

N m
10.5.1.1 Visually inspect bearing housing and components for the following:
a) Integrity of any internal coatings
o
C
b) Fretting of bearing fits

r
c) Oil passages are open or blocked as appropriate if oil mist lubrication is used
Fo
d) Oil passages/orifices are open and clean, see 5.7.1.2
e) Integrity of any internal cooling coils and fins
f) Condition of anti-rotation pins, alignment pins and corresponding holes
g) Signs of rubbing / overheating
h) All mating surfaces should be inspected for signs of distress
87 of 241
i) Cooling water jackets for cleanliness and integrity
j) Presence and condition of any previous repairs or inserts.
k) Cracks
l) Vibration monitoring and temperature instrumentation mounted in accordance with API 670.
y
n nl
m) Corrosion
tio O
n) Condition and location of oil mist connection(s) and reclassifiers as applicable.
o) Location and condition of any oil supply orifices for pressurized oil supply systems.
bu se
p) Inspect for stud holes protruding into oil reservoir
tri U
q) Vents/breathers are open and clean
is 0
10.5.1.2 For bearing housing design utilizing a register fit for attachment to the pump casing, the
D 01
clearance between casing and bearing housing registers should be as specified in Annex W.
10.5.1.3 The register fits should be inspected for concentricity with bearing bore and should be in
al 5
accordance with Annex W.
er lot
10.5.1.4 The bearing housing face attached to the case/head/yoke should be inspected for
perpendicularity to the bearing bore and should be in accordance with Annex W.
en al
● 10.5.1.5 If specified, the bearing housing should be NDT inspected. Refer to Annex W for acceptance
criteria and allowable residual magnetism.
B
10.5.1.6 Check bearing housing metallurgy for possible upgrade.

rG e
10.5.1.7 Bearing Housing Bore

Fo itte
10.5.1.7.1 Bearing Housing Bore for Rolling Element Bearings

ot m
10.5.1.7.1.1 For rolling element bearing arrangements, the bearing housing fit to the bearing outside
diameter should be in accordance with Annex W.
N m
a) Measure and record the height, radius and perpendicularly of the housing shoulder against which any
rolling element bearing seats.
o
C
b) The dimensions should be in accordance with Annex W.
NOTE 1: Bearing housings for older pumps might not be manufactured to H7 tolerances.
r
Fo
NOTE 2: A normal H7 fit results in a metal to metal fit at maximum material conditions. The modified H7
fits in Annex W table result in clearance
10.5.1.7.1.2 Determine the axial clearance between the bearing and end cover (end float) for duplex ball
bearing sets.
a) Visually check end covers.
b) The surface(s) in contact with thrust bearing should be flat and free of any damage.
88 of 241
c) If multiple surfaces are used confirm each surface is the same length.
d) Refer to Annex W for dimensional criteria.
10.5.1.7.2 Bearing Housing Bore For Hydrodynamic Bearings
10.5.1.7.2.1 Bearing housings for hydrodynamic bearings should be inspected in accordance with Annex
y
H.
n nl
10.5.1.8 Bearing housings for oil-lubricated bearings without pressure-fed or pure oil mist should be
tio O
inspected for a permanent indication of the proper oil level. This identification should be accurately
located and clearly marked on the outside of the bearing housing with permanent metal tags, marks
inscribed in the castings, or other durable means.
bu se
The sight glass should be provided and located such that the proper oil level elevation is at the midpoint.
Sight glasses should be cleaned so that oil level is observable.
tri U
10.5.1.9 For pure oil mist applications any oil drain-back hole(s) should be plugged to assure the oil mist
is 0
does not bypass the rolling element bearings.
D 01
10.5.1.10 Oil ring retainers should be inspected for straightness, and length. Refer to Figure 10.25 for an
illustration of an oil ring retainer
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
89 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01

Figure 10.25 - Oil ring retainer
al 5
er lot
10.5.1.11 Verify the cooling coils, cooling cartridges and water jackets cleanliness by flow testing.
10.5.1.12 Cooling coils, cooling cartridges or water jacketed bearing housings should be hydrostatically
en al
tested to the pressure indicated by the OEM. If process fluid is used as the cooling medium, the repair
shop and owner should agree on the test pressure. For water cooling, if no information is available coils
B
should be hydrostatically tested to 150 psig (10.34 bar) for 30 minutes to verify the integrity and check for
leaks. If there are leaks, the fix should be agreed upon with the owner.
rG e
10.5.1.13 Bearing isolating devices should be disassembled for visual inspection of possible rubbing that
Fo itte
may not allow the device to properly function. As a minimum, the O-rings should be replaced, and the
entire device should be replaced if sufficient damage prevents it from functioning.
ot m
10.5.2 Bearings
N m
10.5.2.1 Rolling Element Bearings should be inspected and replaced in accordance with 9.1.5. Refer to
Annex W for bearing fit recommendations.
o
10.5.2.2 Hydrodynamic Journal Bearings

C
10.5.2.2.1 Hydrodynamic journal bearings should be inspected per Annex H. See Annex I for examples
r
of hydrodynamic bearing damage. Refer to Annex W for hydrodynamic bearing clearances.

Fo
10.5.2.2.2 Hydrodynamic journal bearings should be replaced or repaired if:

a) Any of the conditions in Annex I exist
b) The bearing clearance exceed those in Annex W
c) The bearing to bearing housing fit exceeds the criteria in Annex W
d) The hole for the anti-rotation pin is damaged
90 of 241
e) Physical damage is present that can affect bearing performance
10.5.2.2.3 Verify temperature sensing devices function properly if present.
10.5.2.3 Hydrodynamic Thrust Bearings
10.5.2.3.1 Refer to 9.1.6 for removal and inspection of hydrodynamic thrust bearings
y
n nl
10.5.2.3.2 Refer to Annex W for setting of hydrodynamic thrust bearing axial clearance (end float). The
bearing size is approximately the outside diameter of the thrust collar.
tio O
10.5.2.3.3 Verify temperature sensing function properly if present.
bu se
10.5.3 Oilers
10.5.3.1 Oilers that provide automatic refill should be mounted on the “up side” of rotation on the housing.
tri U
Refer to Figure 10.26.
is 0
10.5.3.2 Oilers should be removed from the bearing housing, disassembled and inspected for:
D 01
a) plugging /cleanliness / transparency
b) thread condition
al 5
c) bent components
er lot
d) all necessary components included and functionally correct
en al
e) cracks
B
f) setting which maintains the proper oil level

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 10.26 – Proper Oiler Location
10.5.4 Bearing Housing Auxiliary Devices such as vents, breathers, expansion chambers, driers, drain
valves and oil sump collection container should be inspected, cleaned or replaced.
10.5.5 Oil Rings
10.5.5.1 Inspect oil rings for flat spots, out-of-round, sharp edges and other signs of wear on sides and
bore.
91 of 241
10.5.5.2 Measure and record the ring diameter, width and thickness. Compare the oil ring with its
manufacturing drawing or a spare ring.
10.5.5.3 If the sides of oil ring the slot in a hydrodynamic bearing are babbitted, check Babbitt condition.
10.5.5.4 Determine if there has been a change in the cross section of the ring due to wear. Refer to
y
Annex W for generally accepted oil ring dimensional criteria.
n nl
10.5.5.5 The condition of the chamfer(s) on the corners of the ring can be an indication of ring wear. If the
chamfer is worn away or if it shows signs of uneven wear, then the oil ring should be replaced.
tio O
10.6 Auxiliary Items
bu se
10.6.1 Auxiliary Connections
tri U
10.6.1.1 If a component for an auxiliary connection is removed, develop a sketch with dimensions and
orientation and take Photographs of any auxiliary connection so that the location of the components can
be repeated upon reassembly or replacement of the components. Piping can be distorted (bent or out of
is 0
parallel) due to physically being damaged or possibly altered to fit the system. The distortion should be
D 01
discussed with the owner.
● 10.6.1.2 If specified, document the auxiliary connection type, pressure rating and schedule of all
al 5
components. Consider upgrading of threaded connections to comply with API 610.
er lot
10.6.1.3 Sketch and photograph the auxiliary piping and tubing configuration including lengths, angles,
valves, fittings, components and sizes that would allow replacement.
en al
10.6.2 Mechanical Seals and Packing

B
10.6.2.1 Cartridge Seals

rG e
10.6.2.1.1 The cartridge mechanical seal should be sent to the owner’s selected seal repair vendor to be
Fo itte
disassembled, inspected, and repaired. An inspection/ failure report should be provided.
● 10.6.2.1.2 If there are any failed seal components, a root cause failure analysis should be provided if
specified. The owner selected seal vendor should recommend any repairs or upgrades to meet current
ot m
standards and current operating conditions.

N m
10.6.2.1.3 Once the cartridge seal is reassembled, each seal should have an assembly integrity test in
accordance with API 682 by the owner selected seal vendor.
o
10.6.2.2 Component Seal (non-cartridge design)

C
10.6.2.2.1 Component seals should be disassembled, and the conditions of the seal components should
r
be inspected for build-ups, corrosion, fretting or other damage.

Fo
a) The seal gland should be visually inspected for leakage across the gland plate gasket area.
b) The components should be replaced as required.
c) Typically, all the seal faces should be replaced and all gasketing devices should be replaced.
d) Confirm that seal face flatness meets design requirements.
e) Upgrading a component seal to a cartridge seal should be considered.
92 of 241
10.6.2.2.2 An inspection/ failure report should be provided, as appropriate. If there are any failed seal
components, a root cause failure analysis should be provided. Refer to 9.1.2e
10.6.2.3 Shaft Packing should be completely replaced.

a) The packing sleeves should be inspected for wear and the outside diameter measured and recorded.
b) Upgrading packing to a cartridge seal should be considered. Refer to 11.6.3 and 11.6.5 for additional
y
information.
n nl
10.6.3 Coupling Inspections
tio O
10.6.3.1 General
bu se
10.6.3.1.1 Coupling assemblies should be inspected per 10.6.3.1 and either 10.6.3.2, 10.6.3.3, or
10.6.3.4 as applicable. The inspection, disassembly, replacement components, and reassembly differ
tri U
somewhat between special purpose couplings and general purpose couplings.
NOTE 1: Special purpose couplings (API 671) typically have tighter tolerances and a higher degree of
is 0
balance than general purpose couplings.
D 01
NOTE 2: Special purpose couplings are typically recognizable from general purpose couplings by
identification on the coupling drawing.
al 5
10.6.3.1.2 Do not disassemble the coupling components farther than the recommended by the OEM.
er lot
Improper reassembly of coupling components can cause an imbalance situation. Consider match-
marking any coupling components prior to disassembly.
en al
10.6.3.1.3 During the inspection of the coupling assembly, verify that all components were properly
installed. Verify no parts are missing or assembled incorrectly.
B
10.6.3.1.4 Refer to Annex W for coupling hub to shaft dimensional fits.

rG e
10.6.3.1.5 Refer to AGMA 9002-B04 for inspection for the coupling.

Fo itte
10.6.3.2 General Purpose Coupling Inspections

ot m
10.6.3.2.1 General purpose couplings typically consist of a center assembly and a hub on each end. The
specific design of the coupling will determine the extent of the inspection. Some disc and diaphragm
N m
couplings have assemblies that are factory assembled. Refer to the OEM’s instructions before
disassembling the subassemblies. A visual examination should include as a minimum the observance for:
o
a) Loosened paint or coating

C
b) Scratches on the flexible element(s)

r
c) Dents in the flexible element(s)

Fo
d) Cracked flexible element(s)
e) Deformed flexible element(s)
f) Twisted or distorted components
g) Rusting, pitting or other corrosion damage
93 of 241
h) Condition of the bolts such as thread damage, thread area yielding, shank wear and bolt holes
(roundness).
i) Condition of each flange for any raised areas around the bolt holes or the flange edges from bolt damage
or improper disassembly techniques.
j) Bent windage flanges (shrouds) (these can fail and introduce an imbalance that can result in a failure)
y
n nl
k) Cracked welds
tio O
l) Loose components
m) Cracks in the keyway area
bu se
n) Fretting
tri U
o) Missing fasteners
is 0
10.6.3.3 API 671 Special Purpose Coupling components should be inspected in accordance with API RP
D 01
687 Chapter 1, Appendix C.
a) Special Purpose coupling components can be removed and sent to the owner’s selected coupling repair
al 5
vendor for inspection and refurbishment.
er lot
b) The details of the extent of the inspection and refurbishment should be agreed by the owner and the
repair shop considering the coupling design.
en al
10.6.3.4 Gear style couplings should be inspected per API RP 687 Chapter 1, Appendix C including a
review of the condition of any remaining grease or separation, degradation or contamination and metal
B
particles.
rG e
10.6.4 Measure and record the motor shaft and base tolerances of vertical motors (OH3, OH4, OH5) per
API 610 Figure 36
Fo itte
10.6.5 Guards for Exposed Shaft Areas

ot m
10.6.5.1 Guard(s) for exposed shaft areas should meet ANSI B11.19 and API 610. If a guard is not
included, review 11.8.2.
N m
10.6.5.2 Visually inspect the guard(s) for:

o
a) Structural integrity
C
b) Indications of rubbing or contact that can indicate it has been deformed or distorted
r
c) Discoloration of non-metallic components

Fo
d) Fasteners
10.7 Inspection Report of Components and Evaluation of Rotor Component Inspection Data
10.7.1 The repair shop should prepare an inspection documentation package (report) consisting of
information identified in:
a) Section 9
94 of 241
b) Section 10
10.7.2 Review and evaluate all data and information to determine the acceptability of the resulting fits,
clearances, and runouts. For components that are out of OEM specification, inspection documentation
should include both the as found measurement/condition and the acceptance criteria. If OEM information
is not available, use Annex W.
y
10.7.3 The basis of repair recommendations should be to deliver a safe and reliable pump by returning
n nl
dimensions to the latest design fits and clearances and incorporating materials compatible with the
current operating conditions. This will allow the repaired pump to:
tio O
a) Maintain interchangeability with other units.
b) Use existing spare parts.
bu se
c) Eliminate errors in manufacturing future spare parts that could be caused by undocumented dimensional
tri U
changes.
d) Maintain its critical speed margins and torque transmission capabilities. Small rotor to stator clearance
is 0
changes can move rotor critical speeds and changes in shrink fits can adversely affect rotor dynamics.
D 01
e) Repairs should be completed per Section 12.
al 5
Note: The latest design fits and clearances might not be as originally designed by the original equipment
manufacturer (OEM), because re-rates and/or upgrades could have been incorporated into the machine
er lot
design.
10.7.4 Once the repair shop has completed the inspections and documentation, the owner and repair
en al
shop should meet to develop a finalized work scope. The following should available for the meeting.
B
a) All inspection results and documentation clearly indicating deviations from OEM values or Annex W.
rG e
b) Dimensional information per Annex W, as applicable

Fo itte
c) Results of all NDT inspections and PMI.
d) Information concerning modifications, hydraulic re-rates or upgrades requested by the owner or

ot m
suggested by the repair shop

N m
e) Repair shop’s recommendations of components to be repaired or replaced including repair techniques

o
f) Spare parts availability from the owner

C
g) Work that should be sub-contracted and proposed sub-contractors

r
h) Inspection and test plan including hold points

Fo
i) Identification of the vendor for replacement parts supplied by the repair shop (owner’s approved vendors
list should be used)
j) Identification of any component removed from the pump that differs from the information identified by the
95 of 241
pump vendor
k) Pricing of repairs, modifications or upgrades, replacement components and testing.
l) Proposed schedule
m) Identification of storage requirements after assembly
y
n nl
n) Documentation for final report and timing
tio O
o) Considerations from 12.1.1 through 12.1.3
10.7.5 The original machine nameplate should be kept on the machine unless the owner allows removal.
bu se
New austenitic stainless steel nameplate(s) should be provided to identify the repair shop information and
if anything on the original nameplate has changed.and all fields from the original nameplate with current
tri U
data.
a) Nameplates should not be mounted on pressure containing components
is 0
a)b)Nameplate(s) should be attached by pins of the same material as the nameplate. Welding is not
D 01
permitted
al 5
b) Welding is not permitted.
c) The new nameplate should be mounted adjacent to the original nameplate unless it violates a).
er lot
d) The new additional nameplate(s) (leave original nameplate installed) should be supplied identifying
en al
information such as:

B
1. When a performance modification or re-rate has been completed, the revised performance or
operating conditions.
rG e
2. When impeller(s) diameter has been changed, the new impeller(s) diameter should be identified.
3. If the bearings have been changed, the new rolling element bearings numbers to be identified
Fo itte
4. Name of repair shop

5. Date of repair or upgrade
6. Repair shop job number
ot m
7. Any other information specified by the owner.

N m
e) Severely deteriorated original nameplates can be replaced with a new austenic stainless steel nameplate
with all the data fields from the original nameplate with current data,identical information with with
o
owner’s approval.
C
10.7.6 The complexity of a project or repair will usually determine how many review meetings or
discussions should be planned. Meeting minutes should be published by the repair shop and distributed
r
to the attendees or other personnel involved in the scope of the project for review and comment. Follow-
Fo
up meetings may be necessary if deviations from the initial repair scope are found during the repair
process.
10.8 Investigation of damaged components should be considered to determine the root cause of failure
and determine preventive or mitigative repair actions or operational changes.
10.9 A revised Repair Shop Work scope (RSWS rev 01) should be prepared based on results of 10.2,
10.7 and 10.8. Modifications such as identified in section 11 should be presented to the owner for
consideration.
96 of 241
10.10 The repair shop should forward a proposal defining the agreed scope of work with the inspection
reports, proposed modifications, price, and delivery sent to the owner to the address specified in the
inquiry documents. The proposal should include a statement that the repair scope and all documentation
will be in accordance with this standard. If the scope and supplied data are not in strict accordance, the
repair shop should include a list that details and explains each deviation. The repair shop should provide
details to evaluate any proposed alternative repair procedures and scope. All correspondence from the
repair shop should be clearly identified in accordance with:
y
a) The owner’s corporate name
n nl
b) The owner’s job/project/inquiry/purchase order number
tio O
c) The owner’s equipment item number and service name
bu se
d) Equipment serial number
tri U
e) The repair shop’s identifying proposal number, shop order number, or other reference number.
10.11 The User and the repair shop should discuss the inspections, recommended modifications to
is 0
determine a revised Repair Shop Work Scope. If additional inspections are completed through the work
D 01
scope process, additional work scopes may be necessary. These revised works scopes are identified as
revisions to the “Repair Shop Work Scopes”.
al 5
10.12 Generated Waste
er lot
10.12.1 Disassembly and cleaning of the equipment or components at the repair shop can generate
hazardous waste. Spent gaskets, parts or O-rings can require special handling. The owner and the repair
shop should discuss handling and disposal of generated waste.
en al
10.12.2 The owner and the repair shop should discuss disposition of serviceable and non-serviceable
B
used parts.
rG e
11.0 Pump Modification and Re-Rates

Fo itte
11.1 General
11.1.1 This section can be used to evaluate proposed material, hydraulic, mechanical, and auxiliary
ot m
component modifications (upgrades) and re-rates. When considering these changes, a review of the
application should be completed to ensure that the change is correct for the application and site. In many
N m
situations, the current operating condition does not match the condition for which the pump was initially
designed and it can be possible to improve the operation and reliability of the equipment. In some cases,
o
modifying or replacing existing components with an alternative design is a possibility. New components
and upgrades should meet the inspection, testing, and quality control recommendations of sections 8 and
C
10. Troubleshooting can provide insight into potential upgrades or re-rates. Some modifications can
increase the required power and the need for drive components with higher power and torque capability.
r
If any changes are performed, a permanent record of the change should be documented and placed in
Fo
the final document package.
11.1.2 Modifications and re-rates should be considered to provide:
a. Improved equipment safety

b. Improved reliability
c. Reduced seal leakage
d. Equipment adapted to changing performance conditions
e. Improved operating efficiency and reduced power consumption
f. Upgrades to meet current editions of API Standards such as API 610 and API 682
97 of 241
g. Interchangeability with similar pumping units and reduced spare parts inventory
h. Machinery protection
i. Materials that better meet the demands of the application
● 11.1.3 The owner should provide the applicable data sheets to the repair shop.
11.1.3.1 Any information on these data sheets that changes as the result of a modification or re-rate
y
should be updated by the repair shop.
n nl
11.1.3.2 If the data sheets are electronic, they should be electronically changed. If printed, changes
should be shown on a marked-up copy.
tio O
● 11.1.3.3 If specified, the repair shop should provide the latest electronic version of the appropriate API
bu se
data sheet(s) specified by the owner. The sections of these API data sheets that are identified as “By
Purchaser” should be completed by the owner and then should be provided to the repair shop for
completion of the “By Manufacturer” portion which should include any modifications or re-rates. Previous
tri U
changes/operating parameters to the equipment should be included on the data sheets provided by the
owner.
is 0
● 11.1.4 The owner should provide to the repair shop the bill of material that should be updated.
D 01
11.1.4.1 Any information on the bill of material which changes as the result of a modification or re-rate
should be updated by the repair shop.
al 5
11.1.4.2 If the bill of material is electronic it should be electronically changed and if the bill of material is a
er lot
hard copy it should be a marked-up hard copy.
● 11.1.4.3 If specified, the repair shop should provide an electronic bill of material for the components as
en al
identified by the owner as appropriate.

B
11.1.5 The owner and the repair shop should review the equipment and systems to evaluate current
system design and identify any improvement recommendations. Typically, upgrades are determined from
rG e
the owner’s upgrade lists. Upgrades can also be considered based on root cause failure analysis, results
Fo itte
of troubleshooting, results of the inspections outlined in Section 10, and items listed in this section.
11.1.6 Wear ring upgrades should be considered if they are cracked or loose, or if they experience high
wear rates. Possible modifications include:
ot m
a. Replacing radial or axial set screw retention with tack welds

N m
b. Replacing radial set screws with axial set screws

c. Material change
o
d. Applying a hard coating

e. Hardening by heat treatment
C
f. Incorporating integral wear rings for high temperature transients, abrasive services or high speeds
r
11.1.7 Pumps in Previous Service

Fo
11.1.7.1 Pump conversions from a previous service to a proposed different service should have a
complete review of the application and the capabilities of the equipment for fitness for the proposed
service.
11.1.7.2 Fitness for the proposed service should have an evaluation of items such as the process fluids
and their properties/corrosion/erosion, temperatures, pressures and hydraulic requirements.
11.2 Pump Type Conversions
98 of 241
11.2.1 OH5 to OH4: Modify pump from an OH5 which has the impeller mounted on the motor shaft to an
OH4 which has a rigid coupling between the motor and the pump shafts.
11.2.2 OH5 to OH4 or OH3: Modify pump from an OH5 which has the impeller mounted on the motor
shaft or an OH4 which has a rigid coupling between the motor and the pump shafts to an OH3 which has
a bearing housing arrangement for the pump and the motor to pump shafts have a flexible coupling.
y
11.2.3 "Back Pull-out" Assembly Replacement (OH1 and OH2):
n nl
11.2.3.1 This modification usually includes a bearing housing, shaft, bearings, back cover, and an API
682 seal chamber to replace components of earlier designs that may not be as robust.
tio O
11.2.3.2 The benefits from the back pull-out modification typically include:
bu se
a) improved seal and bearing life resulting from improved bearing cooling, lubrication, materials (steel
bearing housing versus cast iron)
tri U
b) improved gasketing
is 0
c) enhanced mechanical seals and systems
D 01
d) improved shaft design
al 5
11.2.4 Coke Crusher Service / Addition of Features
er lot
11.2.4.1 Coke crusher features can be added to pumps in coke fines service. Refer to Figures 11.1
through 11.3 for specific additions that can improve the reliability of the pump in coke fines service.
en al
11.2.4.2 Single suction and double suction designs are shown in Figures 11.1 and 11.2. Figure 11.3
shows other types of coke crushers. A coke crusher can allow removal of a suction strainer or the
B
increasing of the strainer’s hole size.

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 11.1 - Coke Crusher for Single Stage Overhung Style Pump
99 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
Figure 11.2 - Coke Crusher for Double Suction Between Bearings Style Pump
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
100 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 11.3 - Typical Coke Crusher
11.3 Changes to alter pump hydraulics (flow, head, efficiency, NPSH3, performance curve
en al
shape)
B
11.3.1 General
Hydraulic modifications are made to alter the hydraulic performance capability of the pump so that current
rG e
or proposed hydraulic conditions are met or to improve reliability. Anytime changes are made to pump
Fo itte
case or impeller geometry, performance testing should be considered to confirm that the desired
improvement was achieved.
ot m
11.3.1.1 The repair shop should provide complete performance curves for the proposed hydraulic
modification. These performance curves should include differential head, efficiency, NPSH3, and power
N m
expressed as functions of flow.

a) Except for low specific-speed designs where it would not be feasible, the curves should be extended to
o
at least 120% of flow rate at peak efficiency, and the rated operating point should be indicated.
C
b) The performance curves for maximum and minimum impeller diameters should be included. The
proposed modifications, impeller style, specific speed and suction-specific speed should be shown on
r
the curves.
Fo
c) If applicable, the curves should indicate viscosity corrections.
d) Minimum flow (both thermal and stable), preferred and allowable operating regions, and any limitations
of operation should be indicated. NPSH3 should be shown from minimum continuous stable flow to at
least 120% of BEP.
11.3.1.2 Modifying the pump hydraulics can result in changes such as the head/capacity, efficiency,
required power, NPSH3, axial loading or radial loading. These changes should have a detailed analysis
101 of 241
of both the equipment and the system. Significant changes to the operating temperature can affect
internal clearances.
11.3.1.3 Typical methods used to modify the pump’s hydraulic capabilities are:
11.3.1.3.1 Speed changes: Increasing or reducing the speed
y
11.3.1.3.2 Modifications to the impeller(s):
n nl
a) Larger or smaller impeller diameter
tio O
b) Impeller style change
1. Narrower or wider vane width
bu se
2. Number of vanes
c) Increasing or reducing the number of impellers for multi-stage pumps
tri U
11.3.1.3.3 Modifications to the pressure casing:
is 0
a) Increasing or decreasing volute tongue length
D 01
b) Increasing or decreasing the volute cross sectional area
al 5
c) volute side wall to impeller shroud gap
er lot
11.3.1.3.4 Modifications to diffusers:
a) Changing the diffuser to an alternate style (for a diffuser type pump)
en al
b) combination of the diffusers and impellers should be maintained

B
NOTE: Alternate components could already be available to accomplish some of the modifications
rG e
described.
Fo itte
11.3.2 Volute Cross Section Modifications
11.3.2.1 Moving Best Efficient Point (BEP) to left of original position

ot m
The volute cross section area significantly effects pump performance. The volute area can be modified
N m
by extending the volute tongue (lip) or adding a volute insert(s) thus changing the pump’s BEP flow and /
or head.
o
11.3.2.1.1 A volute tongue (lip) extension(s) is a piece of metal having the same chemical and
C
mechanical properties as that of the original pressure casing. The extension(s) is welded into the
pressure casing at the point of the original volute tongue (lip) and reduces the cross-sectional (flow area)
r
of the volute(s). This reduction results in moving the BEP flow to the left of the original position and can
Fo
also reduce the differential head. Refer to Figure 11.4
102 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 11.4 - Volute Cross Section Reduction
11.3.2.1.2 A volute insert(s) is a cast or fabricated component that is welded into the pump case at the
en al
location of the existing volute tongue (lip). The volute insert(s) reduces the cross-sectional area (flow
area) of the volute and will move the BEP flow to the left of the original position. Refer to Figure 11.5
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 11.5 - Volute Inserts
103 of 241
11.3.2.2 Moving Best Efficiency Point (BEP) to right of original position
The volute area has a significant effect on the performance of the pump.
11.3.2.2.1 The volute area can be modified by cutting or grinding the volute tongue (lip) to increase the
cross-sectional flow area. By increasing this area, the BEP flow point is moved out to the right of the
original point on the performance curve.
y
11.3.2.2.2 Cutting back the tongue (lip) beyond the volute hydraulic limitations can have adverse effects
n nl
on the performance. This is known as “chipping” the volute tongue (lip). Refer to Figure 11.6
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
Figure 11.6 - Methods of Increasing Volute Cross Sectional Area

N m
11.3.3 Impeller Modifications

o
11.3.3.1 Impeller Style

C
Some impellers have different versions that can provide different characteristics of the flow and
differential head or NPSH3. If changing to a different style impeller, sufficient volute side wall clearances
r
should be maintained.
Fo
11.3.3.2 Impeller Diameter
Modifying the diameter of an impeller will change the performance according to the affinity laws. Annex K
provides information for changing the impeller diameter. Trimming the impeller diameter can be done to
an existing impeller. Impellers should not be trimmed below the minimum diameter recommended by the
pump OEM because of increased recirculation or vane bypass which could reduce efficiency and
increase pulsations. Diffuser pumps may require the shrouds to be left at the full diameter and the vanes
trimmed. This is also helpful on volute pumps as well.
104 of 241
11.3.3.3 Impeller Vane Tips
11.3.3.3.1 Impeller Vane Over-Filing
Impeller over-filing is the removal of material from the “upper side” (working side) of an impeller vane tip.
Over-filing can be done to an existing impeller. Resulting minimum vane thickness and depth of filing
should be determined by the OEM. Overfilling can increase efficiency or BEP, but it is not predictable.
y
Because over-filing is done by hand, it can vary slightly from vane to vane. Refer to Figure 11.7
n nl

tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot

Figure 11.7 - Impeller Vane Over-Filing
en al
11.3.3.3.2 Impeller Vane Under-Filing

B
Impeller under-filing is the removal of material from the underside of an impeller vane near the tip. The
rG e
under-filing can be used to increase the head or efficiency at a given flowrate. Head and BEP can both
be moved to the right on the performance curve. Under-filling can also reduce vane pass vibration.
Fo itte
Under-filing can typically be done to an existing impeller. Resulting minimum vane thickness and depth of
filling should be determined by the OEM. Because under-filing is done by hand, it can be inconsistent
from one impeller to another. Refer to Figure 11.7a and 11.7b
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
105 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 11.7a - Impeller Vane Under-filing
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure11.7b – Curve Shape Change for Under-filing
11.3.3.3.3 If over filing or under filing is performed a permanent record of the amount of material removed
and the profile should be documented and placed in the final document package.
11.3.3.4 Number of Vanes
106 of 241
Changing the number of vanes for an impeller can change the pump’s performance curve shape as
shown in Figure 11.8. The Impeller vanes are shown in Figure 11.9. A replacement impeller is required
to change the number of vanes. Changing the number of vanes will change the vane passing frequency.
Increasing the number of vanes results in a flatter curve (possibly not continuous rising curve) from the
BEP flow to the shutoff condition. Reducing the number of vanes results in a steeper curve from the BEP
flow to shutoff condition.
y
Note 1: some curves for impellers with 6+ vanes are “hooked” and can actually have a head decrease
from approximately 15% of BEP to shut-off.
n nl
Note 2: impellers with nine vanes are not uncommon
tio O
Note 3: Even numbers of vanes are sometimes used successfully
bu se
Note 4: Changing the number of vanes could change the hydraulic stability depending on the vane to
diffuser vane or cutwater configuration.
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
DIFFERENTIAL HEAD
er lot
R
BE
ES M
AN U
V G N
Of SIN
en al
E A
CR
IN
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
Figure 11.8 - Showing Curve Shape Change for Increased Vanes

rC
Fo
107 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
Figure 11.9 - Showing Typical Vane Configurations

rG e
11.3.3.5 Impeller Suction Eye Area

Fo itte
11.3.3.5.1 Some pump cases allow for the use of different impellers with differing suction eye areas. The
suction eye area of an impeller is a major factor of the net positive suction head required (NPSH3).
Typically, the larger the eye area, the less the NPSH3.
ot m
11.3.3.5.2 The calculation of the suction specific speed of the impeller is influenced by the suction eye
N m
area. Refer to Figure 11.10.

o
11.3.3.5.3 A replacement impeller is almost always required to change the suction eye characteristics. A
C
reduction of the impeller’s suction eye may be possible with the existing impeller.
11.3.3.5.4 Increasing the impeller’s eye area will increase the suction specific speed and can reduce the
r
allowable operating range. As with any impeller change, thrust calculations should be reviewed.
Fo
108 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
Figure 11.10 - Suction Eye Area Differences
D 01
11.3.3.6 Elimination of a Non-continuous Rise (Hooked) Curve
al 5
Some impellers have a non-continuous rise to shut off performance curve. To change the curve shape
typically requires a different impeller with a lesser number of vanes. Figure 11.11 shows a non-
er lot
continuous rise performance curve. Changing the impeller may not be necessary if the pump is operated
primarily in the sloping portion of the curve.
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 11.11 - Showing a Curve without Continuous Rise (hooked curve)
109 of 241
11.3.3.7 NPSH3
If the NPSHA is not sufficient for the NPSH3, there are several modifications that can reduce the NPSH3,
such as:
a) Reducing the speed of the pump
b) Adding an inducer
y
n nl
c) Increasing the impeller’s suction eye area
tio O
d) Polishing the impeller’s inlet vanes
bu se
11.3.3.8 Inducer
It may be possible to add an inducer to increase the suction head. Figures 11.12 and 11.13 show
tri U
inducers. Typically, adding an inducer requires a pressure casing modification. Inducers typically have a
much smaller pump performance operating range. Inducers are typically found on OH1 or OH2 pumps.
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
Figure 11.12 – Cross Section of a Pump with Inducer

rC
Fo
110 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
Figure 11.13 - Inducer
11.3.4 Improvements to Increase Efficiency
is 0
D 01
11.3.4.1 In addition to efficiency improvements through hydraulic re-designs, efficiency improvements can
be accomplished by mechanical methods such as:
a) reducing running clearances by utilizing non-metallic wear rings or bushings
al 5
b) coating components
er lot
c) surface finish & polishing components
en al
11.3.4.1.1 Non-metallic materials can be used for wear ring(s) and bushing(s) to improve pump efficiency.
B
a) Tighter clearances reduce internal pump recirculation which results in increased efficiency.
rG e
b) If use of non-metallic materials is contemplated, consideration should be given to the properties of the
Fo itte
pumped fluid, the operating conditions, and the method of installation.
c) Other factors, such as distortion and thermal gradients, should be considered to ensure clearances are
ot m
sufficient to provide freedom from seizure under all specified operating conditions
N m
d) Due to the reduced clearances, the thrust load and the effect on the seal’s operation should be reviewed.
o
Refer to 12.2.5 and API 610 for information on applying non-metallic components.
C
11.3.4.1.2 Annex L lists coating components and application methods that can be used to restore the
pump to its original condition, improve the efficiency, or improve the mechanical reliability.
r
Fo
11.3.4.1.3 Surface finish and/or polishing can improve efficiency by reduction of friction losses. Surface
finish can be improved by; polishing, coating or by use of precision casting methods. Especially important
areas are high velocity areas such as volute and impeller passageways.
11.4 Changes to Reduce Hydraulic Disturbances
Hydraulic disturbance issues can be caused by many factors. Each situation needs to be investigated to
determine the potential topic and the resulting possible resolution. Reasons for hydraulic disturbances
include:
111 of 241
a) Gap “A” / Gap “B” for double suction pumps
b) Staggering of the vanes
c) Angle or “V” trimming impeller or volute tips
d) Suction recirculation
y
n nl
e) Cavitation
tio O
f) Number of the vanes
g) Sidewall clearance – either too little or too great
bu se
11.4.1 Gap “A” / Gap “B”
tri U
The gap between the impeller shroud tip and the pressure casing inside diameter (Gap “A”) and the gap
between the impeller’s vane tip and the cut-water (Gap “B”) typically have a significant effect of the
is 0
vibration of the pump. Modification to reduce or eliminate recirculation and hydraulically induced vibration
D 01
can be accomplished by modifications to the Gap “A” and/or Gap “B” dimensions. Gap A and Gap B
changes can require a different impeller, different diffuser, different pressure casing, or modification to the
existing pressure casing.
al 5
Note: a third dimension called “BA” also contributes to vibration. The “BA” dimension is the distance
er lot
between the shrouds.
11.4.1.1 Typically Gap "A" applies to diffuser pumps but can also be applied to other BB designs and
en al
even some OH designs. The desired Gap “A” clearance can be achieved by installing a gap reducing
ring or welding up the stationary portion and / or increasing the impeller shroud diameter. The
B
modification reduces the Gap “A” dimension and directs the flow out of the impeller and into the volute
channel. Refer to Figures 11.14 and 11.15. The Gap “A” dimension should be reviewed to prevent
rG e
rubbing, thrust modifications, and recirculation.

Fo itte
Note: Gap A can also be maintained by not trimming impeller shrouds if vanes are trimmed.
11.4.1.2 Gap "B" applies to both volute and diffuser style pumps. The Gap “B” can be increased to
ot m
reduce the energy level generated by the rotating impeller vane passing the stationary diffuser/volute
tongue (lip). The radial clearance, Gap “B”, between the impeller vane and diffuser vane/volute tongue
N m
(lip) should be in accordance with API 610. Refer to Figures 11.14 and 11.15. An over-file/under-file of
the impeller vanes can be necessary to compensate for any lost head or flow if Gap “B” is increased.
o
rC
Fo
112 of 241

Modified Original
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
Figure 11.14 - Gap A Illustration

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
113 of 241

Modified Original
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 11.15 - Gap A and Gap B

B
11.4.2 Staggering of the impeller vanes can reduce the magnitude of shock impulse as the rotating vane
rG e
passes the stationary volute (cut-water) thus reducing the vane passing vibration. Refer to Figure 11.16
through 11.18. Changing to staggered vanes will require a replacement impeller. A center rib is required
Fo itte
to be able to stagger the vanes. It is not always possible to redesign the impeller to incorporate a center
rib if the shroud-to-shroud dimension is too narrow to accommodate the rib.
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 11.16 – Impeller with Center Rib, Vanes not Staggered
114 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
Figure 11.17 – Impeller with Center Rib and Staggered Vanes
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Figure 11.18 – Impeller Center Rib Cross Section

Fo itte
11.4.3 Impeller vane tips can be cut at an angle instead of straight across to minimize the impact of the
impeller’s tip passing by the cutwater or diffuser tip. Figures 11.19 and 11.20 show this angle cut.
Modifying the vane tips can be done on an existing impeller if the resulting diameter still allows the flow vs
ot m
differential head requirements. The resulting impeller diameter for an angle cut should be as described in
Annex K.
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 11.19 Angle Trimmed Double Figure 11.20 Angle Trimmed Single
Suction Impeller Suction Impeller
11.4.4 Suction Recirculation occurs when at some reduced flowrate, the eye of the impeller becomes too
large for the net flow. Increasing the fluid velocity entering the eye can reduce suction recirculation
cavitation. This can be accomplished by installing a smaller eye impeller or welding an “Eye Reduction”
or “Stall” ring into the impeller eye. This modification will result in an increase in the NPSH3, a reduction
115 of 241
in the suction specific speed, and can increase in the allowable operating range. Adequate NPSH3 to
NPSHA margin should be verified. Refer to Figure 11.21.
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 11.21 - Eye Reduction Ring or Stall Ring
(to reduce Suction Eye Recirculation for Low Flow Application)
en al
11.4.5 Cavitation damage resulting from insufficient NPSHA typically occurs on the suction side of
impeller. The reason for the cavitation (for example: suction obstruction, insufficient vapor pressure
B
margin, stall) should be resolved. However, the cavitation damage can be minimized by material
changes to the impeller. Refer to 10.3.1.1.3 for examples of cavitation damage.
rG e
11.5 Mechanical Changes

Fo itte
11.5.1 General
ot m
Many different mechanical changes to the pump or components are possible. Not all changes listed are
capable of being performed on every pump type.
N m
11.5.2 Impellers
o
11.5.2.1 Impeller upgrades should be considered for:

C
a) Corrosion of original material

r
b) Cracking of vanes or shrouds on double suction impellers

Fo
1. Center rib on a double suction impeller can be needed to provide support to the vanes and
shrouds to prevent cracking
2. Full center ribs are preferred
116 of 241
c) Keyway erosion
d) Loose or cracked impeller wear rings
e) Eroded surfaces
f) Damage caused to impeller vanes at high pressure side by suction or discharge circulation
y
n nl
g) Damage caused to impeller inlet vanes at low pressure (visible sides) by cavitation due of lack of NPSHA
tio O
11.5.2.2 Impeller upgrades should consider:
a) Blind keyway to prevent the pumped fluid from traveling along the length of the key
bu se
b) Integral wear rings for high temperature transients and high speeds
tri U
c) Coating surfaces for abrasive and fouling services
is 0
d) Change material
D 01
e) Radius improvement (stress riser reduction)
al 5
f) Thrust balance holes
er lot
g) Adding center rib and staggered vanes for double suction impeller
h) Angle trim vanes

en al
i) Adding eye reducing ring (stall ring)

B
j) New impeller to meet the condition of service

rG e
11.5.3 Shaft Changes

Fo itte
Shaft changes are typically completed to provide a specific improvement or are required due to
completing other changes that result in a shaft change. Some shaft changes are:
ot m
a) Increased diameters
N m
b) Reduced lengths.
o
c) Staggered impeller keyways for multi-stage pumps

C
d) Stepped shaft OD dimensions at impeller bores for multi-stage pumps

r
Fo
e) Change of material
f) Radius improvement (stress riser reduction)
g) Coatings (hard-facing) on impeller and sleeve fits
h) Change impeller attachment method (change from bolt washer to threads on shaft or from threads on
117 of 241
shaft to shaft shoulder and split ring)
i) Change mounting fit of impeller to shaft for higher quality balance
j) Undercutting shaft in region of proximity probes
k) Burnishing of shaft in region of proximity probes
y
n nl
l) Modifications of shaft ends to accept alternate bearing arrangements
tio O
m) Modifications for seal drive arrangements (such as set screw reliefs or thrust rings)
n) Machine shaft to accept retaining ring on back side of impellers to prevent thrust reversals moving
bu se
impeller
tri U
o) Undercutting shaft under the drive screws of cartridge mechanical seal
11.5.4 Pressure Casing and Inner Casing Changes
is 0
D 01
11.5.4.1 Case and cover gasket sealing fits
11.5.4.1.1 For radially split casings, if the current pump design does not have confined controlled-
al 5
compression gaskets, the case can be modified to a metal-to-metal fit. This conversion will assure proper
compression of the gaskets and provide a significantly better control for perpendicularity of the bearing
er lot
housing mating face to the bore of the pressure casing.
Without shaft modifications, this upgrade will increase the shaft protrusion relative to the discharge nozzle
en al
by the amount of the gap between the case and head. Additional design modifications can be required to
compensate for this conversion.
B
11.5.4.1.2 For horizontal (axially) split style BB2 and BB3 pumps, the casing horizontal split line can be
rG e
improved by providing a crown to increase gasket loading. Figure 11.22 shows this case crowning.
Crowned cases have the upper half of the case machined with a slight taper on a portion of the parting
Fo itte
flange to the outer edge. The “crown” will increase the load on the gasket and casing. When used in
conjunction with higher torque levels it can eliminate parting flange leaks. It is not a practice used
regularly by pump OEMs, but as a fix to a parting flange leakage problem.
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
118 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
Figure 11.22 - Illustration of a Crowned Case

ot m
11.5.4.2 Elimination of threaded case connections

N m
For cases of weldable material, threaded connections should be replaced with socket or butt welded
o
connections in accordance to the auxiliary connection section of API 610. Threaded case connections
can leak or crack from stress fatigue at the threads.
C
11.5.4.3 When adding connections follow welding, inspection, and testing recommendations of 12.4.
r
Fo
11.5.4.3.1 Case drain connections can be added to properly drain cases.

a) Proper drainage will eliminate exposure to process fluids during the handling process as well as stagnant
liquids that can induce corrosion.
b) The number of drain connections depends on the number of chambers in the case, casing thickness,
and the space limitation between the case and the baseplate.
c) Consideration should be given to material weldability as well as erosive and plugging characteristics of
119 of 241
the process fluid.
11.5.4.3.2 Pump temperature equalization connections should be considered if the process fluid
temperature differs by 200ºF (110ºC) or more from the pump’s ambient temperature to reduce or
eliminate misalignment issues.
a) Connection locations will depend on the temperature equalization method.
y
b) Thermal differentials when starting a pump (uneven heating to process temperature) can lead to
n nl
dimensional distortion causing internal rubbing in the wear parts and catastrophic damage to rotor
and/or stator in addition to high material internal stresses.
tio O
c) Additionally, misalignment between the pump case, shaft, driver, and baseplate can occur.
bu se
d) Temperature equalization connections can be any auxiliary casing connections that allow circulation of
process fluid through the pump.
tri U
e) Review and relocation of existing connections for more effective fluid flow can also be required.
is 0
f) Annex Y gives pump temperature equalization procedures and piping guidance.
D 01
11.5.4.4 Modification for Axial Thermal Growth Control
al 5
11.5.4.4.1 For multi-stage BB pumps with operating temperatures above 300 ºF (150 ºC) or below -50 ºF
(-46 ºC), verify that the pump can maintain the pump to driver alignment and distance between shaft ends
er lot
to account for axial thermal growth.
en al
11.5.4.4.2 Methods for controlling thermal growth include but are not limited to:
a) Axial guide blocks for the pump feet
B
b) Keys sliding in slots

rG e
Fo itte
c) Pin in grooves
If these devices are used, the non-drive end pump hold down bolting should allow the pump feet to slide
such as utilizing sleeves for the bolts.
ot m
11.5.4.5 Elimination of Pedestal Cooling

N m
Some pumps have pedestals that are water cooled. In some cases, cooling of the pedestal can be
o
eliminated by determining the effectiveness of the cooling by measuring the changes in the alignment
with and without the cooling.
C
11.5.4.6 Internal leakage between stages

r
Fo
Internal leakage between stages at the horizontal joint can be reduced by:
120 of 241
a) Case crowning with higher strength bolting
b) Surface finish changes at the parting flanges
c) Increasing the stud material strength at the horizontal joints to increase the pre-load
d) Increasing the stud size at specific locations on the casing
y
n nl
e) Modifying gasket material and/or method of cutting gasket
tio O
f) Using a multi-jackbolt tensioning device
11.5.4.7 Casing bolting
bu se
To improve ease of maintenance or improve joint integrity, several bolting options are available such as:
tri U
a) Multi-jackbolt tensioning devices
is 0
b) Hydraulically tensioned studs
D 01
c) Induction heating
al 5
d) Use of disc spring washers
e) Changes in thread profile

er lot
f) Stud and nut material changes
en al
11.5.4.8 Gusseting of auxiliary connections

B
Butt welded connections, size NPS 11/2 (DN 40) and smaller, should be reinforced by using forged
rG e
welding inserts or gussets. If gussets are provided, the piping should be gusseted in two orthogonal
planes to increase the rigidity of the piped connection, in accordance with the following criteria:
Fo itte
a) Gussets should be of a material compatible with the pressure casing and the piping and should be made
of either flat bar with a minimum cross section of 1 in. by 0.125 in. (25.4 mm by 3.2 mm) or round bar
with a minimum diameter of 0.38 in. (9.5 mm).
ot m
b) Gusset design should be as shown in Figure 11.23

N m
c) Gussets should be located at or near the connection end of the piping and fitted to the closest convenient
o
location on the casing to provide maximum rigidity. The long width of gussets made with bar should be
C
perpendicular to the pipe and should be located to avoid interference with the flange bolting or any
maintenance areas on the pump.
r
Fo
d) Gusset welding should meet the fabrication recommendations of 12.1.6, including PWHT (when
required) and inspection.
e) Gussets can also be bolted to the casing if drilling and tapping is done prior to hydrostatic testing.
121 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
Figure 11.23 - Gusset from API 610
bu se
11.5.4.9 Flange Style Changes
tri U
Flanges can be changed to a different rating or different style.
Considerations should be given to:
is 0
a) current attachment method such as:
D 01
1. machined into the component
2. welded al 5
3. integrally cast
er lot
b) flange loading
c) component pressure/temperature rating

en al
d) interchangeability with other equipment

B
e) welding, inspection and testing

rG e
Fo itte
f) bolting accessibility
g) gasket type
ot m
11.5.4.10 To prevent inner bundle sagging of BB5 diffuser pumps, the diffuser to diffuser radial fit or
channel ring can be modified to have a slight interference [typically 0.001” in. (0.025mm)] radial fit which
N m
is concentric with the pump centerline.

o
11.5.5 Bearing Housing Changes

C
11.5.5.1 Bearing isolators

r
11.5.5.1.1 Bearing isolators can be utilized to replace lip seals, single stationary labyrinth seals, or
Fo
deflectors/flingers to reduce oil contamination.
11.5.5.1.2 Bearing isolators can have a rotor and a stator and can be a compound labyrinth type or
magnetic face seals.
11.5.5.1.3 The bearing isolator design depends on the geometrical constraints, lubrication type,
temperature of surrounding components, and operating speed.
122 of 241
11.5.5.2 Bearing housing and support structural stiffness can be increased with 360 degree bearing
housing mounting. Many older design BB2 pumps utilize a semi-circular bearing housing mounting
arrangement.
11.5.5.2.1 The cover can be upgraded or replaced to create a 360 degree mounting arrangement.
11.5.5.2.2 This will provide a stronger support for the bearing housings and reduce the overall vibration
y
levels and shaft deflection. Refer to Figure 11.24 for a bearing housing without 360 degree mounting.
Figure 11.25 has 360 degree mounting.
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 11.24 - Bearing Housing with Semi-Circular Mounting

B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
123 of 241
Bearing Housing
with 360 Degree
Mounting
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
Figure 11.25 - Bearing Housing with 360°

rG e
11.5.5.3 Oil sump collection containers

Fo itte
One way to partially monitor the oil quality is to utilize a transparent oil sump collection device located on
the bottom of the oil sump to collect bearing housing contaminants such as water. The device should be
fitted with a spring loaded drain pet cock. The collector materials of construction should be suitable for
ot m
the lubricant used. Refer to Figure 11.26. For cold weather applications, this device can break due to
water freezing and result in loss of oil in the sump.
N m o
rC
Fo
124 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
Figure 11.26 - Oil Sump
al 5
11.5.5.4 Magnetic oil plugs
A magnetic oil plug can typically be installed in the bearing housing to collect metal particles and prevent
er lot
these particles from getting into the bearings. The magnetic oil plug is mounted on the bottom of the
bearing housing.
en al
11.5.5.5 Bearing Housing Material

B
Cast iron or alloy iron bearing housings can be upgraded to steel to improve:
rG e
a) Reparability
Fo itte
b) Resistance to brittle failure
Typically, if a steel bearing housing is provided it will be in conjunction with either an upgrade as indicated
ot m
in 11.2.3 or changing to a bearing housing with 360 degree mounting as indicated in Figure 11.25.
N m
11.5.5.6 Bearing Housing Cooling changes can be made through several different methods as identified
in 11.5.5.6.1 through 11.5.5.6.6.
o
C
11.5.5.6.1 Eliminating water cooling for bearing housings may be desired due to problems with bearing
housing thermal distortion, fouling of cooling passages, reduction of site water usage, condensation
inside the bearing housing, or long delivery of older style bearing housings.
r
Fo
a) If eliminating water cooling is desired, perform an engineering study to determine if it is feasible. The
amount of cooling necessary and the possible methods to accomplish this cooling should be evaluated.
b) If supplemental cooling is needed after elimination of the cooling water, consider using a combination of
cooling fans, heat sinks, finned bearing housings, oil mist, synthetic oil or product cooling.
11.5.5.6.2 Bearing housing cooling fans

External cooling fans can be employed to reduce operating temperatures of bearing housings. Typically,
they are used in conjunction with finned bearing housings and fan shrouds. The fan channels air flow
125 of 241
across the bearing housing fins and assists with bearing cooling. Refer to the Figures 11.27 through 11.29
for details. Typically, cooling housing fan(s) are added for bearing housings when:
1. cooling water is eliminated

2. the bearing or oil temperature is too high
3. the service has been changed and now cooling is necessary
y
11.5.5.6.2.1 A bearing housing cooling fan should be used for each bearing housing of a pump.
n nl
11.5.5.6.2.2 Some fan and shroud combinations can result in oil being forced or pulled out of the bearing
tio O
housing, leading to a low oil level and possible failure. When adding a cooling fan, a review of the
bearing housing seal design should be completed.
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 11.27 - Bearing Housing Fan

B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
C
Figure 11.28 - Bearing Housing Fan Typical for OH Pumps

r
Fo
126 of 241
Bearing Housing
Cooling Fan
y
n nl
tio O
Figure 11.29 - Bearing Housing Fan Typical for BB Pumps
bu se
11.5.5.6.3 Shaft Heat Sinks
tri U
Shaft Heat Sinks / Shields:
a) To reduce the amount of heat transmitted through the pump shaft to the bearing housing, lubricating oil
is 0
and bearings, a heat sink can be employed.
D 01
b) The heat sink is installed between the mechanical seal and the bearing housing.
al 5
c) The heat sink is attached directly to the shaft, includes integral fins and is typically cast aluminum. Refer
to the Figures 11.30 through 11.32.
er lot
Note: The fins on the heat sink are not as wide as the fins on the bearing housing cooling fan.
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m
Figure 11.30 – Typical Heat Sink

o
rC
Fo
127 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5 Figure 11.31 – Typical Heat Sink Mounting Location
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
HEAT SINK
Figure 11.32 – OH Pump Cross Section with Heat Sink
11.5.5.6.4 Finned Bearing Housings
128 of 241
Finned bearing housings can be installed to provide improved cooling for bearings and lubricants by
providing additional surface area to dissipate the heat. The finned bearing housing can be used in
conjunction with a shaft-driven fan and heat sink.
11.5.5.6.5 Product cooled bearing housing (routing the process fluid through cooling component) can be
considered. Precautions to be considered:
a) Dirty products can plug the cooling passages
y
n nl
b) Product highly flammability or toxicity
tio O
c) The system should adequate for the pressure
bu se
d) Codes for bearing housing material
e) Orifices can be needed to achieve desired flow rate
tri U
f) For pumps with multiple bearing housings run separate lines for each bearing housing in parallel
is 0
g) The system should maintain adequate access for maintenance and operation of the equipment
D 01
11.5.5.6.6 Heat transfer from pump case to bearing housing
al 5
The amount of heat that is transferred from the pump case to the bearing housing can be reduced by
decreasing the surface area of the mounting surface of the bearing housing.
er lot
11.5.6 Lubrication System
en al
11.5.6.1 Non-metallic oil ring upgrades

B
Metallic oil rings, under certain conditions, can produce metallic particles in the oil sump due to an erratic
motion of the oil ring. Some research [20] [21] has shown that non-metallic oil rings can run slower and
rG e
deliver less oil however exhibit a more stable motion during operation as compared to metallic oil rings.
Fo itte
The stable, non-metallic, oil ring can minimize premature rolling element bearing failures by minimizing
metallic particles in the oil.
11.5.6.2 Flingers
ot m
Some research has shown that flingers (slingers) can be used instead of metallic oil rings to minimize the
N m
metallic particles in the oil which can lead to premature bearing failures. Flingers are a disk directly
attached to the shaft and are submerged in the oil. Flingers can be of a rigid or flexible design.
o
C
a) A review of the oil level is recommended to verify that the bearing is not improperly submerged in the
oil that.
b) After installing a flinger, the oil level should initially be monitored as the flinger can force a drop in the
r
oil level.
Fo
c) Conversion to flingers can require modification to the bearing housing to make room for the flinger
and / or to properly distribute the oil.
11.5.6.3 Conventional lubrication method to oil mist / oil purge
To reduce oil contamination and improve oil quality, sump oil lubrication can be converted to oil mist
lubrication. Oil mist lubrication can be either pure (no oil level in the sump) or purge (oil level maintained
in the sump). The type of bearing can determine the oil mist method. The oil mist provides a slight
positive pressure within the bearing housing to minimize ingress of atmospheric contamination. To
ensure that oil mist is practical for the application, a review should be completed for the type of bearings
129 of 241
and the design of the bearing housing. In addition to minimizing contamination, pure oil mist can also
reduce the operating temperature of the bearing. Refer to API 610 application of oil mist.
11.5.6.3.1 Pure oil mist systems are recommended for ball or roller type bearings and cannot be used on
sleeve style bearings. Purge oil mist systems can use additional cooling systems such as fans and
cooling coils and are recommended for sleeve, ball or roller type bearings.
y
11.5.6.3.2 If converting to pure oil mist, consider removing bearing housing cooling coils and plugging
cooling jackets.
n nl
11.5.6.4 Positively pressurized bearing housing
tio O
To reduce oil contamination and improve oil quality, a purge, at a slight positive pressure can be supplied
bu se
into the bearing housing (nitrogen or dry filtered air) to minimize ingress of atmospheric contamination.
To verify that the slight pressurization is practical for the application, a review should be completed. Oil
level should be monitored after adding this upgrade.
tri U
11.5.6.5 Sealed bearing housing
is 0
To reduce oil contamination and improve oil quality, the bearing housing can be converted from an
D 01
atmospheric housing to a sealed bearing housing. Sealed bearing housings utilize components such as
special bearing housing seals, self-equalizing oilers, expansion chambers, and bulls eye style sight
glasses. The proper combination of components should be used to properly provide adequate lubrication
al 5
for a sealed bearing housing.
er lot
11.5.6.6 Right Angle Worm Gear Driven Lube Oil pumps
A right angle worm gear lube oil pump can sometimes be replaced with a pump that is directly coupled in
en al
line with the main pump shaft.

B
11.5.6.7 Oil Properties

rG e
Using a different oil can allow more extreme operating conditions. Changes to consider are the oil type,
Fo itte
oil viscosity, and oil additives.

ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
130 of 241
11.5.6.8 Synthetic oil is used for the following:

a) reduce the oil temperatures in the bearing housing due to the lower coefficient of friction
b) allow operation at a higher temperature where conventional oil is marginal
c) operate at a wider range of temperatures due to the viscosity index
y
d) extend oil change out intervals
n nl
Some synthetic oils are incompatible with bearing housing internal paints or elastomer type components.
tio O
11.5.7 Bearing Life Improvements
bu se
To improve bearing life, a thorough review of the failure modes along with the application and operation is
recommended. There can be different resolutions, and each will have their own recommendations that
tri U
should be reviewed. Resolutions can result in pump components and/or bearing component upgrades.
Possible solutions can range from a simply changing oil viscosity to a complete pump replacement.
Bearing life is dependent upon many items such as the loading, oil viscosity, contamination, temperature.
is 0
Each of these items should be considered to improve bearing life. For rolling element bearings, reviewing
D 01
the L10 calculations can provide guidance (for example, doubling the load on the bearing results in
decreasing the life capability of the bearing by 90%).
al 5
11.5.7.1 Modify Bearing Load
er lot
The bearing load may need to be either decreased or increased depending on the issue. For instance,
on pump styles such as BB1 or BB2 single stage, the thrust load may need to be increased to prevent
rotor shuttling.
en al
11.5.7.1.1 Radial load

B
Typically, the radial loads on a pump are not a major issue and are not common problems. Changes to
rG e
the pump that can alter the radial hydraulic loads are:
Fo itte
a) Style of volutes in the case such as concentric or single vs dual or diffuser
b) Impeller design
ot m
c) Position of operation on the performance curve.

N m
Figure 11.33 shows the comparison of the radial loads for the different types of pumps and with respect to
o
the pump’s flow capability.

rC
Fo
131 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5 Figure 11.33 – Radial Load versus Flow
11.5.7.1.2 Thrust Load

er lot
Hydraulic thrust load (axial load) can be modified by making changes to any of the following items:
en al
a) Wear ring diameter

B
b) Bushing and sleeve combination (center stage, throttle, throat) diameter

rG e
c) Impeller balance holes

Fo itte
d) Balance piston/drum diameter
e) Optimizing impeller positions for multi-stage pumps

ot m
f) Balance line sizing and application

N m
11.5.7.2 Increasing Bearing Load Capability

o
C
11.5.7.2.1 Radial Bearings
11.5.7.2.1.1 Rolling Element Bearings

r
Fo
The radial loading capability of a rolling element bearing can be increased with the following changes:
a) Modify the bearing contact angle
b) Increasing bearing series/size
c) Modifying the stacking arrangement
d) Use different style bearing
132 of 241
11.5.7.2.1.2 Hydrodynamic Bearings
The radial loading capability of a hydrodynamic bearing can be increased with the following changes:
a) Materials (copper backed vs. steel backed)
b) Bearing style, such as:
y
1. Offset pivot
n nl
2. Number of pads
3. Orientation of pads (load on pad or load between pads)
tio O
4. Directed lubrication
c) Evaluating the L/D to increase surface area
bu se
d) Bearing design modifications
tri U
e) Bearing configuration (such as sleeve vs. tilting pad)
is 0
f) Lubrication method (forced lubrication vs flooded lubrication
D 01
11.5.7.2.2 Thrust Bearings
al 5
11.5.7.2.2.1 Rolling Element Bearings
er lot
The thrust loading capability of a rolling element bearing can be increased with the following changes:
a) Modifying the bearing contact angle
en al
b) Increasing bearing series/size

B
c) Modifying the stacking arrangement

rG e
d) Spring loading
Fo itte
e) Using a different style bearing

ot m
11.5.7.2.2.2 Hydrodynamic Bearings:

N m
The thrust loading capability of a hydrodynamic bearing can be increased with the following changes:
a) Materials (copper backed vs. steel backed)
o
C
b) Bearing style, such as:
I. Offset pivot
r
II. Number of pads

Fo
III. Directed lubrication

c) Increasing surface area for the pads
d) Bearing configuration (such as flat land vs. tapered land vs. tilting pad style)
e) Lubrication method (forced lubrication vs flooded lubrication
11.6 Mechanical Seal and Seal System Changes
133 of 241
11.6.1 Mechanical seal and seal system changes should be considered when seal leakage should be
reduced, or the existing seals have proven to be unreliable.
11.6.1.1 Seal and support system modifications should be in accordance with API 682.
11.6.1.2 There are different types of API 682 mechanical seal and seal systems that should be reviewed
with the seal vendor to determine which seal and seal system is best for the application.
y
11.6.1.3 Seal system modifications can include the addition of components such as filtering, cooling,
n nl
heating, or pressure control in the seal chamber.
tio O
11.6.2 Conversion to dual mechanical seal from single mechanical seal
bu se
11.6.2.1 Single mechanical seals can be upgraded to dual mechanical seals (with associated auxiliary
systems) for improved safety, reduction of fugitive emissions, or abrasive applications. Dual mechanical
seals typically require more seal chamber space and auxiliary equipment than single mechanical seals.
tri U
11.6.3 Conversion to mechanical seals from packing can reduce fluid leakage.
is 0
11.6.2.3.1 The mechanical seal system design depends on the conditions of service and dimensional
D 01
constraints.
11.6.3.2 If converting from packing to mechanical seals, consideration should be given to the reduced
al 5
support and resulting effect of shaft deflection on the mechanical seal operation and pump rotor
dynamics.
er lot
11.6.3.3 For BB type pumps a rotor dynamic analysis should be performed prior to this modification. If the
result of the analysis does not show adequate separation margin, consider:
en al
a) Increasing shaft diameter

B
b) Reducing bearing span

rG e
c) Reducing initial running clearances

Fo itte
d) Providing different bearings

ot m
11.6.3.4 If rotor dynamics analysis after implementing all modifications is still showing inadequate
separation margin, it is up to the owner to make a decision on continuing using packing or replacing the
N m
pump.
o
11.6.4 Seal Chamber Modifications (over-boring)

C
11.6.4.1 Modifying the seal chamber dimensions in accordance with API 610 can result in better seal
environment and/or allow installation of an API 682 cartridge seal.
r
Fo
11.6.4.2 API 610 seal chambers result in increased radial and axial clearances that allow more effective
cooling of the mechanical seal faces.
11.6.4.3 If making a change in the seal chamber dimensions, verify that the pressure capability of the seal
chamber is maintained to the pump’s rating.
11.6.4.4 For seal chambers that do not have a venting capability, a small hole should to be provided in
the pump case or seal chamber to allow venting of any gases within the seal chamber.
11.6.4.5 Seal Chamber Upgrades for OH4
134 of 241
A seal chamber modification usually requires a different motor support stand to allow for the removal of
the seal without moving the driver. The different motor stand allows for an increase in the distance
between the motor and the pump shaft ends. The benefits of the seal chamber modification include
enhanced mechanical seal and seal systems.
11.6.5 Component Seal to API 682 Cartridge seal
y
11.6.5.1 Component seal design can be replaced with an API 682 seal to increase seal reliability,
n nl
minimize assembly errors, increase standardization between pumps and reduce time to repair.
tio O
11.6.5.2 As a minimum, the following dimensional constraints should be considered when reviewing this
change:
bu se
a) Seal chamber wall thickness
tri U
b) Bolt circle for the seal gland
c) Seal chamber face to face obstruction such as the bearing seals or step in the shaft
is 0
D 01
d) Shaft end separation between the pump and the driver
11.7 Material Changes

al 5
11.7.1 Material modifications should be considered to improve reliability, repairability, or standardization.
er lot
These modifications should address the existing and the proposed material properties and manufacturing
factors such as; strength, coefficient of thermal expansion, ductility, weldability, hardness, temperature
limitations, compatibility of materials, installation difficulties, dimensional stability, cost and lead time.
en al
Material modifications can be used to correct problems such as:

B
a) corrosion
rG e
b) erosion
Fo itte
c) galling combinations
ot m
d) dry running conditions

N m
11.7.2 Corrosion Control

o
Corrosion control requires materials suitable for the application. Corrosion can be internal or external to
the component. A clear understanding of the corrosion mechanism and the best way to resolve the issue
C
(system or component) is necessary. Owner should consider corrosion testing to determine root cause of
material failure. Corrosion problems can be resolved by using a different base material, liners, or by
r
applying a coating. Refer to Annex L for additional information on coatings.

Fo
11.7.3 Erosion Control
11.7.3.1 Erosion control requires materials suitable for the application. A clear understanding of the
erosion cause is necessary to resolve the issue (system or component). Erosion problems typically can
be mitigated by utilizing a harder material such as a different base material, liner, or by applying a
coating/overlay. Refer to Annex L for additional information on coatings.
135 of 241
The extent of erosion damage is typically dependent on; particle size, particle velocity, impact angle,
temperature, particle hardness, component hardness, particles concentration, length of time and
cavitation/recirculation.
Erosion damage can cause a serious safety hazard such as in Figure 11.34 showing where the product
could leak to the atmosphere via the studs of the pump cover.
y
It is not always prudent to polish out erosion damaged areas as polishing can increase the erosion rate.
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 11.34 - Erosive Wear near Case Studs
en al
11.7.3.2 Cover Swirl Path Elimination

B
In certain pump designs, erosion of the casing / cover near the register fit and gasket groove can occur
due to an open region on the cover. An upgrade can be incorporated by installing a machined ring or an
rG e
anti-rotation tabs welded to the cover to prevent fluid rotation and the resulting erosion.
Fo itte
11.7.4 Galling Situations
11.7.4.1 Galling of Close Clearance Running Parts

ot m
Galling problems due to close running components typically can be resolved by utilizing materials or
N m
coatings of different hardness levels or materials that do not have a galling tendency. If minimizing
clearances is desired, non-metallic materials can possibly be used for items such as wear rings and
o
bushings to prevent galling. Reference API 610 Section on wear rings and running clearances for
C
guidance on materials, clearance recommendations, and hardness levels. Refer to Annex J for galling /
non-galling material combinations.
r
11.7.4.2 Dry Running Situations (Low lubricity pumping fluids)

Fo
Dry running problems are typically caused by loss of liquid flow across product lubricated, close clearance
wear rings and bushings. Dry running problems can be resolved by utilizing a metallic or non-metallic
anti-galling/anti-seizing material. Typically, the non-metallic is a stationary component and the rotating
component is metallic. Non-metallic materials can result in less physical damage compared to metallic to
metallic components if a dry running condition occurs.
When considering non-metallic materials, consideration should be given to the fluid’s properties, the
operating conditions, and the method of installation. Other factors such as distortion and thermal
136 of 241
gradients should be considered. Clearances should be sufficient to provide freedom from seizure under
all specified operating conditions. See Annex N for information on applying non-metallic components.
11.7.4.3 Galling of Close Clearance Fitting Parts
Galling problems due to close fitting components typically can be resolved by hard surface coating one or
more of the fit surfaces or changing to materials that do not have a galling tendency. Refer to Annex J for
y
galling / non-galling material combinations.
n nl
11.7.4.4 Galling of Fasteners
tio O
Galling problems due to bolting typically can be resolved by utilizing an anti-seizure compound
compatible with the materials, process conditions, and the process liquid. Alternately by utilizing a
bu se
greater hardness differential between the bolt / stud and nut or possibly changing the bolting material
completely. Typical galling combinations are the austenitic stainless and high alloy stainless steels.
Refer to Annex J for galling combination information.
tri U
11.7.4.5 Incompatibility
is 0
Components can be incompatible with the process fluid chemistry, temperature, pressure or
D 01
arrangement. A review may be necessary for changing to an alternative material.
11.8 Accessory Changes

al 5
11.8.1 Coupling Changes
er lot
11.8.1.1 The change in coupling overhung moment should be reviewed with regard to rotor dynamics.
Couplings should meet API 610.
en al
11.8.1.2 Lubricated type and elastomeric type couplings can be changed to metal flexible element type
B
couplings to extend maintenance and inspection intervals

rG e
11.8.1.3 Couplings with high balance class (quality) are available to help reduce overall pump and driver
Fo itte
vibration.
11.8.1.4 Reduced moment type couplings can be used to reduce the coupling’s overhung moment.
Reduced moment couplings can be used, or the outside diameter of the coupling hub can be reduced
ot m
based on an engineering review of the power transmitted and shaft diameter.

N m
11.8.1.5 To ease coupling removal, puller holes can be added to the hubs. Use a minimum of 3/8 in.
diameter for the tapped hole in the hub. Two puller holes should be located 180 degrees apart.
o
11.8.1.6 Annex T gives recommendations for keys.

C
11.8.1.7 Couplings may need to be changed to meet new shaft dimensions and/or changes to power
r
transmission (power or torque).

Fo
11.8.2 Exposed Shaft Guard Changes
11.8.2.1 Coupling and shaft guards may need to be upgraded to meet ANSI B11.19 and API 610.
11.8.2.1.1 Additional considerations should include:

a) Avoid using existing bearing housing or seal gland fasteners to secure the guard.
137 of 241
Note: This can add another requirement to the fasteners that they were not intended to perform.
b) Guards that require removal such as for packing adjustment
11.8.2.2 Some guards and fan combinations can change the pressure in the bearing housing and this can
affect the oil level. Provisions should be made to prevent oil from being forced out of the bearing(s).
y
11.8.3 Controls and Instrumentation Changes
n nl
11.8.3.1 Instrumentation for monitoring temperature, pressure, vibration or process conditions should be
tio O
considered as outlined in 11.8.3.2 through 11.8.3.5.
11.8.3.2 Refer to API 610 and API 670 for information regarding the location and methods of installation
bu se
for instrumentation.
tri U
11.8.3.3 Temperature monitoring
11.8.3.3.1 Bearing metal temperature detectors can be installed in hydrodynamic thrust and radial
is 0
bearings to aid in condition monitoring and machinery protection. Such instruments should be installed in
D 01
accordance with API 670.
11.8.3.3.2 Spring loaded, tip sensitive metal temperature detectors contacting the outer ring of rolling
al 5
element bearings can improve condition monitoring and machinery protection.
er lot
11.8.3.3.3 If the bearing metal temperature detectors cannot be installed, consider monitoring the oil
sump or drain temperature.
en al
11.8.3.3.4 Process fluid temperature can be monitored by a temperature detector in a thermowell

exposed to the process fluid. Thermowells should be in accordance with API 614 . This pump auxiliary
B
connection should be in accordance with API 610 section on auxiliary connections.

rG e
11.8.3.4 Pressure Monitoring

Fo itte
11.8.3.4.1 Pump fluid pressure should be monitored by a pressure gauge(s) or transducer(s) exposed to
the process fluid via connections on the pump casing or near the pump location to measure:
a) suction pressure
ot m
b) discharge pressure
N m
c) balance line pressure (for multistage pumps)

o
C
d) seal chamber pressure
Pressure gauges and transducers should be installed with block and bleed valves to facilitate removal
r
and testing.
Fo
11.8.3.5 Vibration Monitoring
Vibration monitoring should be considered. Continuous vibration monitoring components should meet
API 670.
● 11.9 Performance testing after making changes (modifications)
138 of 241
● 11.9.1 If specified, a performance test per API 610 should be performed after a hydraulic modification.
Table 11.1 provides guidance when a performance test is recommended with respect to the different
modifications.
11.9.2 If a performance test is performed, a test curve should be provided in accordance with API 610.
11.9.3 The performance tolerances should be provided by the repair shop prior to the testing for approval.
y
The extent of testing should be based on the repair center's experience level with the type of modification,
n nl
pump model, and criticality of the pump application.
tio O
Detail of Modification Hydraulic Hydraulic
bu se
Performance Performance
Test Test
Recommended Optional
tri U
Volute lip extensions / reductions X
Diffuser replacement X
is 0
"A / B" Gap changes – casing X
D 01
"A / B" Gap changes – impeller X
Impeller(s) replacement – duplicate
spare
al 5 X
Impeller(s) replacement – existing design
(proven design) X
er lot
Impeller(s) replacement – new design
(unproven design) X
en al
Impeller diameter changes > 10% X

Impeller special trims, notching, angle
B
trims X
Impeller over / underfiling X
rG e
Impeller NPSHR reduction X

Fo itte
Impeller suction recirculation

modifications X
Adding an Inducer X
ot m
Rotor – adding or removing stages X

Pump speed change - decrease from
N m
original speed X
Pump speed change - increase from
o
original speed > 10% X

C
Decrease running clearances X

Efficiency Improvements X
r
Fo
Table 11.1 - Hydraulic Performance Testing Matrix
12 Repair Processes and New Component Manufacture
12.1 General
12.1.1 The following procedures and practices are recommended to accommodate the conditions and
considerations unique to centrifugal pumps. Repaired components should be repaired per 12.1 through
12.5 and new components should be supplied as outlined in 12.6. Final data should be recorded.
139 of 241
a) Regardless of the repair method used, adequate methods should be used to verify a sound repair. This
includes witnessing of operations, special inspections, engineering reviews, or special testing.
b) For processes such as welding, flame spraying and plating, a test sample may be utilized to confirm
important characteristics.
12.1.2 Some pumps were not built or maintained to the latest edition of API 610 in every respect or were
y
built to an earlier edition of API 610 and therefore fits, clearances or tolerances can be different than
n nl
those in Annex W or the latest version of API 610. The owner should be contacted with the differences
for decisions.
tio O
12.1.3 Unless otherwise agreed, the repairs or new components should maintain the OEM or
documented revised dimensions, finish or assembly for the components. Changing dimensions can
bu se
affect the assembly dimensions and fits resulting in components that do not properly fit or function. Any
changes in the component’s dimensions should consider the re-assembly requirements. Previous
upgrades or modifications may have been completed which can have different dimensions or finishes.
tri U
12.1.4 Corrosion, Erosion, Pitting, and Rubs
is 0
a) Minor rubs, pitting and corrosion can be removed by polishing after an engineering review to ensure
D 01
components will still meet fit, form and function. Consideration should be given to wall thickness,
dimensional fit, clearance and other critical geometry.
al 5
b) Minor erosion wear can be dressed by polishing.
er lot
c) Major erosion or corrosion wear should be repaired by welding per paragraph 12.1.6 and machined or
blended smooth with the surrounding material.
en al
d) Surface finish of the repaired area should match that of the surrounding area.
B
e) Repair methods should be determined by the Repair Shop and Owner.

rG e
f) Refer to Annex L for information and guidance on coatings and overlays.

Fo itte
12.1.5 The quality assurance/control documents should be supplied by the supplier/repair shop of
manufactured or repaired parts per 10.1.21.1.
ot m
12.1.6 Welding repairs

N m
12.1.6.1 Welding of piping, pressure-containing parts, rotating parts and other highly stressed parts, weld
repairs and any dissimilar-metal welds should be performed and inspected in accordance with ASME
o
BPVC Section VIII. All welding should be performed with qualified procedures per ASME BPVC Section
C
IX requirements. Refer to Annex M and API RP 582 for additional information.
12.1.6.2 The repair shop should be responsible for the review of all repairs and repair welds to ensure
r
that they are properly heat treated and non-destructively tested for soundness and compliance with the
Fo
applicable qualified procedures. Repair welds should be non-destructively tested by the same method
used to detect the original flaw, however, the minimum level of inspection after the repair should be by the
magnetic particle method in accordance with Annex D, for magnetic material and by the liquid penetrant
method in accordance with Annex D, for non-magnetic material.
12.1.6.3 Accessible surfaces of weld repairs should be inspected by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
examination after back chipping or gouging and again after post-weld heat treatment.
140 of 241
12.1.6.4 Quality control of weld repairs identified in the RSWS of 10.9 should be made available to the
owner for review before any repair is made.
12.1.6.5 Pressure containing welds, including welds of the case to axial- and radial-joint flanges, should
be full-penetration welds.
12.1.6.6 Post-weld heat treatment, if required, should be carried out after all welds, including piping
y
welds, have been completed.
n nl
12.1.6.7 Positive Material Identification should be performed on:
tio O
a) all components to be welded to confirm materials of construction. Use of bills of material, material test
reports, or pump data sheets to identify materials of construction alone should not be accepted.
bu se
b) on the weld consumables prior to welding
tri U
12.1.6.8 If it is important to know the carbon content of the base material to develop a proper welding
procedure, a chemical analysis of base material should be performed.
is 0
12.1.6.9 A weld map of all weld repair locations and number of weld passes should be part of the job
D 01
documentation.
12.1.6.10 Pressure containing or rotating components of cast, ductile, or nodular iron components should
al 5
not be welded, brazed, or silver soldered. Non-pressurized component welding should have owner
approval.
er lot
12.1.6.11 After welding is completed, a hydrostatic test should be performed, if recommended, per
12.4.12.
en al
12.1.7 Machining
B
12.1.7.1 If machining is recommended, and the material removed is not restored to the original
rG e
dimension, additional surfaces may need to be machined so that the resulting stack dimensions are
maintained.
Fo itte
12.1.7.2 If machining is recommended, consider other surfaces that need to be machined to improve their
quality.
ot m
12.1.8 Material Identification

N m
12.1.8.1 Positive Material Identification

o
12.1.8.1.1 In addition to the recommendations of 12.1.6, alloy components, including the mechanical seal
C
flange, in contact with the process fluid should be subject to positive material identification (PMI) using
recognized testing methods, instrumentation and standards. Mechanical seal cartridge components
r
generally do not undergo PMI after the cartridge has been assembled.
Fo
12.1.8.1.2 The owner and repair shop should agree on the specific parts tested, procedures used and
acceptance criteria. Only techniques providing quantitative results should be used. Mill test reports,
material composition certificates, visual stamps or markings should not be considered substitutes for PMI
testing of metallic parts.
12.1.8.2 OEM certification is acceptable for non-metallic parts.
12.2 Wear Ring Repairs
141 of 241
12.2.1 General
12.2.1.1 Wear rings can be repaired using one of these methods:

a) Replace worn ring(s). (restore ring mounting surface as needed)
b) Replace either or both the stationary and rotating rings with different material.
y
n nl
c) Skim cut one of the rings to cleanup and make a new mating ring (undersize or oversize as necessary)
to reestablish clearances. If agreed by the repair shop and owner, original wear ring grooving should
tio O
be maintained.
bu se
d) Eliminate integral wear ring by machining impeller and installing a replaceable wear ring
e) Eliminate removable wear ring by removing rotating wear ring, machining and/or weld repairing mounting
tri U
surface, hard facing repaired surface and replacing stationary wear ring.
is 0
f) Repair an existing integral wear ring by machining and re-applying hard facing or by machining weld
build-up and reapplying hard facing.
D 01
Note 1: Generally, repairing a wear ring is not practical except for skim cutting.
al 5
Note 2: Changing wear ring dimensions can affect spare parts interchangeability.
er lot
Note 3: Changing wear ring dimensions can affect thrust loading.
en al
Note 4: Stationary wear rings are typically referred to as “Case Rings”

B
12.2.1.2 Metallic stationary wear ring to case or cover fits should be in accordance with Annex W.
12.2.1.3 Impeller metallic wear ring to impeller fits should be in accordance with Annex W.
rG e
Fo itte
12.2.1.4 Metallic wear ring differential hardness should be per API Standard 610.
12.2.1.5 New wear ring clearances should be per API Standard 610 unless different clearances have
been specified in the OEM instruction manual. The acceptable wear ring clearances for a repair are given
ot m
in 10.3.2.2.
N m
12.2.2 Wear Ring Installation

o
12.2.2.1 Preparation for Installation

C
12.2.2.1.1 Verify that all components are clean, free of burrs, have been completely inspected, repaired
and ready for assembly. Verify that all measurements of the components have been taken, recorded and
r
are acceptable.
Fo
12.2.2.1.2 The proper method for installing the wear rings is dependent on wear ring and impeller
materials.
12.2.2.2 Metallic Wear Ring Installation
12.2.2.2.1 Metallic wear rings will typically have an interference fit as identified in Annex W. To install the
wear ring, the wear ring may need to be heated (for example to install on an impeller) or chilled (for
example to install into a pump case). Heating or chilling should be even to avoid wear ring distortion.
142 of 241
Using a flame torch for heating is not recommended as uneven heating can occur causing damage to the
component.
12.2.2.2.2 Heating of components:
a) For components that require heating, such as impeller wear rings, place the wear ring in an oven and
heat until the recommended temperature for sufficient expansion has been reached.
y
n nl
Note 1: Typically 400 °F (204 °C) for ferrous material and typically 300 °F (149 °C) for non-ferrous
materials.
tio O
Note 2: Use proper PPE (gloves).
bu se
b) Periodically measure the temperature until the recommended temperature has been achieved.
tri U
c) Verification of the expanding diameter using a “go-no-go” measuring device is beneficial to ensure
sufficient expansion for installation.
is 0
d) After the installed wear ring has cooled, tap the wear ring face to verify the wear ring is fully seated and
D 01
square.
al 5
12.2.2.2.3 Chilling of components:
a) For components that require chilling, such as case wear rings, place the wear ring in a container and
er lot
apply liquid nitrogen or dry ice.
en al
b) Chill the component until the recommended contraction has been reached. Utilize proper PPE.
B
Note: Typically, 5 minutes will allow the contraction to sufficiently occur, but this can vary based on
component geometry.

rG e
Fo itte
c) Verification of the contraction of the diameter using a “go/no-go” measuring device is beneficial to ensure
sufficient contraction for installation.
d) After the installed wear ring has warmed, tap the wear ring face to verify the face is seated squarely.
ot m
Note: Materials such as cast iron, ductile iron or ni-resist can be damaged during chilling as they can be
N m
dimensionally unstable at the cold temperatures.

o
12.2.2.2.4 Install setscrews, pins or tack welding per 12.2.3.

C
12.2.2.2.5 Once the impeller wear rings have been installed and the setscrews, pins or tack welding have
been installed per 12.2.2.2.4, place the impeller in a lathe, setting up on the bore of the impeller. Measure
r
and record impeller wear rings diameter and the runout. Trim the wear ring diameter to the required
Fo
dimension and/or to correct for runout. Grinding may be necessary for hardened wear rings in lieu of
machining.
NOTE: Typically, wear rings have additional material so that trimming the wear ring can occur without
jeopardizing the wear ring clearance.
12.2.2.2.6 Balance the impeller with the wear rings installed to 13.2
12.2.2.3 Non-Metallic Wear Ring Installation
143 of 241
12.2.2.3.1 There are many different types, compositions and configurations of non-metallic wear rings
and bushings used in centrifugal pumps. The properties of non-metallic materials vary with the different
materials and can vary from vendor to vendor for similar products. The vendor of the non-metallic
material should be consulted for current information on the application, design, installation and use of
their non-metallic components. In some instances, metallic holders are used to hold the non-metallic
component into the pump component.
y
12.2.2.3.2 Annex N provides information on the use and installation of non-metallic components.
n nl
12.2.3 Wear Ring Attachment
tio O
12.2.3.1 General
bu se
12.2.3.1.1 Metallic wear rings (stationary or rotating), other than floating stationary style wear rings,
should be held in place by an interference fit with either solid pins, screws, keys or tack welding.
tri U
a) Floating stationary style wear rings do not utilize an interference fit into the pressure casing and typically
only have a solid anti-rotation pin.
is 0
D 01
b) Non-metallic wear rings should be attached per the recommendations described in Annex N.
c) The method of attachment of the wear ring to the case or impeller is influenced by:
1.
al 5
wear ring material, hardness and dimensions
er lot
2. case or impeller material and hardness
3. fluid properties such as abrasives, corrosives, viscosity or temperature
4. operating pressures
en al
5. differential pressures between stages

6. operating speed
B
7. experience of the OEM, repair shop and owner

rG e
Note: Axial pins or keys are typically used when the wear rings are hard (> 38 RC) with low ductility or
hardened wear rings that are subject to stress corrosion cracking.
Fo itte
12.2.3.1.2 Tack welds, screws, keys or solid pins should be equally spaced around the periphery of the
wear ring. Typically, if flat headed screws are used, the screw is placed axially on the stationary ring and
ot m
only one is used.

N m
12.2.3.1.3 The material for tack welding, screws or solid pins should be compatible with the component’s
materials and the pumped fluid’s properties.
o
12.2.3.2 Tack welding

C
12.2.3.2.1 Tack welding should be in accordance with 12.2.3.2.2 through 12.2.3.2.12, ASME BPVC
r
Section IX, and Figure 12.1.

Fo
144 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
Figure 12.1 - Tack Welds for Case and Impeller Rings
D 01
12.2.3.2.2 If the radial thickness of the wear ring is > 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) and the wear ring does not extend
past the impeller, case or cover surface, then the width of the weld groove should be shared equally to
al 5
either side of the wear ring and case, cover or impeller surface split line. See Figure 12.1 option 1.
er lot
12.2.3.2.3 If the radial thickness of the wear ring is <0.25 in. (6.4 mm) and the wear ring does not extend
past the impeller, case or cover surface, then the weld groove should be located only in the case or cover
to prevent potential cracking of the ring. See Figure 12.1 option 2.
en al
12.2.3.2.4 If the wear ring extends beyond the surface of the impeller, case or cover, a 0.125 in (3.2 mm)
B
fillet weld is employed. This method is used regardless of the ring thickness and requires no weld or
groove preparation. See Figure 12.1 option 3.
rG e
Fo itte
12.2.3.2.5 Welding should not be used on wear rings, pressure casings or impellers that are constructed
of cast, ductile or nodular iron.
12.2.3.2.6 Coated wear rings can be tack welded, however improper heat input can cause failure of the
ot m
coating.
N m
12.2.3.2.7 Tack welding of the wear ring to the case or impeller should not be done if the wear ring’s base
material hardness exceeds Rc 45 due to probability of cracking the wear ring. For this situation, the wear
o
ring attachment should be screws or pins.

C
12.2.3.2.8 Wear ring tack welds should be inspected visually and with Magnetic Particle Inspection.
r
12.2.3.2.9 The minimum number of tack welds should be per Table 12.1
Fo
Table 12.1 – Number of Wear Ring Tack Welds
Minimum Number of
Impeller Wear Ring ID:
Tack Welds:
< 8.500 in. (216 mm) 3
>8.500 to 14 in.
6
(216 to 356 mm)
145 of 241
>14 in. (356 mm) Engineering Review

All Case / Cover Wear Rings 3
12.2.3.2.10 The tack weld minimum length should be 3/8 in. (9.5 mm). Distortion of components could
result if the length of the tack weld is excessive.
12.2.3.2.11 Any cosmetic blending of the tack weld should not produce a weld smaller than the size
y
specified.
n nl
12.2.3.2.12 The tack weld material and welding procedure should be compatible with the components.
tio O
12.2.3.3 Axially placed screws or solid pins
bu se
12.2.3.3.1 Wear ring attachment using axially placed screws or solid pins should be in accordance with
12.2.3.3.2 through 12.2.3.3.10. Screws can be either hexagonal head setscrews, slotted head setscrews
or flat headed screws.
tri U
12.2.3.3.2 The material for screws or solid pins is typically 316 SS unless another material is
is 0
recommended due to the pumped fluid’s properties.
D 01
12.2.3.3.3 Axial setscrews use ¼-20 UNC x 3/8 in. (M6x10 mm) long minimum.
al 5
12.2.3.3.4 Axial solid pin diameter is typically 0.1875 in. (4.8 mm) and a length of 0.5 in. (12.7 mm long).
12.2.3.3.5 The minimum number of axial screws or solid pins should be per Table 12.2.
er lot
Table 12.2 – Number of Wear Ring Screw or Pins
en al
Minimum number
B
Ring Outside Diameter (OD) of setscrews or

locking pins
rG e
< 10.00 in. (254 mm) 3

>10.00 to 16.00 in. (254 to 406 mm) 4
Fo itte
>16.00 in. (406 mm) 6
12.2.3.3.6 The material near the end of each solid pin should be either staked with a punch or partially
ot m
welding at the face to prevent the pin from loosening. Setscrews should be staked.
N m
12.2.3.3.7 Screws or solid pins axially placed should be flush with the face and should not extend into the
impeller flow passage.
o
12.2.3.3.8 Axial placed screws or solid pins should be equally spaced on the screw or solid pin diameter
C
into the wear ring and the base material as shown in Figure 12.2
r
Fo
146 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Figure 12.2 Set Screw Location

Fo itte
12.2.3.3.9 Slotted headed screws should be recessed into the two components so that the head is flush
with their face. The slotted head should be turned away from alignment with the ring/impeller or case
interface as shown in Figure 12.3a
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 12.3a - Set Screw Example
147 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
Figure 12.3b - Axial Pin Example
is 0
D 01
12.2.3.3.10 After installation of the screws or solid pins, inspect wear ring surface for any high spots.
High Spots greater than 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) need to be corrected by machining or dressing the area.
al 5
12.2.3.4 Radial screws installed through the rotating wear ring (typically not used)
er lot
12.2.3.4.1 If approved by the owner, wear ring attachment using radially placed screws should be in
accordance with 12.2.3.4.2 through 12.2.3.4.5. Screws can be either setscrews or screws requiring the
en al
heads to be removed after installation.

B
12.2.3.4.2 The diameter of the holes is not to be more than one-third the width of the wear ring to prevent
cracking of the wear ring. The radial screws should be installed in accordance with Figure 12.4. If screws
rG e
protrude beyond the wear ring outside diameter, the heads should be cut off after installation per
12.2.3.4.4 and blended with the curvature of the wear ring.
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 12.4 – Radial Set Screw Holes
12.2.3.4.3 The number of screws should be per Table 12.3
148 of 241
Table 12.3 - Number of Radial Screws for Ring Retention
Ring Outside Ring Outside

Diameter Diameter Quantity Size of
of Screws (UNF
Screws thread)
y
(in) (mm)
n nl
Up to 6.5 Up to 165 3 1/4 - 28
>6.5 to 10 165 to 254.0 6 1/4 - 28
tio O
>10 to 15 >254 to 381 6 5/16 -18
>15 >381 6 3/8 - 24
bu se
12.2.3.4.4 The screw should be recessed at or slightly below the wear ring surface OD.
tri U
12.2.3.4.5 Screws should be locked in place by staking and should not extend into the impeller flow
passage.
is 0
D 01
12.2.3.5 Key and Slot
12.2.3.5.1 If approved by the owner, a key and slot arrangement can be used for wear ring anti-rotation.
al 5
12.2.3.5.2 Three keys should be installed 120 degrees apart.
er lot
12.2.3.5.3 The key should be welded to the major component, (such as the case), not the wear ring.
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 12.5a -Key and Slot Wear Figure 12.5b -Key and Slot Wear
Ring Anti-rotation Suction Ring Ring Anti-rotation Cover Ring
Example Example
12.2.4 Integral Wear Ring Repair (no renewable wear ring)
12.2.4.1 Impellers or pump components with integral wear rings can be either repaired to maintain the
integral wear ring or converted to include a renewable wear ring. The integral wear ring may or may not
have a coating.
149 of 241
12.2.4.1.1 Maintaining as an integral wear ring
To repair the integral wear ring (maintaining as an integral wear ring) perform the following steps:
a) Undercut the entire wear ring area(s) sufficient for building back up with weld.
b) If the integral ring had rubbed; verify the hardness, after machining, to confirm all affected material has
been removed. Review for correcting situation.
y
n nl
c) Ferromagnetic impellers should be wet magnetic particle inspected and non-ferromagnetic impellers
should be liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21
tio O
d) Weld buildup as recommended and perform stress relieving as recommended
bu se
e) Machine and/or grind as necessary (consider dimensions if coating should be applied)
tri U
f) A thermal spray or other coating (hardfacing) should be considered. See Annex L for coating and overlay
information.
is 0
g) Machine or grind ring area to the finished dimension and surface finish.
D 01
h) Perform dimensional measurements and runouts.
i) Perform NDT
al 5
er lot
j) Balance impeller per 13.2.1.
en al
k) Measure and record for magnetism and degauss to the values in Table 10.4.
B
12.2.4.1.2 Converting from an integral wear ring to a renewable wear ring

rG e
To repair the integral wear ring by converting to a renewable wear ring, determine the thickness of the
renewable wear ring and then determine if sufficient material will remain on the impeller or pump
Fo itte
component. If the review is acceptable for converting to a renewable wear ring, perform the following
steps:
a) Undercut the entire wear ring area(s) for a renewable wear ring.
ot m
b) If the integral ring had rubbed; verify the hardness, after machining, to confirm all affected material has
N m
been removed. Review for correcting situation.

o
c) Ferromagnetic impellers should be wet magnetic particle inspected and non-ferromagnetic impellers
rC
Fo
150 of 241
should be liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21.
d) Weld buildup as recommended and perform stress relieving as recommended
e) Machine or grind area to the finished dimension and surface finish.
f) Perform dimensional measurements and runouts.
y
n nl
g) NDT
tio O
h) Balance impeller per 13.2.1.
i) Measure and record for magnetism and degauss to the values in Table 10.4.
bu se
12.2.5 Non-Metallic (Composite) Components (typically wear rings and bushings)
tri U
12.2.5.1 Non-metallic components are typically not repairable and are replaced.
is 0
12.2.5.2 Annex N provides information on the use and installation of non-metallic components.
D 01
12.2.5.3 There are many different types, compositions and configurations of non-metallic wear rings and
bushings used in centrifugal pumps. The properties of non-metallic materials vary with the different
al 5
materials and can vary from vendor to vendor for similar products. The vendor of the non-metallic
material should be consulted for current information on the application, design, installation and use of
er lot
their non-metallic components. In some instances, metallic holders can be used to hold the non-metallic
component into the pump component.
en al
12.3 Rotating Assembly Component Repairs

B
12.3.1 General
rG e
12.3.1.1 Machining should only be considered as a repair after an engineering review.

Fo itte
12.3.1.2 The tolerances and dimensions should be as specified in Annex W and the appropriate
dimensional inspection criteria.
ot m
12.3.1.3 In order to minimize distortion problems in the final assembly, components having a straight,
continuous bore and a bore length-to-diameter ratio of 0.75 or greater without a center relief should have
N m
an engineering review. This engineering review should determine the justification and criteria to
incorporate a center relief and land fit concept on each end of the bore.
o
C
12.3.2 Shaft
12.3.2.1 Shafts should be repaired using the processes as outlined in 12.3.2.5 through 12.3.2.10 and API
r
RP 687.
Fo
12.3.2.2 Repairs to shafts can be recommended due to:

a) Out of tolerance condition
b) Dimensional requirements
12.3.2.3 Repairs to shafts can be recommended for areas such as:

a) Shaft surface damage at bearing journals, O-ring locations, or land areas underneath impeller, sleeve,
151 of 241
and thrust collar
b) Shoulders
c) Threads
12.3.2.4 If cracks in the shaft are present, the shaft should be replaced.
y
n nl
12.3.2.5 Damaged or worn shaft surfaces should be repaired by one of the following processes. Refer to
Annex L for information on these processes.
tio O
a) The High Velocity Oxygen Fuel (HVOF) Process.
bu se
b) The High Velocity Liquid Fuel (HVLF) Process.
c) The Intermittent Combustion Process.
tri U
d) Laser Deposition
is 0
12.3.2.5.1 The thermal spray or laser deposition repair procedure typically consists of:
D 01
a) Undersize the outside diameter and record dimensions.
al 5
b) Perform NDT.
er lot
c) Apply the coating/laser deposition.
en al
d) Machine outside diameter.

B
e) Repeat step b above.

rG e
f) Grind shaft diameter. Refer to grinding recommendations in Annex L.

Fo itte
g) Perform dimensional and runout measurements.
12.3.2.5.2 Thermal spray or laser deposition should not be applied to areas as follows:
ot m
a) Surface under shaft proximity probes.

N m
b) Surface under setscrews such as for mechanical seal drive collars

o
c) Surfaces with keyways

C
12.3.2.6 If approved, shafts can be repaired using Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG) or Submerged Arc Welding
(SAW) Processes. Welding of shafts is a critical process and should be carefully reviewed.
r
Fo
12.3.2.6.1 Welding repairs of shafts should be per 12.1.6 and API RP 687 Chapter 0, Annex G.2.
● 12.3.2.7 If approved, the shaft can be repaired by plating, metalizing, plasma spray, sleeving or
straightening.
a) If any of these techniques are utilized, the details of the process should be approved by the Owner.
b) Annex L outlines problems that can be encountered by using these repair techniques.
c) Plating, metallizing, and plasma spray have typically been replaced by the methods identified in 12.3.2.5.
152 of 241
d) Sleeving is not a common repair for a pump shaft.
12.3.2.7.1 Repair by plating, metallizing or plasma spray should not be applied to areas as follows:
a) Surface under shaft proximity probes.
b) Surface under setscrews (e.g. mechanical seal drive collars).
y
c) Surface under a rolling element bearing or drive coupling.
n nl
Experience shows that plating can come off when “pulling” coupling hubs and/or rolling element
tio O
bearings.
bu se
● 12.3.2.7.2 If approved, the shaft can be repaired by straightening per API RP 687 Chapter 1, Annex E.3
with approval of the procedure and acceptance criteria by the Owner.
a) The straightness of the shaft should be verified 48 hours after straightening and any stress relieving.
tri U
b) There are many different techniques applied by repair shops such as vertical hanging, mechanical
is 0
forcing or heating of the shaft.
D 01
c) The pros and cons of each method should be reviewed.
al 5
d) All shaft TIRs should be measured and recorded with the shaft in V-blocks at the bearing areas per
Annex E.
er lot
e) Stress relieving at a temperature higher than the operating temperature can increase the likelihood of
shafts remaining straight in operation.
en al
f) Shaft straightening provides inherent risks of the shaft returning back to the bent state, especially for
B
elevated temperature or cryogenic applications.

rG e
12.3.2.8 The repaired shaft surface finish should be a maximum of the values identified in Annex W.
Fo itte
12.3.2.9 Thread repair

a) Minor thread damage such as distortion should be repaired by gently straightening the thread and
ot m
dressing up with a file.

N m
b) The repaired threads should be verified by using the component that should be threaded onto the
threaded location.
o
c) Shafts with major thread damage such as from galling, missing threads, torn or ruptured surfaces or
C
cracks should be replaced.

r
● 12.3.2.9.1 If approved, shafts with thread damage can be repaired by machining down and welding as
Fo
identified in 12.4.2.3 and in accordance with 12.1.6. The shaft is typically replaced when threads have
major damage
12.3.2.10 Shoulders can be repaired by machining. However, this can cause an axial locating problem.
Additional compensation for the metal removal can be necessary.
153 of 241
a) A radius at the corner is recommended to reduce stresses.
b) Verify that any mating part to the shoulder does not interfere with the corner radius.
12.3.2.11 Proximity Probe Target Area Runouts
12.3.2.11.1 Sensing areas to be observed by radial proximity probes should be concentric with the bearing
y
journals.
n nl
12.3.2.11.2 All shaft proximity probe target areas (both radial vibration and axial position) should be free
tio O
from discontinuities, for a minimum of one probe-tip diameter on each side of the proximity probe.
12.3.2.11.3 These proximity probe target areas should not be metallized or plated.
bu se
12.3.2.11.4 Annex W provides recommendations for the surface finish for proximity probe target areas.
tri U
This surface finish is preferably obtained by honing or burnishing.
12.3.2.11.5 The proximity probe target areas should be properly demagnetized to the levels specified in
is 0
Table 10.4
D 01
12.3.2.11.6 Electrical and mechanical runouts of each proximity probe target area should be measured and
continuously recorded, and phase-referenced as recommended in Annex E.4.
al 5
12.3.2.11.7 For areas to be observed by the radial vibration proximity probes, the combined total electrical
er lot
and mechanical runout should not exceed the value from equation (12) or 0.25 mil (0.006 mm) whichever
is greater.
en al
In USC units:
B
R = 0.25 x (8000/N)0.5 (12a)
In SI units:
rG e
R = 0.25 x (5.2 x 106/N)0.5 (12b)

Fo itte
Where:
N = maximum continuous speed, rpm
ot m
And
N m
R = allowable runout, mil / μm

o
12.3.2.11.8 For areas to be observed by the axial position proximity probes, the combined total electrical
C
and mechanical runout should not exceed the value of 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm).
12.3.2.11.9 If all reasonable efforts fail to achieve the limits noted in 12.3.2.11.7, the repair shop and the
r
Fo
owner should agree on alternate acceptance criteria.
12.3.3 Impellers
12.3.3.1 General
12.3.3.1.2 Impeller keyways can be repaired by machining the impeller and shaft keyways larger and
making a new key; or weld repair the bore as identified in 12.3.3.2.2.1 and in accordance with 12.1.6. An
engineering evaluation should be performed prior to enlarging keyways. Refer to Annex T for keyway
radius and key chamfer recommendations.
154 of 241
12.3.3.2 Impeller Bore
12.3.3.2.1 Impeller bores should be repaired using the repair methods outlined in 12.3.3.2.2.1 to
12.3.3.2.2.3 to the recommendations in Annex W.
12.3.3.2.2 Unless approved by the owner, chrome or nickel plating should not be used as a repair method
y
for impeller bore buildup due to the differences in the coefficients of thermal expansion and bore dilation.
n nl
12.3.3.2.2.1 Impeller bores can be repaired by the welding process outlined in API RP 687 Chapter 0,
Annex G.2 using an owner approved procedure.
tio O
a) Repairing the bore by welding can cause distortion. If so, the impeller wear ring areas should be
repaired per 12.3.
bu se
b) Repair procedure should include the following steps:
tri U
1. Record angular position of keyways relative to a discharge vane and mark location on impeller
backplate.
is 0
2. Radius all keyway(s) corners and chamfer the sides of the keyway(s) prior to welding.
D 01
3. Weld up keyways and impeller bores as necessary.
4. Machine repaired areas.
5. Repaired impeller bores should have a maximum surface finish as noted in W.2
al 5
6. Repaired impeller keyways should have a maximum surface finish per Annex W.2
7. Ferromagnetic impellers should be inspected by MT and non-ferromagnetic impellers should be
er lot
liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21.
8. Record impeller dimensions and runouts.
9. Balance impeller per 13.2.1.
en al
12.3.3.2.2.2 Thermal Spray Repair

B
a) Impeller bores can be repaired by using the thermal spray techniques outlined in Annex L.
rG e
b) Thermal spray coating an impeller should consider:

Fo itte
1. Deformation as a result of assembly interference, and expansion during assembly or normal

operation
ot m
2. The angle of the applicator device used in the thermal spray process to build up the impeller bore
should be within the limits recommended by the process licensor. This can preclude thermal
spraying impeller bores that have relatively small bores with long lengths.
N m
c) A minimum amount of material should be removed to achieve the finished coating thickness per Table
o
L.1, for the technique used.

C
d) The procedure should include the following steps:

r
1. Oversize the bore and record dimensions

Fo
2. Ferromagnetic impellers should be wet magnetic particle inspected and non-ferromagnetic

impellers should be liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21.
3. Blank off the keyway area(s) and apply the thermal spray coating.
4. Machine the bore(s).
5. Chamfer keyway location (to prevent edge chipping)
6. Repeat step 2 above.
7. Perform dimensional measurements and runouts.
8. Balance impeller per 13.2.1.
155 of 241
● 12.3.3.2.2.3 If specified, bore out the impeller oversize and manufacture a new oversize shaft. For
assembly and disassembly purposes on multistage rotors it can be necessary to perform this task on all
the impellers.
12.3.3.3 Vane Repair
12.3.3.3.1 General
y
12.3.3.3.1.1 Minor cracking and/or mechanical damage to impeller vane can be blended out by grinding
n nl
to a maximum of approximately 10% of the vane thickness. The grinding of these indications is
dependent on the impeller geometry, operating stresses, and type of construction. Any grinding beyond
tio O
the defined limits should have an engineering review.
bu se
12.3.3.3.2 Vane Repair by Welding
12.3.3.3.2.1 Impeller vanes can be repaired by welding process outlined in 12.1.6 and API RP 687
tri U
Chapter 0, Annex G using a procedure approved by the owner. All welding should be performed with
qualified procedures per ASME BPVC Section IX. Successful vane weld repair is highly dependent on
impeller geometry (such as thin cross sections), material selection, and construction. The repair
is 0
procedure should be in accordance with a) through k).
D 01
a) Remove damaged area by grinding or machining to prepare the weld joint geometry.
al 5
b) NDT weld preparation: ferromagnetic impellers should be wet magnetic particle inspected and non-
ferromagnetic impellers should be liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21.
er lot
c) Repair weld
en al
d) Blend welded area to proper profile and surface finish.

B
e) NDT weld: Ferromagnetic impellers should be wet magnetic particle inspected and non-ferromagnetic
impellers should be liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21.
rG e
Fo itte
f) Parent material and weld hardness should be determined and recorded per Annex D.5 and D.6.
g) Record impeller dimensions and runouts.

ot m
h) Ferromagnetic impellers should be wet magnetic particle inspected and non-ferromagnetic impellers
should be liquid penetrant inspected per 10.1.21.
N m
i) Balance impeller per 13.2.1.

o
C
12.3.3.3.2.2 If cracks are present in cast, nodular, ductile iron or leaded bronze impellers the cracks can
be ground and blended not to exceed a depth of 0.010 in (0.25 mm), otherwise the impeller should be
scrapped.
r
Fo
12.3.3.4 Any trimming of impellers should be done per Annex K.
12.3.4 Bushings, Sleeves, or Balance Drums can be repaired using one of the following methods:
156 of 241
a) Replace
b) Replace with different material per section 11
c) Coating of the part and machining
d) Welding of the part per paragraph 12.1.6 and machining.
y
n nl
e) Machining one of the parts to cleanup and making a new mating part (undersize or oversize) to
reestablish clearances.
tio O
12.3.4.1 Generally repairing a bushing, sleeve or balance drum is not practical except for skim cutting.
Changing dimensions can affect spare parts interchangeability. Changing dimensions can affect thrust
bu se
loading.
tri U
12.3.5 Locknuts should not be repaired. Replace if damaged.
12.3.6 Damaged thrust collars should be replaced.
is 0
D 01
12.3.6.1 If the thrust collar has sufficient remaining thickness, the surfaces of the faces can be either
ground or lapped to remove minor imperfections.
al 5
12.3.6.2 An engineering review may be necessary to determine the recommended thickness of the thrust
collar.
er lot
12.3.6.3 Damage to the thrust collar bore can be repaired by oversizing the shaft, if practical, otherwise,
replace.
en al
12.3.7 Keys and Keyway Repairs

B
12.3.7.1 Repaired keyways and replacement keys should comply with Annex T.
rG e
12.3.7.2 Keyways are typically repaired by:

Fo itte
a) Replacing the shaft
b) Increasing the size of the keyway (and key) [with engineering review]
ot m
c) Cutting an additional keyway in a different angle at the same position on the shaft (with engineering
N m
approval)
o
12.3.7.3 In general keys are not repaired but replaced and should be the same material and properties as
C
the shaft. Keys can be filed to remove high spots/burrs. Coupling keys should be stepped and crowned
so that all keyway void is filled.
r
12.4 Stationary Component Repairs

Fo
12.4.1 General
12.4.1.1 Components should meet Annex W. If the component exceeds the standard, it should be
repaired or replaced to re-establish the recommendations in Annex W.
12.4.1.2 Parts should be brought back to standard dimensions or finish unless approved by the owner.
See 12.1.3
12.4.2 Register Fits, Concentricity and Perpendicularity
157 of 241
12.4.2.1 Register fit, concentricity and perpendicularity can be repaired by using one of the methods
identified in 12.4.2.2 to 12.4.2.7.
12.4.2.2 Non-weldable materials such as cast and ductile iron should be repaired using one of the
following methods to obtain the proper fit or concentricity:
a) Machine one part to clean up and rework the mating part as necessary.
y
n nl
b) Machine the part(s) and reclaim the fit(s) using an insert that is mechanically locked in position.
tio O
c) Insert metallurgy should be suitable for the process and parent metal.
bu se
d) Machine part(s), coat the machined part per Annex L, and machine to size.
12.4.2.3 Weldable materials should be repaired using one of the following methods to obtain the proper fit
tri U
or concentricity:
a) Machine part(s), weld the machined part(s) per 12.1.6, and re-machine to size according to 12.1.7.
is 0
D 01
b) Machine part(s), coat the machined part per Annex L and machine to size according to 12.1.7
c) Machine one part to clean up damaged area and rework the mating part by machining, welding per
al 5
12.1.6 and machining to appropriate size in accordance with 12.1.7.
er lot
d) Machine one part to clean up damaged area and rework the mating part by machining, coating per Annex
L, and machine to appropriate size
en al
e) Machine the part(s) and reclaim the fit(s) with an insert that is held in position either by mechanically
locking or welding per 12.1.6 and machine to size in accordance with 12.1.7. Insert metallurgy should
B
be suitable for the process and parent metal.

rG e
f) Line boring the case by over sizing the bores and leaving at oversized dimensions (owner approval)
Fo itte
g) Line boring the case by oversizing the bores, rewelding and then re-machining to the original dimensions.
The mating flanges can also need machining, welding, and re-machining due to the possibility of
distortion from the welding of the fit locations.
ot m
12.4.2.4 When restoring the internal dimensions by line boring the case, the split line should be shimmed
N m
(if a gasket is used during final assembly) to the recommended gasket thickness (including compression).
o
12.4.2.5 Restoration of internal fits should be to the original dimensions to prevent from having non-
C
standard parts. Leaving the fits oversized is only allowed with the owner’s approval. Recommendations
by the repair shop on non-standard fits should be reviewed by the owner.
r
12.4.2.6 Pad welding to reclaim fits should only be allowed by the approval of the owner. Pad welding, if
Fo
allowed, should meet the following guidelines:

a) The total length of the pad welds should not be less than 10% of the circumference of the fit.
b) The number of pad welds should meet the following guidelines of Table 12.4.
Table 12.4 – Number of Pad Welds

158 of 241
Fit Diameter Minimum Number of Pad Welds
≤ 12 in. (305 mm) 4

12 in. to 24 in. (305 to ≤610 mm) 6
>24 in. to 36 in. (610 to ≤914 mm) 8
>36 in. to 48 in. (910 to ≤1219 mm) 12
y
>48 in. (1219 mm) 16
n nl
tio O
12.4.2.7 Typical areas of diffusers (stage casing) requiring repair by weld build ups for restoration of
dimensions are identified in Figure 12.6.
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
Repair Locations:
ot m
1) Case Wear Ring Area

N m
2) Mounting Area for Previous Diffuser (stage casing

3) Mounting Area for Subsequent Diffuser (stage casing)
o
4) Diffuser Lug Mounting Area

C
5) High Pressure Sealing Surface
Figure 12.6 - Typical Weld Areas for Diffuser

r
Fo
12.4.3 Axial Split Cases
12.4.3.1 Refer to Annex W to determine need for reworking casing axial split line joint.
12.4.3.2 Minor deviations in flatness of the horizontal joint can be corrected by lapping or stoning.
12.4.3.3 On the split line, axial worm-holes less than 0.020 in (0.51 mm) deep can be locally ground to
remove. Axial worm holing greater than 0.020 in (0.51 mm), or that extends to the pressure barrier or
bolting should be weld repaired.
159 of 241
12.4.3.4 When lapping or stoning is insufficient to correct flange irregularities, machining the horizontal
joint and re-boring of the case can be recommended.
12.4.3.4.1 If machining of the horizontal joint and re-boring the case is recommended, make allowance for
gasket material.
12.4.3.4.2 Owner and repair shop should agree on the thickness of the horizontal joint gasket or shim
y
used during case machining.
n nl
12.4.4 Gasket Sealing Surfaces
tio O
12.4.4.1 For piping flange repairs refer to 12.4.9.
bu se
12.4.4.2 Confined controlled compression spiral wound gasket surfaces can be repaired to
recommendations in Annex W by:
tri U
a) Re-machining surfaces to maintain original gasket configuration, finishes, and geometry.
b) Welding and then re-machining to regain finishes and geometry.
is 0
D 01
12.4.4.3 Axially split pressure casing style pump gasket sealing surface finish can be repaired by stoning
and remove any raised metal. Re-machine to finishes and geometry stated in Annex W, and re-bore
case.
al 5
12.4.4.4 Non-gasketed pressure boundary sealing surfaces can be repaired by stoning to remove any
er lot
raised metal. Alternately sealing surfaces can be re-machined to finishes and geometry recommended
Annex W, and then re-bore the case.
en al
12.4.4.5 O-ring surface finish and groove dimensions, finish, and geometry should be per Annex W. Refer
to Annex O for O-ring groove information.
B
a) To prevent possible O-ring damage caused by seal collar setscrews, consideration should be given to
relieving the shaft 0.015 in (0.38 mm) to a side at the set-screw location.
rG e
Fo itte
b) This should prevent setscrew burrs on the shaft from damaging the O-rings as the O-rings slide over this
area.
ot m
12.4.4.6 Jacketed soft metal gasket finish or solid metal gasket surfaces can be repaired by welding the
gasket area, re-machining and using standard gasket as shown in Figure 12.7
N m o
rC
Fo
160 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
Figure 12.7 - Location of Metal Gasket
al 5
12.4.5 High Velocity Areas
er lot
12.4.5.1 Eroded high velocity areas should be repaired per 12.4.5.2 and 12.4.5.3. Consider an upgrade
of the high velocity areas per section 11.7.3 to minimize the potential of future wear.
en al
12.4.5.2 Non-weldable materials such as cast iron are typically replaced rather than repaired. Minor
B
erosion can be repaired by using a coating.
12.4.5.3 Weldable materials are typically repaired in the high velocity areas by removing the damaged
rG e
area and building back up with weld material per 12.1.6. Consideration should be given to the base weld
Fo itte
material(s) and then the possibility of applying a wear resistant coating or cladding.
12.4.6 Mounting Foot Repairs

ot m
12.4.6.1 Feet should be repaired by re-machining to improve flatness and assure they are coplanar to
Annex W. If welding is recommended, it should be performed per 12.1.6 and re-machined in accordance
N m
to 12.1.7.
o
12.4.6.2 Each foot should be machined to the finish indicated in Annex W.

C
12.4.6.3 Each foot should be machined to the flatness indicated in Annex W.

r
12.4.6.4 Each foot should be in the same plane to prevent soft foot. Tolerances are given in Annex W.
Fo
12.4.6.5 Increasing the stiffness of the feet by weld build-up or gusseting should be considered.
12.4.7 Piping Repairs
12.4.7.1 Damaged piping is not repaired, it is replaced.
12.4.7.2 Piping attached to the pump should be repaired by removing and replacing the damaged section.
The welding should be in accordance with 12.1.6.
161 of 241
a) Threaded connections in flammable and toxic services should be evaluated for replacement with
welded connections.
b) For the first nipple on pressure casings consider upgrading to minimum of schedule 160 per API 610.
c) Piping material should be evaluated for compatibility with current process conditions.
y
12.4.7.2.1 After welding is completed, hydrostatically test per the recommendations of 12.4.12. NDT
should be per 12.4.13.
n nl
12.4.7.3 Clean balance line if inspection has shown it to be obstructed.
tio O
12.4.7.4 Consider replacing balance line if it has been bent, crushed or internally corroded.
bu se
12.4.8 Damaged tubing or tubing fittings should not be repaired but be replaced.
tri U
12.4.9 Flange Repairs
12.4.9.1 Flanges constructed from cast, ductile or nodular iron
is 0
D 01
12.4.9.1.1 Cast, ductile or nodular iron flanges should be repaired only by machining.
12.4.9.1.2 Cast, ductile or nodular iron flange dimensions should be in accordance with ASME B16.1 &
al 5
B16.42. Pipe flange gasketed surface finish should be in accordance with MSS SP-6 Table 1.
er lot
12.4.9.1.3 Cast, ductile and nodular iron flanges should be flat faced and conform to the dimensional
requirements of ASME B16.1 or B16.42 (Class 125). Flanges should have a minimum thickness equal to
Class 250 for sizes NPS 8 and smaller. Flange thickness can be greater than specified in ASME B16.1
en al
and B16.42
B
12.4.9.2 Flanges constructed from weldable material

rG e
12.4.9.2.1 Flanges constructed from weldable material can be machined or welded and machined.
Fo itte
12.4.9.2.2 Pipe flange gasket surface finish should be per Annex W can be repaired as follows:
a) Re-machine to finishes and geometry
ot m
b) Weld damaged surfaces, stress relief, if required, re machine

N m
c) Cut off entire flange and weld on new flange

o
12.4.9.2.3 Steel flange dimensions should be in accordance with ASME B16.5 and B16.47 Series A and
C
Series B. Pipe flange gasket surfaces should be in accordance with Annex W. Flange thickness can be
greater than specified in ASME B16.5 and B16.47 Series A and Series B.
r
Fo
12.4.9.3 Integral flanges
12.4.9.3.1 Integral flanges and connections should have studs and stud holes repaired per 12.4.10.
Machined surfaces should be repaired in accordance to 12.1.7.
12.4.10 Threads
12.4.10.1 All threads should be visually inspected for gross defects and distortion.
162 of 241
12.4.10.2 This visual inspection should be made without magnification and is intended to detect gross
defects such as missing or incomplete threads, defective thread profile, torn or ruptured surfaces and
cracks.
12.4.10.3 Stud Repair

a) Minor damage of threads such as distortion should be repaired by gently straightening the thread and
dressing with an appropriate file or “chased” with a matching die.
y
n nl
b) The repaired threads should be verified by using the component that should be threaded onto the
threaded location.
tio O
c) Studs with major thread damage such as from galling, missing threads, torn or ruptured surfaces or
bu se
cracks should be replaced.
d) Many studs utilize rolled threads and should not be re-threaded.
tri U
12.4.10.4 Threaded Holes
is 0
12.4.10.4.1 A chaser tap should be run into the threaded hole to clean any damaged thread surfaces.
D 01
12.4.10.4.2 Threaded holes for pressure boundaries can be repaired as follows:
al 5
a) Drilling out threads and re tapping to a larger sized hole.
er lot
b) Drilling the threaded hole to clean metal and welding the threaded hole. The welded hole is then drilled
and tapped. The hole should be approximately 25% larger than original so when it is re-drilled and
en al
tapped the threads do not break into the interface between the original and the weld metal.
B
c) Drill the threaded hole to clean metal removing all threads, insert solid plug, seal weld the OD of the
plug, and drill and tap the plug. Sufficient metal, as determined by a stress analysis, should remain
rG e
between the repaired stud, the adjacent studs and the edge of the component.
Fo itte
d) Drilling out to a larger size and inserting a thread repair insert is prohibited across a pressure boundary.
e) Stepped studs are typically not allowed due to potential stress riser in the diameter difference and not
ot m
being able to roll the threads. Stepped studs may be considered after other alternatives are exhausted,
an engineering review is completed, and the owner has approved. The torque value of the stepped
N m
stud should be determined for the smaller diameter. Stepped studs should have the following features:
o
I. chamfer at the stepped portion of the two thread sections;

C
II. material equal to the original as minimum.

r
12.4.10.4.3 Threaded Holes for Non-Pressure Boundaries

Fo
Threads for non-pressure boundaries can be repaired as pressure containing methods in 12.4.10.4.2 or:
a) Drilling the hole to a larger size and inserting a solid metal threaded insert. The insert should be fixed in
place with a set-screw or tack welded to prevent the insert from backing out.
b) Drilling out to a larger size and inserting a thread repair insert.
12.4.11 Bearing Housing, Bearing and Accessory Repair
163 of 241
12.4.11.1 Bearing Housing Repair
12.4.11.1.1 If the bearing housing bore is damaged consider replacing the bearing housing. Typical
bearing housing repairs are:
a) Reclaim bearing fits in accordance with 12.4.11.1.3
b) Register fit repair in accordance with 12.4.11.1.5
y
n nl
c) Threaded holes repair in accordance with 12.4.11.1.6
tio O
d) Internal coating damage repair in accordance with 12.4.11.1.4
bu se
e) Water jacket (if applicable) replacement in accordance with 12.4.11.1.7
12.4.11.1.2 The repair process should bring the damaged areas to the dimensions and runouts to the
tri U
pertinent Annex W section for the specific pump type. The repair method, procedure, thickness, quality
control inspections, and acceptance criteria should be agreed upon.
is 0
12.4.11.1.3 Reclaim bearing fits
D 01
12.4.11.1.3.1 Bearing areas of bearing housings can be repaired by one of these processes, as
applicable:
al 5
a) Welding repairs on steel bearing housings only per 12.1.6
er lot
b) HVOF or HVLF (refer to Annex L) in accordance with 12.4.11.1.3.3
en al
c) Machining of horizontal split line 12.4.11.1.3.4

B
d) Inserting a sleeve in accordance with 12.4.11.1.3.2

rG e
12.4.11.1.3.2 Sleeves can be installed to reclaim the bearing area dimensions as follows:
Fo itte
a) Reclaim the centerline by boring the housing.

b) Ensure the bearing retaining shoulder is not removed. The insert should be at least as wide as the
ot m
bearing.

N m
c) The insert material should be carbon steel with a minimum thickness of 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) after the
finish cut.
o

C
d) Sleeve O.D should have a 0.002 in. to 0.003 in. (0.05 to 0.08 mm) interference fit.

e) The bores and surface finish should be per the appropriate section in Annex W.
r
Fo
12.4.11.1.3.3 The bearing area for split bearing housings can be restored by machining the area
oversized and applying a HVOF or HVLF as identified in Annex L.
a) Any previous coating should be removed.
b) The bores and surface finish should be per the appropriate section in Annex W.
12.4.11.1.3.4 One, or both, of the horizontal surfaces of the horizontal split line can be machined and the
assembly should be re-bored to reclaim the bearing area dimensions.
164 of 241
a) Establish a reference point for concentricity and perpendicularity, then machine the surface(s).
b) Assemble the housing with bolting and doweling then reclaim the centerline by boring the housing
c) The bores and surface finish should be per the appropriate section in Annex W.
12.4.11.1.4 Internal bearing housing surface coating
y
n nl
12.4.11.1.4.1 The internal coating of a bearing housing, with the exception of critical fit machined areas,
that is damaged can be repaired by touching up the damaged coating area or by reapplication of the
tio O
entire internal coating. If reapplying the entire coating, the coating should be an epoxy coating that is
acceptable for specified oil. The application of the entire coating should be per 12.4.11.1.4.2 through
12.4.11.1.4.4
bu se
12.4.11.1.4.2 Remove all sharp edges or other discontinuities from internal casting surfaces.
Remove any weld spatter, slag, or oxides.
tri U
12.4.11.1.4.3 Cleaning and Internal surface preparation:
is 0
a) Remove all oil, grease, or dirt in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If all the oil or grease is not removed,
D 01
heating the housing may be recommended.
b) If dry blasting (bead or shot blasting) is used, dry abrasive blast all surfaces to white metal finish
al 5
accordance with SSPC SP 6.
er lot
c) Surface should be clean and free from corrosion and moisture, including condensation prior to coating.
en al
d) Dry blasting has a potential of leaving blasting materials that could cause damage to the bearings and
should only be done if other cleaning methods do not thoroughly clean the surfaces. Verify all material
B
is removed after blasting.
e) Mask all components that do not need painting. Mask or plug all drilled holes.
rG e
Fo itte
12.4.11.1.4.4 All coating procedures should be in accordance with coating vendor’s instructions.
12.4.11.1.5 Register Fit repair

ot m
For undersize fits weld and machine to reclaim fit. Cast Iron housings with undersized fits can be
reclaimed by using an insert ring. Fits should be in accordance with Annex W
N m
12.4.11.1.6 Repair of threaded holes

o
C
Threaded holes should be repaired in accordance with 12.4.10.4.3.
12.4.11.1.7 Water jackets are not typically repaired, but rather replaced. If welding is acceptable it should
r
be per 12.1.6.
Fo
12.4.11.2 Bearing Repair
12.4.11.2.1 Rolling element bearings should always be replaced. Refer to Annex F for additional
information on replacement bearings.
12.4.11.2.2 Hydrodynamic (radial or thrust) bearings should be replaced or repaired as outlined in Annex
H if any of the following exist:
a) Babbitt is in poor condition: pitted, loss of Babbitt, deep scratches or rubs
165 of 241
b) Babbitt is delaminated (poor bonding) from the shell
c) Shell damage is present that can affect bearing performance
d) Fretting is evident on tilting component
e) Crisscross (race track) grooves have been cut in the Babbitt to compensate for improper L/D
y
n nl
12.4.11.2.2.1 The L/D ratios should be measured and recorded and consideration given to upgrading, per
11.5.7.2.1.2.
tio O
12.4.11.2.2.2 Re-Babbitted bearings should have old Babbitt and interface material completely removed.
Only new Babbitt should be used in the re-Babbitting process. Babbitt should not be repaired by spot
bu se
“puddling” as outlined in Annex H.
12.4.11.2.2.3 For proper bonding between the Babbitt and bearing shell:
tri U
a) Copper based alloy backed bearings should use a nickel barrier layer between the Babbitt and the
backing.
is 0
D 01
b) Steel backed bearings are preferred and should use a tin barrier layer between Babbitt and the backing.
12.4.11.2.2.3 Radial sleeve bearings should be centrifugally cast and thrust bearing pads can be statically
al 5
poured. Tin and antimony Babbitt can contain small percentages of lead.
er lot
a) Babbitt should not be applied via HVOF or HVLF process
b) Other methods should be as agreed by the owner and repair shop

en al
c) The general Babbitt used should be a tin based Babbitt, ASTM B23 grade 2.
B
d) Material certification of the Babbitt should be provided to the owner

rG e
Fo itte
e) Lead based Babbitt should not be used
● 12.4.11.2.2.4 Voids and Inspection for Voids

ot m
a) There should be no voids between the Babbitt and bearing and no indications on the Babbitt bearing
interface.
N m

● b) If specified, the NDT inspector should be qualified by detecting voids specifically imposed in a test
o
piece
C
12.4.11.2.2.5 When re-Babbittting the bearing, confirm that the top and bottom dowel pins in the
horizontal split line are positioned such that the top and bottom halves match
r
Fo
a) There should be no overlap of the bearing halves at the horizontal joint.
b) To allow disassembly, dowel pins should be a tight fit in the bottom half of the bearing and a slip fit in the
top half of the bearing.
12.4.11.3 Bearing Housing Accessories
12.4.11.3.1 Bearing isolators can have the O-rings replaced or the complete part replaced.
166 of 241
12.4.11.3.2 Oil rings should be cleaned or replaced. If the inner chamfers or radii are missing, the oil ring
should be replaced. Refer to section 10.5.5 and Annex W for Oil Ring dimensional recommendations.
12.4.11.3.3 Oil Flingers (Throwers) should be cleaned, inspected and replaced if damaged.
12.4.12 Hydrostatic Testing
y
12.4.12.1 Hydrostatic testing recommendations are identified in Table 12.5. The hydrostatic testing
should have a detailed work scope included in 10.9. High pressure hydrostatic testing can in some cases
n nl
cause dimensional distortion. This issue is more predominant on austenitic (AUS) and duplex materials.
Some 400 series AUS materials that have been operating above 650 °F (340 °C) can be susceptible to
tio O
cracking due to embrittlement during hydrostatic testing and therefore an engineering analysis prior to
hydrostatic testing should be completed.
bu se
Table 12.5 – Hydrostatic Testing
tri U
Recommended
Optional for
Necessary
is 0 Review
Not
D 01
Description
General:
al 5
er lot
Re-rate of pump temperature or pressure results in
higher working pressure than previous d x
Wear (that was not repaired) in an area that could
en al
affect the mechanical integrity d,e x

B
Low temperature stress relieving f x

Post Weld Heat Treat g x
Pressure boundary repair h x
rG e
Fo itte
Material has been changed:

Pressure boundary bolting d x
Gasket material or style for pressure boundary d x
ot m
Diffusion coating d,i x

Low temperature coating (HVOF, HVLF) x
N m o
Metal removal affecting mechanical integrity,

such as:
C
Change to different type gasket (e.g. solid gasket

to spiral wound)d x
r
Increasing hole size on pressure boundary bolting d x

Fo
Restoring wear ring fit x

Seal chamber bore oversizing b,c,e x
Pressure containing joints x
Adding additional threaded connections to
pressure boundary x
Lapping repairs to axially split horizontal joint k x
Plane & line boring of pressure casing x
167 of 241
Removing raised area around minor scratches of

pressure containing joints d x
Oversized hole repair to a foot x
Selective wear ring fit line boring of pressure
casing x
Repairs to suction splitter x
Skim machining repair to a foot x
y
Skimming seal chamber face-gasket area for
n nl
perpendicularity x
tio O
Bearing bracket register fits x
Welding, such as:
bu se
Welding of pressure boundary stud holes j x
Tack welding wear ring x
tri U
Tack welding RTD or thermocouple brackets n x
Weld repair to a foot x
Restoring geometry of cutwater by welding n
is 0
x
Weld repair on pump case pressure boundary x
D 01
Weld overlay on pressure containing component d x
Adding or modifying an auxiliary connection x
al 5
Seal welding threaded connections b,d,n x
Weld gussets onto pressure casing b,n x
er lot
Welding of flange bolt holes and re-machining x
Welding up case thickness due to erosion if min
en al
wall thickness has been breached x

Pad welding of registers b,n x
B
Other minor weld that does not breach min design

thickness b,d,m,n x
rG e
a
If optional hydrostatic test condition arises, repair shop should offer hydrostatic
Fo itte
test as a customer option.

b
Recommend PT or MT examination if hydrostatic test is not applied.
c
Engineering review should be carried out to verify that enlarged bore does not
ot m
compromise pressure containment integrity.

d
Engineering review is recommended.
N m
e
Recommend UT to assess wall thickness
f
Low temperature stress relieving is defined as a stress relief below allowable
o
operating temperature of pump case and is typical for austenitic and duplex
materials which is the reason for the optional hydrostatic test.
C
g
Some exceptions can be made as detailed in the table
h
Pressure boundary repair includes all auxiliary components subject to pumpage
r
such as product cooled bearing housing water jackets

Fo
i
Recommend hydrostatic test prior to coating process and after coating to
minimize chance of final hydrostatic test failures
j
Includes seal chamber bolting
k
In centrifugal pumps, lapped joints are typically internal seals and not pressure
boundary seals. If lapped joint is pressure boundary, hydrostatic test should be
offered
l
Preference should upgrade socket welded connection instead of seal welding
m
Minor weld would be a cosmetic weld that is not required to satisfy pressure
boundary strength requirements and does not require post weld heat treat
n
Only optional if PWHT is not required.
168 of 241
12.4.12.2 Pressure containing components and joints should be hydrostatic leak tested in accordance
with 12.4.12.2 through 12.4.12.4 and API 610. Pressure boundary bolting during the hydrostatic testing
should be the bolting for the final build.
12.4.12.2.1 For austenitic or duplex stainless steel pressure-casing components, the residual stresses
y
resulting from final liquid quenching and relatively low proportional limits inherent in these materials can
n nl
cause small amounts of permanent deformation at critical dimensions during hydrostatic testing.
Therefore, the OEM should be consulted to determine the pressure allowed to prevent distortion during a
tio O
lower pressure test.
12.4.12.2.2 Some high pressure applications should have a different bolting arrangement for hydrostatic
bu se
testing compared to the final build, for example seal gland bolting.
12.4.12.3 All residual liquid should be removed from tested parts at the conclusion of the hydrostatic test
tri U
to:
a) prevent deposition of chlorides on austenitic stainless steels as a result of evaporative drying
is 0
D 01
b) prevent growth of microbial bacteria
12.4.12.3.1 Microbial bacteria can produce waste byproducts that foster microbial induced (influenced)
al 5
corrosion (MIC). MIC can create pinhole corrosion paths in most common materials including carbon, low
alloy steels, 300 and 400 series stainless steel, aluminum, copper and some nickel base alloys. MIC
er lot
corrosion processes can be 10 to 1000 times more than conventional corrosion rates. Refer to API RP
571 for additional information on MIC.
en al
Note: MIC is found in heat exchangers, bottom water of storage tanks, piping with stagnant or low flow,
piping in contact with some soils and fire water systems. It is also found in equipment that has been left
B
outside and unprotected as well as product storage tanks and cooled heat exchangers where cooling
water is not properly treated.
rG e
12.4.12.3.2 If the pump is returned to service within approximately 3 months MIC should not become a
Fo itte
problem.
12.4.12.3.3 If the pump is going to storage, efforts should be taken to mitigate MIC by using a biocide.
ot m
● 12.4.12.4 Hydrostatic testing should be done at the original hydrostatic test pressure. If a deviation
N m
from this pressure is recommended, an agreed test pressure will be determined.

o
12.4.12.4.1 Especially for austenitic stainless steels, confirm that the water meets the chloride content
specified in API 610 as many supplies do not.
C
12.4.12.4.2 Some multi-stage pump cases have differing hydrostatic test pressure for different sections of
r
the pump pressure casing. Typically, the suction and discharge flange ratings are different. For instance,
Fo
a suction section can be rated for a different pressure than the discharge section and should be tested
independently. Usually a plate is installed to divide the pressure casing into sections. The pump OEM
should be contacted for this verification and assistance in the location, size and techniques for holding
this plate.
Note: dual pressure rating for pressure casings is an “if specified” option in API 610
12.4.12.4.3 Some pump cases should use a through bolt with a plate on each end at the seal chamber
(stuffing box) to seal the openings. In some applications, the bolting at the seal chamber will not provide
169 of 241
sufficient holding ability for the hydrostatic test and the through bolt should be used. The pump OEM
should be contacted for the recommendations.
12.4.13 Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)
12.4.13.1 NDT should be performed on pressure boundary components that have been weld repaired,
coated, or machined.
y
12.4.13.2 NDT should be performed on impellers and shafts that have been weld repaired. New
n nl
components should be NDT based on the original specifications or API 610 criteria.
tio O
12.4.13.3 Additional NDT may be specified by the owner. NDT should be performed per 10.1.21.
bu se
12.5 Auxiliary Items (as appropriate)
12.5.1 Shaft Sealing System
tri U
12.5.1.1 Mechanical Seal
is 0
12.5.1.1.1 The mechanical seal should be sent to the owner’s specified seal repair shop to be
D 01
disassembled, inspected, and repaired. The seal vendor should recommend any upgrades to current
standards. A failure report should be provided, as appropriate.
al 5
12.5.1.1.2 Each seal should have an Air Test per API 682 by the seal repair shop.
er lot
12.5.1.2 Shaft packing should be replaced with the appropriate packing.
12.5.1.3 Seal reservoirs and coolers should be repaired per recommendations of the owner.
en al
12.5.1.4 Seal separators should not be repaired but replaced.

B
12.5.2 Orifices are typically not repaired and are replaced.

rG e
Fo itte
12.5.3 Steam traps are typically not repaired and are replaced.
12.5.4 Coupling
ot m
12.5.4.1 The coupling drawing should be reviewed to determine if there are any special requirements.
The coupling will be either a general purpose or a special purpose coupling. Different coupling styles
N m
utilize specific balance, bolting, or assembly.

o
12.5.4.2 Coupling hubs or spacers typically are not repaired (other than lapping) and are replaced in kind.
Damaged coupling bolting should be replaced with the type of coupling bolting specified by the coupling
C
vendor.
r
12.5.4.3 For general purpose disc style couplings the disc assemblies are not repaired and should be
Fo
replaced if recommended using the recommendations of the coupling vendor.
12.5.4.4 Special purpose couplings should be returned to a coupling repair shop for repairs. Rebalancing
is required for any repairs. The discs or diaphragms are not to be repaired.
12.5.4.5 Coupling fit should be as specified in Annex W. For tapered bores if the contact is not
acceptable, the bore can be lapped as detailed in API RP 687 Chapter 1, Appendix C.
12.6 Replacement Components
170 of 241
12.6.1 Replacement components are components that are either manufactured or supplied by the repair
shop. Any quality control recommendations by the owner should be communicated to the repair shop.
12.6.2 Replacement components should meet the recommendations of:

a) OEM (consider OEM’s upgrades)
b) upgrade or modification plan
y
n nl
c) upgrade or modification recommendations
tio O
d) upgraded inspection plan
bu se
e) owner’s approved vendor listing
f) owner’s specific recommendations
tri U
Modifications may have previously been made and a review may be recommended.
is 0
12.6.3 If OEM drawings are not available for reference, the repair shop should perform a “reverse”
D 01
engineering process to establish the proper materials, heat treatment, dimensions and appropriate
functional tolerances to produce the new component. The repair shop may find it necessary to obtain
field measurements of equipment in service to verify or supplement the needed data.
al 5
a) The repair shop should have a documented quality control process to perform reverse engineering for
er lot
new component manufacturing.
b) The process should document all steps in the reverse engineering process to accurately identify critical
en al
details before fabrication.

B
● 12.6.4 New replacement alloy parts in contact with the process fluid, including the mechanical seal
flange, should be subject to positive material identification (PMI), if specified
rG e
12.6.4.1 The PMI should employ recognized testing methods, instrumentation and standards.
Fo itte
12.6.4.2 The mechanical seal internal parts should not be included in the PMI.
ot m
● 12.6.5 If specified, mill test reports or material composition certificates should be provided.
N m
12.6.6 Replacement rolling element bearings

o
12.6.6.1 Replacement rolling bearing information:

C
12.6.6.1.1 Markings on the existing bearing, specifically the bearing vendor and part number. The
information on the bearings may not completely describe the bearing. Information on the bearing
r
package typically has data such as basic and supplementary information which describes entirely the
Fo
bearing whereas the markings on the bearing itself can be incomplete.
12.6.6.1.2 Do not assume that the existing bearing is necessarily the correct bearing. The installed
bearing could have been changed from the original due to operating conditions or it could have been the
only one available when the pump was assembled.
12.6.6.1.3 Attempt to determine the correct bearing for the equipment. The correct bearing can be the
original or a substitute made to improve reliability. Duplicate the existing bearing only as a last resort.
171 of 241
12.6.6.1.4 Generally the bearing will be made of a particular precision class, such as, ABEC 7, and
manufactured with a particular internal clearance class such as "C3". Standard precision and normal
clearance class bearings do not have a particular ABMA precision and clearance designation.
12.6.6.1.5 Single row, angular contact ball bearings (sometimes called “thrust bearings”) are typically
installed in a pair at one end of the pump as a combination thrust/radial bearing. Be sure that
replacements of this type of bearing indicate the proper pairing, axial clearance, contact angle, cage type
y
designations. Be sure that they are mounted in the proper direction.
n nl
12.6.6.1.6 Confirm the bearing conforms to API 610.
tio O
12.6.6.1.7 Bearings that do not meet API 610 can be due to upgrades such as contact angle change. If
bearings do not meet these API 610, investigate the difference before installing a bearing that is not the
bu se
same as the bearing being replaced.
12.6.7 OEM certification is acceptable for non-metallic parts
tri U
13 Rotor Assembly and Balancing
is 0
13.1 General
D 01
13.1.1 This section covers the proper assembly and balancing recommendations for between bearing
(BB) and overhung style rotating assemblies. The rotating assembly consists of the shaft, impeller(s),
al 5
shaft sleeve(s), balance device, thrust collar, center and inter-stage sleeves, impeller nut, split rings, and
any half or full keys. Not included in the rotating assembly is the coupling hub or the rotating portions of
er lot
the mechanical seal(s).
For BB diffuser style pumps, the rotating assembly should be assembled along with the diffusers. This
en al
assembly is referred to as an inner bundle assembly.

B
13.1.2 Consideration should be given to whether the rotating assembly or inner bundle assembly will be
stored or shipped for immediate use. This will affect selection of preservatives.
rG e
Fo itte
13.1.3 Refer to the instruction manual and cross-sectional drawing to become familiar with the assembly
sequence and the axial, radial and assembly settings.
13.1.4 Verify that all sub-assemblies and components including all keys, split rings, fasteners, spacer
ot m
sleeves and diffusers for rotor build have been cleaned, inspected, freed of burrs, validated for use and
are ready for final assembly. Remove all foreign deposits, preservation materials, oil, and tape residue
N m
with an appropriate solvent.

o
13.1.5 Verify the following prior to assembly:

C
a) All upgrades, repairs, and new components are completed and meet the recommendations of sections
9 and 10.
r
Fo
b) All components should meet dimensional and TIR recommendations of the appropriate pump type of
Annex W. Fits and clearances of components should be calculated and recorded in advance of
172 of 241
assembly and should be available for review.
c) Correct impeller axial positioning and orientation data is available.
d) All assembly tooling and fixtures are available.
e) All testing such as PMI and NDT has been completed.
y
n nl
f) All one-piece style wear rings or bushings (such as impeller or diffuser wear rings/bushings) that are
installed prior to assembly have been installed and trimmed to size.
tio O
13.1.6 Heating of components for assembly
bu se
13.1.6.1 All major components that have an interference shaft fit should be uniformly heated for assembly
onto the shaft. Components should be heated in a horizontal oven that has good temperature control to
tri U
provide an assembly clearance to the shaft of 0.001 in/in (0.001 mm/mm) of shaft diameter, but in no
case should a component be heated more than approximately 350 °F (177 °C). Install components until
they engage the setting device such as split rings. The temperature of the component should be
is 0
monitored and the control for the component’s temperature should not be derived from the oven’s
D 01
temperature controller.
13.1.6.2 If torches are used, care should be exercised to maintain even heating and to prevent applying a
al 5
heat rate that is too rapid that can cause distortion.
er lot
13.1.6.2.1 The temperature should be carefully monitored with a non-contacting infrared surface
temperature gun or low sulfur temperature indicating sticks.
en al
13.1.6.2.2 Heating components for assembly is a critical step. Components should be heated uniformly to
minimize circumferential temperature variations that could cause permanent distortion.
B
13.1.6.2.3 Ensure that sections of different thicknesses are heated evenly, with any variation preferably
less than 25 °F (14 °C).
rG e
Fo itte
13.1.6.2.4 The temperature gradient across the component should never exceed approximately 50°F
(28°C) during the heating process as permanent distortion can occur. The component is generally heated
from the outside diameter to the inside diameter
ot m
13.1.6.2.5 Heating can be accomplished by using flare tip or rosebud torches. Two torches, applied
approximately diametrically opposed, should be used for large components to maintain an even
N m
temperature.
o
13.1.6.3 The channel rings for pumps using channel ring and diffuser assemblies (1 or 2 piece) with an
C
interference fit require heating of the channel rings for assembly.
13.1.6.3.1 The channel rings should be uniformly heated for assembly.

r
Fo
13.1.6.3.2 Channel rings typically only require a minimal amount of heat for assembly. A torch is used for
heating instead of an oven because the channel ring has previously been installed and cooled.
13.1.7 When components are coated, the temperature limitation of any coating should be reviewed for
assembly considerations.
13.1.8 Assembly lubricants
173 of 241
13.1.8.1 Lubricate all register fits and bores during the assembly process with an appropriate lubricant
suitable for the materials and process fluids. Clean off any excess lubricant.
13.1.8.2 Use a lubricant on wear part running surfaces such as dry molybdenum disulfide. Confirm that
the lubricant is applicable for the pumped fluid and the component’s materials. Wipe off any excess.
13.2 Low Speed Component Balancing
y
13.2.1 Components of the rotating element, such as impeller(s), hydraulic balance drum (disc), thrust
n nl
collar and similar components should be dynamically balanced to 13.2.6 prior to rotor assembly. Shafts,
sleeves, nuts and coupling hubs are typically not required to be component balanced.
tio O
NOTE: Some couplings are balanced as an assembly and component balancing the coupling hub
bu se
individually can result in an out of balance coupling.
13.2.2 Impellers should be balanced after installation and trimming of wear ring(s).
tri U
13.2.3 Component balancing can be single-plane if the ratio D/b is 6.0 or greater.
Refer to Figure 13.1
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
C
Figure 13.1 – Impeller Dimensions Relating to Balancing

r
Fo
13.2.4 If components to be balanced are not phase-reference marked, zero phase should be at the
component keyway (or locking pin or key block). If components are not keyed or do not have a reference
point, zero phase should be permanently identified for use during the assembly balancing.
13.2.5 Components should be balanced per 13.2.6 on mandrels (arbor) that has no measurable
eccentricity using an indicator graduated in 0.0001 in (0.0025 mm) increments. For OH style pumps,
using the shaft for the component’s balance is acceptable as long as any unused keyways are filled with
fully crowned keys.
13.2.5.1 Tapered spring mandrels should not be used.
174 of 241
13.2.5.2 Surface finish of the mandrel should not exceed 16 µ in. (0.41 µm)
13.2.5.3 TIR of the impeller mounting surface with relation to the mandrel journals should not exceed
0.0002 in. (0.005 mm).
13.2.5.4 For keyed components, inside crowned half keys or an equivalent compensating moment are
y
recommended for proper balance because mandrels are typically not keyed.
n nl
13.2.5.5 The interference fit between a component and a mandrel should not be less than 0.0005 in
(0.013 mm) or greater than 0.002 in (0.05 mm).
tio O
13.2.5.6 For pump types that are designed with a clearance fit between impeller and shaft, the mandrel
bu se
shrink fit should not be less than 0.0005 in. (0.01 mm).
13.2.6 The maximum allowable residual unbalance per plane (journal), measured at the journal, should
tri U
be defined as by the following calculations:
In US Customary units
is 0
D 01
Umax = 4W / N, oz-in (13a)
Umax = 113.4 W / N, gm-ins (13b)
al 5
In Metric units
Umax = 6350W/N, gm-mm (13c)
er lot
Where:
Umax = residual unbalance, in oz-in or gm-ins (gm-mm)
en al
W = journal static weight load, in. lbs (kg)

B
a) for component balancing W is the journal static weight of the combined mandrel and
rG e
component
Fo itte
b) for rotor balancing W is the journal static weight of the assembled rotor

ot m
N = max. continuous speed, rpm

N m
13.2.6.1 Balance machine rolling element bearing diameter should be at least 5% larger than the rotor
o
journal nominal diameter and should not be an integer multiple of the bearing journal diameter.
C
Note: If bearings with a diameter smaller than the rotor journal are used, roller noise can mask the
balance readings.
r
Fo
13.2.7 Components can be balanced on a horizontal or vertical balancing machine.
13.2.8 With the component mounted on the mandrel, its radial phase-referenced runout(s) (TIR) should
be recorded on the wear ring surface(s) and not exceed a TIR of 0.002 in. (0.051mm).
13.2.8.1 If the assembled component on the mandrel exceeds the TIR then the component should be
disassembled, and the runout corrected.
13.2.8.2 Runouts should be measured at the same place as measured during disassembly and
reassembly.
175 of 241
13.2.9 Balance corrections on the impellers should be made by grinding on the shrouds (cover and disc)
only as illustrated in Figure 13.2.
13.2.9.1 Grinding should be done in the middle 1/3 of the distance from the impeller hub to the impeller
shroud tip and should not extend closer than 3/8 in. to the impeller shroud minimum recommended
diameter for that impeller.
y
13.2.9.2 After balancing, the shroud thickness should not be less than 80% of the original shroud
n nl
thickness
tio O
13.2.9.3 Taper (blend in) the edges of the ground area to the un-ground surrounding shroud
(approximately 1:4 taper will produce a smooth transition)
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 13.2 – Balance Correction Location

B
13.2.10 Grinding on the suction eye face or impeller vanes is not permitted.
rG e
13.2.11 Material removal on balance drums (discs) should be on the non-wearing surface or end of the
Fo itte
balance drum near the outside diameter.
13.2.11.1 If done on the end of the balance drum, balance corrections should be made by grinding and/or
ot m
drilling.
13.2.11.2 If drilled corrections are used, the bottoms of the drilled holes should be dressed with a
N m
radiused drill point to eliminate undue stress risers.

o
13.2.11.3 The outside of the drilled hole should not extend closer than 0.375 in (9.5 mm) to the outside
C
diameter of the balance drum.
13.2.12 Component(s) that have an overlay coating should be balanced prior to the coating application
r
Fo
and then check balanced after the coating application. Consider reducing the uncoated component
unbalance to less than 4 W/N to account for potential unbalance due to the coating.
13.2.12.1 Any balance corrections to the coated impeller should be agreed upon. Additional balancing of
a coated impeller can jeopardize the integrity of the coating. Owner and repair shop should determine the
type of coating and the patching application to coat the balance correction location(s).
Note: Balancing corrections after coating typically are limited to an area on the OD of the impeller hub or
cover in between vanes (scalloped design)
176 of 241
13.2.12.2 The decision to balance the coated impeller should consider:

a) The trade-off between the final balance and the coating integrity.
b) The type of coating and the patching application (if possible) for reapplication of the coating to the
balance correction areas.
13.3 ASSEMBLY and BALANCING
y
n nl
13.3.1 General
tio O
13.3.1.1 Flow charts in Annex P outline the major steps in assembly and balancing of pump rotors. Low
speed balancing and rotor assembly depends on fit of impellers to shaft i.e. clearance or interference, and
pump configuration.
bu se
13.3.1.1.1 Once the rotor is assembled the balancing planes should be separated as far as possible on
tri U
the impeller(s) mounted on the rotor.
13.3.1.1.2 The impellers nearest the bearings for multi-stage pumps should be used for the balance
is 0
planes. This method should minimize metal loss on the impellers.
D 01
13.3.1.1.3 Stack balancing is typically not done for pumps.
al 5
13.3.1.2 Residual unbalance checks per 13.4 and Annex Q should be performed as indicated in Annex P
flow charts.
er lot
13.3.1.3 Rotor assembly for low speed assembly balancing includes, as applicable, the following
components: shaft, impeller(s), hydraulic balance drum (disc), thrust collar, spacer sleeves, split rings,
en al
keys and lock nuts. The rotor does not include the pump half-coupling hub or the mechanical seal
assembly(s). Trim balancing on the thrust collar is not allowed so that this component can be replaced in
B
the field without affecting the balance of the rotor.

rG e
13.3.1.4 Keys and keyways should be per Annex T. Any vacant single keyway should be filled
completely with crowned half keys unless keys of equal size are used in the same axial plane, 180° apart.
Fo itte
13.3.1.5 Record a complete set of phase-referenced bare shaft runouts (TIR) prior to assembly.
ot m
13.3.1.5.1 Shaft should be supported at the bearing journals on V-blocks when taking measurements.
N m
13.3.1.5.2 The maximum allowable shaft runouts should not exceed the values identified in Annex W.
o
13.3.1.6 Document position settings, clearances, and other measurements during the assembly process.
C
13.3.1.7 Major components should not be impacted with items such as hammers or blocks of wood, at
any time during the assembly process.
r
Fo
13.3.1.8 For components requiring heating for assembly, allow the rotor to cool to approximately 120 °F
(50 °C) before adding additional components.
13.3.1.9 Verify that the components are correctly located on the shaft according to the assembly data
and/or drawing.
13.3.1.9.1 Stacked dimensions should conform to the inspected dimensions per 13.1.3 or have
engineering justification for deviation.
177 of 241
13.3.1.9.2 Each major component location should be within the recommendations of Annex W of the
assembly reference dimension.
13.3.1.9.3 Specific types of seals or open impellers can require a tighter tolerance for the positioning of
the components.
13.3.1.10 For components requiring heating for assembly (sequential) balance, after the addition of each
y
major component and after the rotor has cooled to a maximum of 120°F (50°C), the runouts of each
component added should be recorded and compared to the recommendations in Annex W.
n nl
13.3.1.10.1 Runouts should not exceed those listed in the appropriate pump type of Annex W.
tio O
13.3.1.10.2 If the runout exceeds the value for the appropriate pump type of Annex W, the component
bu se
should be removed, and the runout corrected.
13.3.1.11 The runouts of the rotating assembly as identified in Annex W should be recorded and
tri U
compared to the allowable runouts listed in Annex W.
13.3.1.12 If the runout exceeds the value from Annex W, the component should be removed, and the
is 0
runout corrected.
D 01
13.3.1.13 Balance corrections should be made in accordance with 13.2.9 through 13.2.12.
al 5
13.3.1.14 After the rotor has been assembled, prior to balancing for non-belt driven balance machines
(i.e. rotor is driven with a jackshaft) the jackshaft should be rotated 180o and the residual unbalance
er lot
checked again. If the unbalance values change to exceed the value in paragraph 13.2.6, the drive shaft is
not balanced or pilot fit of drive shaft is incorrect. Error should be corrected.
en al
13.3.1.15 Take photographs during the assembly process to show details.

B
13.3.2 Single-Stage Overhung Pump Design (OH 1 through OH 5)

rG e
13.3.2.1 Refer to Annex P, Figure P-1 for the balancing process of single stage overhung style pumps.
Fo itte
The deliverable of section 13 for these style pumps is a mandrel balanced impeller.
13.3.2.2 OH1 through and including OH5 pumps should have the mandrel balanced impeller mounted
onto the shaft during the assembly of the pump in section 14.
ot m
13.3.3 Between Bearing Volute Style Pumps with Clearance or Interference Fit Impellers (BB1,
N m
BB2, BB3, BB4, and BB5)

o
13.3.3.1 Refer to Annex P, Figure P-2 for the balancing process of between bearing volute style pumps
with clearance or interference fit impellers.
C
13.3.3.1.1 The deliverable of section 13 for these style pumps is an assembled rotor with case wear rings
r
staged between impellers. Refer to section 14 for assembling this subassembly into the pump.
Fo
13.3.3.1.2 A rotor assembly balance is acceptable for these clearance-fit style rotors because these
rotors will not be disassembled prior to installation into the pump.
13.3.3.2 The stationary components are suspended between the impellers during the balancing process.
Care should be taken to assure these components do not contact the rotor during the balancing process.
Figure 13.3.3 is shows an example rotor with stationary components suspended for balance. The rotor
should be assembled and balanced in accordance with the following:
a) Assemble the rotor with the mandrel balanced impellers and all stationary components such as case
178 of 241
rings and close clearance bushings that are located between impellers during the build-up of the rotor.
b) Runouts and dimensions identified in Annex W should be measured and recorded for the complete
rotating assembly. Acceptance criteria should be in accordance with Annex W.
c) The check balance of the assembled rotor should be 12 W/N or less. If this check balance exceeds 12
W/N, determine the cause before proceeding. If the check balance does not exceed 12 W/N, perform
y
a multi plane dynamic balance of the rotor to a maximum residual unbalance of 4W/N.
n nl
d) A residual unbalance check should be performed per 13.4 and Annex Q.
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
Figure 13.3.3. Multistage Rotor with Stationary Components Suspended

ot m
13.3.3.3 For rotors that utilize secondary impeller positioning locks, confirm that the locking devices are
N m
installed.
13.3.4 Between Bearing Diffuser Style Pumps with Interference or clearance Fit Impellers (BB1,
o
BB2, BB3, BB4 and BB5)

C
13.3.4.1 Preparation of assembly

r
Fo
13.3.4.1.1 A diffuser style pump is assembled stage by stage. A stage consists of the impeller and the
diffuser. The impeller can have an interference or clearance fit. The type of fit is important to know so
that the correct assembly method is used for the assembly.
13.3.4.1.2 Stacking the stages is important to confirm that the positioning of the impellers to the diffusers
is correct.
179 of 241
a) Verify all critical locating dimensions prior to the assembly process.
b) Review the cross-sectional drawing to determine from which end the assembly process should begin.
c) The impeller to the diffuser axial centerlines should be per Annex W.
13.3.4.1.3 Determine if shims should be used for the positioning of the inner bundle assembly and if
y
gaskets should be installed as the assembly is being assembled. The overall length of the inner bundle
n nl
assembly “CM” as referenced in Figure 13.3 should be per the recommendations of the OEM. During
inspection and repairs, some of the intermediate cover, stage piece or diffuser faces may have been skim
tio O
cut thus requiring compensation during assembly. During assembly of the inner bundle assembly into the
pump casing, the mating dimension should be taken (14.13.3) for final assembly.
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 13.3 - Diffuser Style Inner Bundle Assembly
en al
13.3.4.1.4 Check the surface condition quality at the location where the spiral wound gasket fits for barrel
style pumps.
B
13.3.4.1.5 For interference fit impellers, the impellers will require heating per 13.1.6. Interference fit
rG e
impellers will typically have split rings that provide the location for the impellers. Review the design of
these split rings to determine if there is a right or wrong direction for these split ring installations.
Fo itte
13.3.4.1.6 For clearance fit impellers, spacer sleeves will establish the positioning of the impellers.
Tightening of the end nut(s) can cause the shaft to bow if all the components do not have the proper face
ot m
perpendicularity. The impellers were to have already been balanced as an assembly for clearance fit
impellers and the nut(s) should have been marked to determine its tight position.
N m
13.3.4.1.7 Verify that each impeller to each diffuser is the correct match for rotation, diameter and style.
o
13.3.4.1.8 Layout each component in the correct order so that as the assembly process is started, it is
C
clear which component is installed next.

r
13.3.4.1.9 Inner bundle assembly components typically have a method to prevent rotation. Review the
Fo
cross-sectional drawing and verify that any devices such as pins are the proper size and length. A pin
that is too long could cause a gap between diffusers. Review how these pins should be installed.
13.3.4.1.10 Have any heating or chilling devices and procedures along with safety procedures and
equipment ready.
13.3.4.1.11 Determine the anti-seize compound that can be used to allow easy rotation between the
impeller and diffuser wear rings, if any should be used. Typically, lubricant is not used on non-metallic
wear rings or bushings.
180 of 241
13.3.4.2 Assembling of rotor and diffusers (General)
This section provides information for assembling the rotor and diffuser assembly.
a) All components, instructions, measurements, tooling and safety equipment should be readily available.
Note: Some rotor assemblies are easier to assembly if they are in the vertical position.
y
b) Install any remaining wear rings or bushings that have not been previously installed onto the rotor
n nl
assembly or in the heads.
tio O
c) Install a locating nut (if used) or locate the step in the shaft (if used) for locating the first impeller to be
installed.
bu se
d) Install the components in proper sequence.
tri U
e) Interference fit impellers should be heated per 13.1.6. Once heated, slide the impeller into position and
insert the split locating ring (if used) and position the impeller to capture the split ring pulling it completely
back against the split ring. Hold tension on the locating of the impeller until the impeller has sufficiently
is 0
cooled to lock onto the shaft.
D 01
1. For interference fit arrangements, after the installation of each stage, perform an axial float check
on the assembly per 14.8.4.4 to confirm that an error has not been created. The axial float should
al 5
be per Annex W.
2. If the axial float is not per the recommendation in Annex W, stop and remove components to
er lot
determine the reason for the problem.
f) Clearance fit impellers should be slid onto the shaft. Typically, a lubricant is used to assist with the
en al
installation. Verify that the impeller has been positioned against the component that acts as a stop.
B
g) Continue installation of impellers and diffusers and any other components such as gaskets, shims,
alignment pins or sleeves onto the rotor and diffuser assembly. When installing any keys, a grease or
a quick curing adhesive should be applied to hold the key into position during assembly.
rG e
Fo itte
1. Typically, an alignment pin is used between diffusers. The alignment pin may have to be chilled
for installation. A soft faced hammer may be needed to be used to tap the pin into the diffuser.
2. An anti-seize compound should be used for the register fits between diffusers.
ot m
3. For diffusers that have interference fit from one to another can require heating the outer section of
one of the diffusers so that it can be installed onto the other.
N m
4. Use an appropriate anti-seize compound between mating surfaces and on rotating to stationary
components such as wear rings, bushings and the balance drum assembly. (Consult vendor if the
anti-seize can be used on non-metallic wear rings)
o
C
h) Install balance drum assembly (if used).
i) Complete installation of any other components such as spacers, shaft sleeves, shaft sleeve nuts, keys,
r
balance drum, spring washers or gaskets onto the rotor assembly.

Fo
j) Perform a lift check per 14.8.4.3 and determine if the lift is acceptable.
k) Verify the axial float per 14.8.4.4 and compare to Annex W. If a problem exists, determine the reason
for the problem and correct.
l) Measure the overall length of the assembly (“CM”) and compare to the assembly that was removed, as
181 of 241
well as the OEM information and Annex W.
m) Determine the correct position of the impellers to diffuser vane section. Consider any thermal expansion
that needs to be considered. Typically, this position should be approximately 50% of the rotor axial
float. If the position is not near 50%, stop and evaluate.
n) With the rotor in the desired axial position, take a measurement that can be repeated once the assembly
y
is installed in the pump case and the position of the impellers is not possible.
n nl
Note: Assembling the components in a vertical orientation can provide for better assembly and more
tio O
accurate float verification than horizontal assembling.
This completes the process for assembling the rotor and diffuser assembly.
bu se
13.3.4.3 Assembling of Between Bearing Diffuser Style Pumps with Interference Fit Impellers (BB1, BB2,
BB3, BB4 & BB5)
tri U
13.3.4.3.1 Refer to Annex P, Figure P-3 for the balancing process of between bearing diffuser style
is 0
pumps with interference fit impellers.
D 01
a) The deliverable of section 13 for these style pumps is an assembled rotor with diffusers staged between
impellers.
al 5
b) This assembly is typically termed a bundle. Refer to section 14 for assembling this subassembly into
the pump.
er lot
● 13.3.4.3.2 If specified, the rotor assembly should be assembled without the diffusers and then taken
en al
apart and reassembled with the diffusers in accordance with the following:
a) Install mandrel balanced impellers onto the shaft without the diffusers.
B
rG e

Fo itte
W/N, determine the cause before proceeding. If the check balance does not exceed 12 W/N, perform
a multi plane dynamic balance of the rotor to a maximum residual unbalance of 4W/N.
ot m
d) A residual unbalance check should be performed per 13.4 and Annex Q.

N m
e) Disassemble the rotor per section 10.

o
C
f) Perform inspections of the rotor components to verify that the components are still within the
recommendations of the runouts and dimensions identified in Annex W.
r
g) Reassemble the rotor per 13.3.4.3.

Fo
Note: Disassembling the rotor components can distort or damage components.
13.3.4.3.3 The rotor and diffusers (inner bundle assembly) should be assembled and balanced in
accordance with 13.3.4.2.
13.3.4.4 Assembling of Between Bearing Diffuser style pumps with clearance fit impellers (BB1, BB2,
BB3, BB4 and BB5)
182 of 241
13.3.4.4.1 Refer to Annex P, Figure P-4 for the balancing process of between bearing diffuser style
pumps with clearance fit impellers.
a) This style pump requires disassembly of the rotor after the rotor runouts and check balance have been
verified.
b) The rotor for this style pump should not be balanced as an assembly.
y
c) Due to clearance fit of impellers their eccentricity may not be repeatable
n nl
d) Trim balancing can result in the final assembly having a higher residual unbalance due to possible
tio O
repositioning of the impellers on re-assembly.
bu se
The deliverable of section 13 for these style pumps is an assembled rotor with diffusers staged between
impellers. Refer to section 14 for assembling this subassembly into the pump.
tri U
● 13.3.4.4.2 If specified, rotor should be assembled with the diffusers without performing a multi plane
dynamic balance of the rotor. Refer to “if specified” in Figure P-4
is 0
13.3.4.4.3 The rotor should be assembled and balanced in accordance with the following:
D 01
a) Assemble the rotor with the mandrel balanced impellers without the diffusers. Complete 13.3.4.4.4.
al 5
er lot
en al
W/N, determine the cause before proceeding

B
d) A residual unbalance check should be performed per 13.4 and Annex Q

rG e
e) Disassemble the rotor per section 10.

Fo itte
13.3.4.4.4 For rotor assemblies that utilize a shaft nut to tighten the components together onto the shaft,
the runout of the assembly should be recorded after tightening the shaft end nut.
ot m
a) If the runout exceeds the values identified in Annex W, inspect the mating surfaces for each component
to determine the reason for the excessive runout.
N m
b) Reassemble the rotor and re-verify the runout after correcting any components that are out of square.
o
C
c) After successful assembly, mark all components so they can be reinstalled in the position and orientation
upon reassembly.
r
d) When re-machining the components to correct squareness, verify that the positioning of the impellers is
Fo
still correct after this re-machining.
e) Leaving the shaft nut loose is not an acceptable method to resolve this issue as the axial hydraulic
loading on the components will cause the same situation as tightening the shaft nut.
f) Several attempts can be necessary to correct this situation.
13.3.4.4.5 The rotor and diffusers (inner bundle assembly) should be assembled and balanced in
accordance with 13.3.4.2.
183 of 241
13.3.4.4.6 Rotor assembly dimensional checks should be documented.
13.4 Residual Unbalance Testing
Residual unbalance testing per Annex Q should be performed as indicated in Annex P flow charts.
Residual unbalance testing, should be performed after the completion of all work, but prior to the
y
installation of trim parts, such as the thrust collar assembly and coupling hub that can be removed for
routine field maintenance.
n nl
13.5 Installation of Trim Parts and Coupling Hub
tio O
● 13.5.1 Install trim parts (field removable parts) such as the thrust assembly and seal sleeves. If
bu se
specified, the coupling hub should be installed.
13.5.2 After the installation of all trim parts such as the thrust assembly and coupling, the rotor’s balance
tri U
should be verified to assure that it is still within the prescribed tolerance.
13.5.3 If the addition of components, such as coupling hubs, seal sleeves, thrust collars; exceeds Umax
is 0
for the rotor, the unbalance problem should be corrected appropriately. Component balance corrections
D 01
of field removable parts should be approved by the owner.
13.5.4 Balance corrections on the coupling or thrust collar are not permitted.
al 5
13.5.4.1 If it appears that the installation of the coupling resulted in an unbalance that exceeds the
er lot
prescribed tolerance, the specifics should be reviewed by the repair shop to determine the cause of the
problem.
en al
13.5.4.2 The repair shop should then contact the owner to determine the appropriate correction(s) to the
problem.
B
13.5.4.3 A coupling could have been balanced as an assembly. Prior to an additional component balance
rG e
of the hub the previous balance method should be reviewed.

Fo itte
13.5.5 If balance corrections are necessary on trim parts that are not keyed to the shaft, such as a
hydraulically mounted thrust collar, the individual trim parts should be clearly match-marked to enable
correct re-assembly in the field.
ot m
13.5.6 If balance corrections are made to the rotor trim parts, an additional residual unbalance test will not
N m
be necessary if both of the following conditions are met:

o
13.5.6.1 The same balance machine is used for the trim corrections as was used for the residual
unbalance test on the rotor, and the trim corrections are performed within 3 days of the residual
C
unbalance test.
r
13.5.6.2 The documented unbalance indicated by the balance machine readouts and the residual
Fo
unbalance test performed on the completed rotor agreed within 10%.
13.6 Balancing Equipment and Documentation
13.6.1 The rotor balancing machine calibration should be verified prior to balancing in accordance with
the repair shop’s procedure.
13.6.2 Balance machines should be capable of providing the following information:
184 of 241
a) Plane separation
b) Dynamic balance
c) Static and couple balance
13.6.3 Documentation of initial balance, final balance and residual unbalance check (if needed per Annex
y
P) should be provided.
n nl
14 Shop Assembly of Pump
tio O
This section assumes that all repair-modification work has been completed and that all components are
ready to be assembled for the pump. For certain types of pumps as identified in section 13.3.4, the rotor
bu se
sub assembly could have already been assembled.
14.1 Preparation for Pump Assembly (all pumps)
tri U
14.1.1 This section covers the pump assembly methods. All inspections and dimensional verifications
is 0
during the assembly should be recorded on owner approved inspection forms having the same
information in Annex W.
D 01
14.1.2 All sub-assemblies and components (including all keys, fasteners, O-rings and gaskets) for the
build have been cleaned, inspected, freed of burrs, validated for use and are ready for final assembly.
al 5
14.1.3 Safety considerations should address:
er lot
a) Sharp corners
en al
b) Hot surfaces
B
c) Heavy components
rG e
d) Off centered lifting

Fo itte
e) Chemicals (lubricants & cleaning)
f) Electrical items
ot m
g) Pinch points
N m
h) Tripping hazards.
o
C
14.1.4 The following components should be replaced with new components:

a) O-rings
r
Fo
b) Gaskets
c) Rolling element bearings, locknuts and tabbed lock washers.
14.1.5 Refer to the instruction manual and cross-sectional drawing to become familiar with the assembly
sequence and the axial, radial and assembly settings. Refer to Annex W for additional clearance
information. Obtain seal drawing and review in detail.
185 of 241
14.1.6 Determine the torque values for fasteners and the bolting tightening sequences. Typically, the
OEM’s requirements are used. If the equipment OEM’s recommendations are not available, utilize the
information in Annex S.
14.1.7 Verify the following prior to assembly:

a) OEM information for the specific pump
y
b) Disassembly records are available during re-assembly
n nl
c) Upgrades, repairs and new components are completed and meet sections 9 and 10.
tio O
d) Specific owner recommendations are incorporated into the assembly process.
bu se
e) All assembly documentation / forms and inspection points are identified.
tri U
f) Fits and clearances of components should be calculated and recorded in advance of pump assembly
and should be available for review.
is 0
g) Impeller(s) axial positioning data is available.
D 01
h) Gasket dimensions have been verified.
al 5
i) Rotors and components should have been balanced in accordance with section 13 and Annex P.
er lot
j) Sub-assemblies are complete including wear ring(s) and bushing(s) installation.
en al
k) Testing such as PMI, Hydrostatic tests and NDT has been completed. All hydrostatic testing fluid has
been removed.
B
l) Fastener markings match work scope.

rG e
m) Special installation for non-metallic components has been identified and addressed with the material
Fo itte
manufacturer.
n) Assembly lubricants and adhesives for components, fasteners, gaskets and O-rings are available and
ot m
should be compatible for the component and process fluid.

N m
o) Measurement equipment such as dial indicators and micrometers are available.

o
p) Assembly tooling, fixtures, contact verification compound or thickness gauge materials are available.
C
q) Provisions for mounting of instrumentation.

r
r) Proximity probe target areas are protected.

Fo
s) Bearing temperature wiring is protected.
t) Work area to have the proper certified lifting devices and clamping devices. The work area should also
be clean and sufficiently lighted.
u) All hand and special tooling and measuring instruments should be available for the assembly process.
186 of 241
Rotor rotational tooling should not damage the shaft.
Note: In some cases, pump specific tooling, tooling specifications and procedures are supplied with
pumps from the OEM of the pump such as cartridge cradle, hydraulic coupling or thrust collar tooling, ring
and plug gauges.
Cleaning solutions and lint-free shop towels should be available.
y
n nl
14.1.8 Dowels and dowel holes should be free of burrs. Re-drilled and ream holes if necessary. Have
the equipment and dowels ready for re-dowelling if necessary. Cylindrical dowels are preferred per API
tio O
610.
14.1.9 Bearing housings
bu se
Confirm that:
tri U
a) the mounting surfaces for the bearing housings, connections, oil passages or any other instrumentation
provisions for the bearing housings are clean and free of burrs
is 0
b) the lubrication method, connections and auxiliary components match the lubrication system arrangement
D 01
c) oil feed and drain holes match the corresponding oil ports in the bearing housing
al 5
d) orifices are identified and properly installed in 10.5.1.1
er lot
e) for pure oil mist applications requiring oil drain-back holes to be plugged the holes have been plugged
to prevent the oil mist from bypassing the bearings(s)
en al
f) the constant oiler can be placed on the side of the bearing housing such that the shaft rotates upward to
B
the oiler as shown in Figure 10.26.
14.1.10 Instrumentation, verify as a minimum:

rG e
a) instrumentation and mounting brackets are available

Fo itte
b) instrumentation is correct
ot m
c) instrumentation calibrated and functional

N m
d) bearing temperature elements are installed, operate and if utilized, provisions for instruments are
provided and properly located. Verify that instrumentation wiring will exit the provisions provided in the
o
bearing housing
C
e) gauges such as for pressure, temperature, flow and level .

r
14.1.11 Mechanical seal

Fo
14.1.11.1 Obtain seal drawing and flush plan arrangement information to verify proper installation of the
seal and auxiliary components.
14.1.11.2 Verify that the seal(s) to be used are the correct seal(s) for the pump by verifying the seal
drawing number(s). Between bearing pumps typically use different seals for each end due to rotation.
Verify that all additional components such as gaskets or O-rings are available and in good condition.
Back out the setscrews on seal assemblies that utilize radial drive setscrews so the setscrews cannot
drag on the shaft.
187 of 241
14.1.11.3 Maintain the seal(s) and components in a clean environment until installation.
14.2 Final Assembly – General (all pumps)
14.2.1 The OEM’s information should be used. If this information is not available the information in this
document can be used.
y
14.2.2 Notify customer of readiness to commence assembly. Customer witness may be necessary.
n nl
14.2.3 All assembly fits, runouts and dimensions should be verified and documented during the assembly
process. The applicable fits, runouts, finishes and dimensions are identified in section 14 or Annex W for
tio O
the specific components or pump classifications. Runout measurements that can be influenced by
indicator bracket sag or bearing clearances should be taken in the vertical orientation of the
bu se
component(s), if practical.
NOTE: The accuracy of some runout measurements can be influenced by indicator bracket sag or
tri U
bearing clearances. Obtaining these runout measurements in the vertical orientation can improve the
accuracy of the readings.
is 0
14.2.4 Document the assembly process with photographs (photographs should be taken at various
D 01
angles or positions to provide clarity), such as:
a) Job number and name plate
al 5
b) Assembled element showing vane orientation
er lot
c) Element installed in casing or cover
en al
d) Anti-rotation pin installations

B
e) Hydrodynamic bearing contact verifications

rG e
f) Oil ring installation

Fo itte
g) Seal gland orientation
h) Final assembled pump

ot m
i) Auxiliary tubing/piping system components.

N m
14.2.5 The procedure for heating rotor components for reassembly should be per 13.1.6.
o
C
14.2.6 Rotating the pump assembly should be kept to a minimum for wearing part material
combinations that are susceptible to galling.
r
14.2.7 Assembly lubricants

Fo
14.2.7.1 Assembly lubricants should be used for the components as identified in 14.2.7.2 through
14.2.7.7.
14.2.7.1.1 The lubricant should be compatible with the component’s materials, the temperature
application and the process fluid properties.
14.2.7.1.2 Wipe off all excess lubricant. Care should be taken to prevent this lubricant from entering
bearing assembly.
188 of 241
14.2.7.2 For fasteners all mating surfaces (such as threads and washer/nut faces) should be lubricated.
14.2.7.2.1 The friction coefficient of the lubricant should be considered for all fastener tightening values.
14.2.7.2.2 If a lubricant is not specified by the OEM, consider a nickel based lubricant.
14.2.7.3 All mating surfaces for wearing components should be lubricated. If a lubricant is not specified
y
by the OEM, consider a nickel based lubricant. For components susceptible to galling, consider using a
specialized anti-galling compound.
n nl
14.2.7.4 All non-gasketed mating joint surfaces should be lubricated per the OEM recommendations.
tio O
Typically, if no special material is recommended, a light spray of light oil is acceptable.
bu se
14.2.7.5 Gasketed mating joint surfaces
Lubricants or compounds are typically not used for gasketed mating joint surfaces. A lightly sprayed
tri U
adhesive may be used to hold the gasket in place during assembly.
14.2.7.6 O-rings should have lubricant compatible with the O-ring material and the process fluid
is 0
properties applied to the O-rings to prevent spiral or rolling damage.
D 01
14.2.7.7 A thread lubricant compatible with the process and of proper temperature specification should be
used on all threaded connections. Thread tape should not be used.
al 5
14.2.8 Repaired keyways and replacement keys should comply with Annex T.
er lot
14.2.9 Mechanical Seal Assembly into the Pump
en al
14.2.9.1 Preparation for mechanical seal installation

B
14.2.9.1.1 The shaft should be clean and free of burrs. For applications with an O-ring passing over a
keyway or step in the shaft, confirm that the keyway and shaft step edges are not sharp.
rG e
Fo itte
14.2.9.1.2 For arrangements that utilize radial setscrews into the shaft sleeve for seal driving, verify that
the location of the setscrews to the shaft sleeve undercut area (if provided) are in alignment.
14.2.9.1.3 For shafts with burnished areas (proximity probe targets), carefully remove any protective
ot m
material from the shaft. Do not use a knife or other damaging device to remove the protective material.
N m
14.2.9.1.4 Seal chamber(s) and gasket area should clean and free of burrs. Confirm that the O-ring
sealing area of the shaft is in good condition.
o
14.2.9.1.5 Lubricate and install any studs into the pump cover or pressure casing seal chamber for
C
mounting the seal gland plate per 14.2.7

r
14.2.9.1.6 Install any additional seal components such as throat bushings.

Fo
14.2.9.1.7 Verify any seal gland fittings for seal flush piping that cannot be installed after the seal gland
plate is mounted, are installed prior to installation of the seal assembly.
14.2.9.1.8 Verify the rotation identified on the seal gland plate per the pump’s rotation.
14.2.9.2 Installing Mechanical Seal Assembly into Pump
14.2.9.2.1 Verify all components are clean.
189 of 241
14.2.9.2.2 Perform the installation steps as indicated in each pump type’s detailed “Final Assembly”.
14.2.9.2.3 Verify that all setscrews on the seal drive collar are fully backed out to prevent scratching the
shaft. Verify that the mechanical seal setting devices are locked into their setting positions in the sleeve.
Hook or non-cartridge style seals are installed differently than cartridge seals.
14.2.9.2.4 Apply O-ring lubricant to the O-rings inside the seal sleeve, to the shaft and gland plate as
y
applicable.
n nl
14.2.9.2.5 Install gaskets. Verify that O-rings or gaskets are properly located in the mechanical seal
gland plate to pump cover or seal chamber.
tio O
14.2.9.2.6 Verify seal gland plate clock position.
bu se
14.2.9.2.7 Support and carefully slide the mechanical seal assembly into position onto the shaft. The
shaft should be vertically supported or lifted as the seal assembly is installed.
tri U
14.2.9.2.8 During seal gland plate installation, verify that the seal gland plate engages concentrically into
the pump casing cover or seal chamber.
is 0
D 01
14.2.9.2.9 Lubricate the gland plate studs before installing the nuts and washers per 14.2.7
14.2.9.2.10 Tighten the seal gland nuts until the seal assembly seats, metal to metal, against the pump
al 5
pressure casing cover or seal chamber. Alternate the tightening sequence to evenly draw these parts
together and then torque to the value in Annex S if not provided on the seal drawing.
er lot
14.2.9.2.11 Refer to the seal installation drawing for proper seal setting. Do not set seal until all axial float
measurements have been completed.
en al
14.2.9.2.12 After all axial end float measurements have been completed and prior to tightening any seal
B
drive setscrews, refer to the seal drawing for recommendations of shaft dimpling for the setscrew
locations. This dimple procedure should be completed without damaging the threads in the seal sleeve.
rG e
Other drive collar locking arrangements may be used by the seal OEM.
Fo itte
14.2.9.2.13 Dimpling the shaft at the seal drive collar setscrew locations may be completed to provide
positive retention of the sleeve and minimize shaft damage that would make it difficult to remove the
sleeve. Shaft dimpling considerations are:
ot m
a) Drill size should not damage the threads.

N m
b) Drill should have a 118 degree included angle point.

o
c) Drill to the ½ depth of the point of the drill.

C
d) Remove all burrs and shaving.

r
Fo
e) Setscrew should be cup point.
For example, a ¼ - 20 setscrew requires a #7 drill which is 0.201 in. diameter with the ½ depth of 0.030
in.
14.2.9.2.14 Seal drive collar setscrews should be installed with thread lubricant per 12.2.6 and tightened
to the per the mechanical seal drawing. Tighten the setscrews into the shaft using an alternating pattern
to prevent distorting the mechanical seal sleeve.
190 of 241
14.2.9.2.15 After tightening the seal drive collar setscrews, disengage and reposition the seal setting
devices so that they are out of the way of operation of the seal and securely tightened.
14.2.9.2.16 If the pump will be transported to the field after reassembly, the seal setting devices may be
left engaged. Install a caution tag stating that the seal setting devices have NOT been removed, such as
“Verify that the seal setting devices are disengaged prior to operating the pump.” The setting devices can
be removed during field installation kept for future use by the owner.
y
14.2.9.2.17 Any open threaded connection not connected at the repair shop should have a solid metal
n nl
plug of material equal to the component it is attached. The plugs are to have a thread sealant and should
be tightened.
tio O
14.2.9.2.18 The metal plugs should be solid round or solid hexagonal head plugs furnished in accordance
bu se
with the dimensional information per ASME B16.11. Square head plugs should not be used, due to their
tendency to be damaged during installation and removal. ASME B16.11 is referenced to prevent the
supply of hollow or cored plugs;
tri U
14.2.9.2.19 Save the seal drawing and shipping container-box for future reference, if desired.
is 0
D 01
14.2.10.1 Bearing housing deflector discs should be set after final bearing end float setting is complete, to
not affect the thrust bearing end float measurement. Pull back approximately 1/64in from housing face
al 5
and setscrew in place (verify O-ring is installed when applicable).
er lot
14.2.10.2 Bearing housing sealing devices with internal oil spill back holes should have the hole
positioned typically at the 6:00 position.
en al
14.2.10.3 When installing a bearing housing shield (isolator), apply a surface lubricant to the bore of the
bearing housing shield and the corresponding location on the shaft.
B
14.2.10.3.1 Install the bearing housing shield onto the shaft pushing it until it fully contacts the grooves in
rG e
the bearing end cover.

Fo itte
14.2.10.3.2 Slightly withdraw the bearing shield to prevent contact with the bearing end cover during
operation. Tighten the bearing shield setscrews to lock it to the shaft.
ot m
14.2.11 Bearing Installation

N m
For hydrodynamic bearing applications see 14.8.3 and 14.8.4.

o
14.2.11.1 Rolling Element Bearings

C
14.2.11.1.1 Bearings should meet API 610, the specific pump OEM and bearing vendor
recommendations and conform to 12.6.6.
r
Fo
14.2.11.1.2 The method of locating, retaining and mounting should be in accordance with the following
from API 610:
a) Bearings should be retained on the shaft with an interference fit and fitted into the housing with a
diametric clearance, both in accordance with Annex W.
b) Bearings should be mounted directly on the shaft. Bearing carriers are acceptable only with purchaser
approval.
c) Bearings should be located on the shaft using shoulders, collars or other positive locating devices. Snap
191 of 241
rings and spring-type washers for the purpose of positively locating, fixed mount bearings are not
acceptable.
d) The device used to lock thrust bearings to shafts should be restricted to a nut with a tongue-type lock
washer.
Cylindrical Roller type rolling element bearings can have different specific requirements.
y
n nl
14.2.11.1.3 Bearing to shaft fits should be per Annex W and bearing to bearing housing fits should be per
Annex W.
tio O
14.2.11.1.4 The use of chemical lock coatings (glues) to aid in the security of bearings on shafts or
housings are not acceptable.
bu se
14.2.11.1.5 Refer to Annex F for rolling element bearing installation.
tri U
14.2.11.1.6 All lubrication holes, passages and ports in the housing(s) should be flushed out and
confirmed that they will allow passage of the clean lubricant. Verify that all bearing oil passages are clean
is 0
and are unobstructed. Pure mist assemblies can have ports intentionally blocked.
D 01
14.2.11.1.7 Use the service lubricant to pre-lubricate bearings during and after installation.
14.2.11.1.8 Install oil rings if used, and verify oil level submergence. In absence of original design data,
al 5
refer to Annex W.
er lot
14.2.11.2 Rolling element thrust bearing assembly
en al
14.2.11.2.1 Rolling element thrust bearing assemblies are typically installed as a pair at one end of the
pump as a combination thrust/radial bearing. Verify that:
B
a) replacements indicate the proper pairing, axial clearance, contact angle, cage type designations
rG e
b) they are mounted in the proper direction

Fo itte
14.2.11.2.2 For paired angular contact bearings, verify correct bearing mounting orientation is established
prior to build by referring to original design specification. Typical arrangements are as shown in Figures
14.1 through 14.3. Record complete vendor’s part number and orientation. Typically, the arrangement is
ot m
the back-to-back.
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 14.1 - Back-to-back Bearing Arrangement
Figure 14.2 - Face-to-face Bearing Arrangement
192 of 241
y
Figure 14.3 - Back-to-back and Tandem Bearing Arrangement
n nl
14.2.11.2.3 Bearing to bearing drag
tio O
14.2.11.2.3.1 If a bearing shoulder ring is used between the thrust bearing inner ring and shaft shoulder
to control rotor running position, spacer rings should have faces parallel within 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm) as
bu se
indicated in Figure 14.4.
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
Figure 14.4 - Spacer and Bearing Parallelism

B
14.2.11.2.3.2 The axial clearance between the bearing and housing (end float) for duplex ball bearing
sets in a back to back mounting arrangement should be per Annex W with adjustments made by
rG e
shimming or machining the end covers. Measure and record the end float.
Fo itte
14.2.11.2.4 Greased bearings should be packed with the grease during assembly. Verify grease type and
viscosity with the owner.
ot m
14.2.12 Fastener Installation

N m
14.2.12.1 Preparation for assembly

o
14.2.12.1.1 Fasteners include setscrews, studs, bolting, washer and nuts.

C
14.2.12.1.2 Fastener designs include machine bolts, body studs and through studs. A washer may or not
be necessary, depending on the application. The fasteners are used for machine component assembly
r
or pressure containment. Consider using hardened washers per ASTM F436/F436M.

Fo
14.2.12.1.3 In preparation for assembly of studs, bolting, washers or nuts, confirm that:
193 of 241
a) stud, bolt, nut or washer are in good condition with no damaged threads and are free of burrs
b) nut face surface finish and geometry have been verified
c) the fastener material and torque specification is correct for the application
d) correct lubricants for the application are available per 14.2.7
y
n nl
e) tightening sequence should be used, minimum of three steps of tightening
tio O
f) the method for obtaining the joint integrity is determined, such as:
1. torque number method
bu se
2. turn of the nut method
3. bolt stretch method
tri U
14.2.12.1.4 Run a nut, by hand, the entire length of the stud or bolt to assure that the threads have not
been damaged
is 0
D 01
14.2.12.1.5 Depending on the design, studs may need to be installed prior to the installation positioning of
the component that is being bolted to the other joint.
al 5
14.2.12.2 Installation of studs or bolts into blind holes
er lot
14.2.12.2.1 For studs threaded into blind threaded holes, both ends of the stud should have the threads
removed a length sufficient to allow the stud end to bottom in the hole (typically 1.5 threads). This is
recommended because the tapped threads of the hole are not completed at the bottom of the hole.
en al
a) Verify sufficient thread engagement still occurs.

B
b) Threads are removed at the end of the stud to allow the stud to bottom without damaging the end threads
in the hole.
rG e
Fo itte
c) Threads are removed from both ends of the stud to allow either end of the stud to be inserted into the
threaded hole.
ot m
14.2.12.2.2 To install the studs, use either a stud installation tool or double nuts, to provide a means of
installing the stud.
N m
14.2.12.2.3 Lubricate the stud per 14.2.7. Thread the stud into the threaded hole until it bottoms out.
Torque to 10% of the stud’s final full torque value. Do not use an impact wrench to install a stud.
o
Remove the stud installation tool or double nut. Assure that the threads are still in good condition from
C
the device used to install the stud and that a nut will screw onto the stud without any problems.
14.2.12.3 Verify that bolting or studs are long enough considering any washers or nuts. Studs or bolting
r
should have a minimum two threads exposed beyond each nut or threaded component. Avoid excessive
Fo
additional threads beyond the nuts as practical.
14.2.12.4 Tightening procedure
14.2.12.4.1 Install the pump components using the appropriate bolt, stud, washer or nut combination.
When installing the components, complete any centering or gasketing.
194 of 241
14.2.12.4.2 Assure that the nut’s threads and mating surface are clean. Thread all of the nuts down to the
mating surface by hand. Do not use impact wrenches to “bring up the nut” as this is uncontrolled and can
damage the bolt, stud or nut.
14.2.12.4.3 Nuts should be tightened and torqued per Annex S using the recommended sequence. Refer
to OEM’s procedures for other tightening methods. Multipliers have losses; therefore, factors need to be
applied.
y
14.2.13 Gaskets
n nl
14.2.13.1 Confirm that the gasket surface finishes have been verified, the gasket material & design is
tio O
correct for the application and that the surfaces are clean and free of any residue such as oil. Gasket
styles include spiral wound, jacketed metal, solid metal, sheet or liquid formulated.
bu se
14.2.13.2 Follow the OEM specification for the gasket.
tri U
a) Verify all surfaces of base material and the gasket are clean and free of foreign material
b) Use of a specifically design material, such as spray adhesive, for securing the gasket during assembly
is 0
can be used. Do not use tape. Verify the holding material chemistry is suitable for the application and
D 01
will not affect joint sealing integrity. Follow the instructions of the holding product
c) Do not use more than 1 gasket in the same joint unless recommended by assembly procedure such as
al 5
for inner bundle pump assemblies
er lot
d) Assemble the joint fasteners in a sequential stepped process to avoid gasket distortion.
14.3 OH 1, OH 2, OH 3, and two-stage OH (Final Assembly)

en al
14.3.1 General
B
14.3.1.1 Section 14.3 contains information for specific pump types that should be used in conjunction with
rG e
the information in 14.2. The information in 14.3.2 and 14.3.3 are specific verifications that are referenced
Fo itte
in the specific pump assembly section. The method and results can be adjusted for the specific pump
types . The rotor components, as appropriate, have been component balanced in section 13 and should
be assembled in this section.
ot m
14.3.1.2 In preparation for OH final assemblies, install any one piece bushings that have not been
previously installed onto the rotor assembly.
N m
14.3.2 Radial lift measurement

o
14.3.2.1 Radial lift measurements for OH pumps are typically performed to verify the bearing clearance
C
within the bearing housing. This value is influenced by the total clearance between the bearing OD and
housing ID, bearing nut preloading, radial internal clearance in the bearings and the distance of the
r
indicator to the bearing. The mechanical seal is left off for this measurement.
Fo
14.3.2.2 To perform the lift measurement, use a dial indicator and gently lift up and push down on the
shaft (one end at a time) as shown in Figure 14.5. Do not exert excessive force as this will deflect the
shaft and give a false reading.
195 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
Figure 14.5 Assembly Lift Measurement for OH1, OH2 & OH3 Pumps
tri U
14.3.2.3 Record the final lift measurement on the assembly documents for future reference.
is 0
14.3.3 Axial end float measurement
D 01
14.3.3.1 Axial end float measurements for OH pumps are typically performed to verify the bearing
clearance within the bearing housing. This value is influenced by factors such as bearing nut preload,
al 5
internal bearing clearance, gasketing, and housing bore depth. The mechanical seal should be left off for
this measurement. The axial end float should be set by using shims, spacers or adjusting the end cover
er lot
for the specific pump arrangement. The axial end float should be per Annex W. The axial end float can
be influenced by the sealant that is used on the end cover and thus a very thin coating of the sealant
should be used.
en al
14.3.3.2 To perform the axial end float measurement, gently push back and forth on the rotor assembly
B
as shown in Figure 14.6. Do not exert excessive force as this will deflect the shaft and give a false
reading. If the value exceeds or is smaller than the value in Annex W, then the housing, shaft and
rG e
bearings should be evaluated for any problems.

Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 14.6 - Axial End Float Measurement for OH1, OH2 & OH3 Pumps
14.3.3.3 Record the final axial end float on the assembly documents for future reference.
196 of 241
14.3.4 Setting open impeller designs
For pumps with an open impeller design, typically the open side of the impeller to the pump case is a
critical measurement.
14.3.4.1 The recommended clearance between the impeller and the pump case should be measured
y
14.3.4.2 Setting the thrust bearings or impeller shimming is used to establish this location.
n nl
14.3.4.3 Refer to OEM manual for detailed instructions.
tio O
14.4 OH1, OH2, and OH3 (Specific Final Assembly)
bu se
14.4.1 For assembling OH1 and OH2 style pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.3 in addition to the
recommendations identified in 14.4.
tri U
The assembly steps indicated in this section apply to the majority of OH1, OH2, and OH3 type pumps.
However special circumstances can apply to the particular equipment design. Always start by following
the OEM’s manual as the first guide to any re-assembly process.
is 0
D 01
Note: Assembling OH pumps with the housings properly clamped to the workstation in the vertical
position can improve measuring capability and ease installation.
al 5
14.4.2 Power End Assembly (bearing housing) should be assembled as follows:
.
er lot
14.4.2.1 For OH1 and OH2, assemble oil rings or flinger onto the shaft. Install each ring in the location
groove provided on the shaft. Lock oil flinger to the shaft using setscrew or shrink fit.
en al
14.4.2.2 For OH3grease bearings designs install the spacer bushing or locating rings onto the shaft. For
oil circulation install the pumping ring and oil thrower (flinger).
B
14.4.2.3 If the bearing housing is designed for pure oil mist lubrication, then there will be no pumping
rG e
rings or flinger used.

Fo itte
Note: If the bearing housing is designed for purge oil mist, there will are typically oil rings or a flinger.
14.4.2.4 Annex F gives recommendations for installing bearing.

ot m

14.4.2.5 Install the rotor assembly with bearings into the bearing housing through the drive end side of the
N m
bearing housing. The oil rings or flinger (if applicable) should be carefully fitted through this same
shoulder. Oil rings will need to be lifted to allow passage past this shoulder while the flinger should pass
o
easily through if centered.

C
14.4.2.6 The radial bearing will slide with a slight drag into the bore in the bearing housing.
r
14.4.2.7 Firmly push the rotor and bearing assembly into the bearing housing until the thrust bearings are
Fo
seated against the shoulder in the bearing housing.
Note: Excessive force or hammering the rotor assembly into place can damage the bearings and shaft.
14.4.2.8 If an O-ring seal is used for the bearing housing’s drive end cover; clean, lubricate and install any
O-ring seal into the groove in the Drive End bearing end cover. If in lieu of an O-ring, the design uses
gaskets, then add the gasket to the bearing end cover.
14.4.2.9 Install the bearing end covers into the bearing housing without bearing housing isolator/shield
and torque the end cover bolts to the recommended torque value.
197 of 241
If a hole is required for the entry of the oil mist through the end cover, the holes for the gasket or shims
should be aligned with the end cover.
14.4.2.10 Setup a dial indicator to measure the axial movement at the end of the pump shaft relative to
the drive end bearing cover. Remove cover and correct as necessary per 14.3.3.
y
14.4.2.11 Re-install the end covers, re-torque to the correct value and record the final axial reading on the
inspection form.
n nl
14.4.2.12 Set up dial indicators and measure the TIR of the bearing housing face and cover register bore.
tio O
The shaft TIR measurements should be taken with the assembly in the vertical position.
bu se
Note: TIR on the bearing housing face and cover register bore with respect to the shaft is affected by the
bearing internal clearances and shaft weight when the assembly is in the horizontal position.
tri U
14.4.2.13 Install bearing housing isolators. If in lieu of an isolator a bearing shield is used, then apply a
lubricant to the bore of the bearing shield and the corresponding location on the shaft. Install the bearing
shield onto the shaft pushing it until it fully contacts the grooves in the drive end bearing end cover.
is 0
Slightly withdraw the bearing shield to prevent contact with the bearing end cover during operation.
D 01
Tighten the bearing shield setscrews to lock it to the shaft.
The bearing isolator oil drain port or slot should be located such that it faces down (6 o’clock position with
al 5
the bearing housing in a horizontal position) and back into the bearing housing.
er lot
14.4.2.14 Set up the dial indicator(s) and perform the lift measurements per 14.3.2 and repeat TIR
measurements of the bearing housing face, bore and shaft taken in 14.4.2.12. TIR measurements should
be taken with the assembly in the vertical position. Determine if there is any binding or rubbing on the
en al
Bearing Isolator as the shaft is rotated.

B
14.4.2.15 By viewing through the ports on the top of the bearing housings, verify that the oil rings (if used)
are still in position in the shaft grooves. If not, re-position the rings into the grooves. Install the oil ring
rG e
retainers into these threaded inspection ports (use thread lubricant if applicable) and tighten to the
Fo itte
recommended torque value.
14.4.2.16 Lubricate the bores of the heat sink (if provided), and cooling fan (if provided).
ot m
14.4.2.17 Install the non-drive end heat sink (if provided) and the drive end cooling fan. Tighten these
components to the shaft with the locking screws. Verify the fan rotation per the OEM drawing is correct.
N m
14.4.2.18 Install the cooling fan shroud (if provided); tighten the mounting screws into the bearing
o
housing.
C
14.4.2.19 Set and lock the bearing housing assembly to a work table with the mechanical seal end of the
shaft extending off the end of the table. This will allow full access to this portion of the shaft for the next
r
assembly steps.
Fo
14.4.2.20 Install the pump coupling hub onto the pump shaft per 14.14.1.
14.4.2.21 This completes the process of assembling the shaft and bearing housing assembly.
14.4.3 Cover Assembly to the Shaft/Bearing Housing Assembly (back pull-out assembly)
This section provides information for assembling the cover assembly to the Shaft/Bearing Housing
Assembly (back pull-out assembly).
198 of 241
14.4.3.1 Lubricate and install the jackscrews in the locations provided. Be sure these screws do not
protrude past the mounting cover/case face surface.
14.4.3.2 Install a suitable lifting eye into the cover periphery at the proper location(s).
14.4.3.3 As the cover is circular in shape, verify the proper clock position of the cover to the shaft/bearing
housing assembly. Rotate the cover assembly to obtain the correct orientation.
y
14.4.3.4 Align the cover to bearing housing register fit and mounting holes. Using the mounting cap
n nl
screws, draw the cover up to the face of the bearing housing, obtaining a metal to metal fit. Secure by
torqueing the mounting bolts to the correct value. Setting the bearing housing vertically can facilitate the
tio O
assembly process. (Recheck oil ring position once pump is horizontal)
bu se
14.4.3.5 Install cover and do runout measurements. See Annex W for guidance.
14.4.3.6 Remove the cover.
tri U
14.4.3.7 Slide the seal onto the shaft up to the first obstruction and correctly orient the seal to the seal
gland studs. Refer to 14.2 for seal assembly information.
is 0
D 01
14.4.3.8 Install the cover to the bearing housing assembly and torque the mounting bolts to the correct
value
al 5
14.4.3.9 Slide the seal onto the seal gland studs, install the flange nuts and torque to the correct value.
er lot
14.4.3.10 Install the impeller key into the keyway in the shaft.
14.4.3.11 Coat the shaft diameter where the impeller fits with lubricant.
en al
14.4.3.12 Verify rotation of the shaft/bearing assembly and that the impeller vanes also have the correct
B
rotation.
rG e
14.4.3.13 Apply a lubricant to the front and back impeller wear ring running surfaces.
Fo itte
14.4.3.14 Carefully slide the impeller assembly with front and back wear rings onto the shaft until it fully
contacts the shaft shoulder. This is a snug fit and some heating of the impeller can be necessary.
ot m
14.4.3.15 Install the washer and the impeller retention nut (with lubricant) and torque to the correct value.
Complete the assembly process by positively locking the nut. The design can include a setscrew or tab
N m
washer.
o
CAUTION: Most impeller retention nuts use reverse threads to remain tight. Do not cross thread.
C
14.4.3.16 Rotate the shaft to determine if there is any binding or rubbing and correct as necessary.
r
14.4.3.17 This completes the assembly process for the Impeller/Cover/Shaft/ Bearing Housing assembly
Fo
(back pull-out assembly).
14.4.4 Pump Case to back pull-out Assembly
This section provides information for assembling the pump case to the Shaft/Bearing Housing Assembly
14.4.4.1 Apply lubricant to the inside bore of the case wear ring.
199 of 241
14.4.4.2 Set the pressure casing in its normal orientation with the case firmly mounted to a work table or
work stands. Setting the pump case vertically can facilitate the assembly process. Recheck oil ring
position once pump is horizontal.
14.4.4.3 Lubricate, install and seat all case/cover studs.
14.4.4.4 Install the case/cover gasket in the pressure casing.
y
14.4.4.5 Slide the back-pull-out assembly into the case, carefully aligning the wear ring and cover register
n nl
fit to the pump case.
tio O
14.4.4.6 Install the case/cover nuts onto the case studs and evenly tighten the nuts to draw the
assemblies together. Use an alternating pattern while tightening these nuts to bring the joint together,
bu se
metal to metal. Some older designs do not have a metal to metal joint and have a gap that should be
measured and evenly set with feeler gauges. Refer to the OEM operating manual for these pumps’
designs.
tri U
14.4.4.7 Torque all nuts to the proper torque value in the proper sequence.
is 0
14.4.4.8 Rotate the shaft to determine if there is any binding or rubbing and correct as necessary.
D 01
14.4.4.9 This completes the assembly process for the pump case to the Shaft/Bearing Housing Assembly
al 5
14.4.5 For OH1 and OH 2 proceed to 14.14.
er lot
14.5 Driver stand and motor installation – OH3 only
en al
This section provides information to install the driver stand and the motor.
B
14.5.1 Install the motor coupling hub per 14.14.1.

rG e
14.5.2 Assemble the motor support stand to the pump assembly. There are many motor stand
Fo itte
configurations. See OEM manual for specific instructions for motor support stand to pump assembly.
14.5.3 Clean the motor mounting flange surface.

ot m
14.5.4 Apply a light lubricant to the motor support stand mounting surface. This will allow the motor to
slide during the alignment process.
N m
14.5.5 Verify the proper clock position of the motor. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for the
o
location of the main conduit box. Rotate the motor to obtain the correct orientation.
C
14.5.6 Lift the motor and lower it down onto the motor support stand. Verify that the motor register bore
matches the support stand register fit and that the two mounting surfaces make up a “metal to metal” fit.
r
Fo
14.5.7 Lubricate and install the motor mounting cap screws. Tighten the cap screws only finger-tight.
14.5.8 Couple the pump and motor. Various coupling styles are used on OH3 pumps. Follow the OEM’s
procedures for installing the coupling based on the specific application.
14.5.9 Align the pump to motor shaft per section 18
14.5.10 Install dowels into the motor mounting flange to the support stand at two locations 180 degrees
apart, recheck the alignment and record the final value on the Inspection form.
200 of 241
14.5.11 If necessary, remove the coupling spacer and motor for transportation.
14.5.12 This completes the process for installing the driver stand and the motor.
14.5.2 Proceed to 14.14.
14.6 OH 4 (Specific Final Assembly)
y
14.6.1 For assembling OH4 style pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.3 in addition to the
n nl
recommendations in 14.6.
tio O
The assembly steps indicated in this section apply to the majority of OH4 type pumps; however special
circumstances can apply to the particular equipment. Always start by following the OEM’s manual as the
bu se
first guide to any re-assembly process.
The motor should have been verified as acceptable. Inspections should include, as a minimum;
tri U
dimensional, lift and end float measurements, runouts and that the motor is electrically and mechanically
sound.
is 0
14.6.2 Motor to Pump Alignment Process
D 01
This section provides information for verifying the pump shaft runout with the pump coupling to motor
assembled.
al 5
Motor to Pump Alignment Process (this is a dry run to verify that the two shafts are able to be aligned and
er lot
verifies alignment and perpendicularity of the seal chamber):
14.6.2.1 Position the pressure casing in the vertical orientation on the work surface.
en al
14.6.2.2 Clean all mounting surfaces on the case, cover and motor support stand.
B
14.6.2.3 Verify the proper clock position of the cover. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for the
rG e
correct orientation of the Cover.

Fo itte
14.6.2.4 Install the cover onto the pressure case (without the gasket). Lubricate and tighten the nuts in an
alternating pattern to the correct torque value.
ot m
14.6.2.5 Lower the shaft down through the mechanical seal chamber bore in the cover and let it rest at
the bottom of the pressure casing.
N m
14.6.2.6 Verify the proper clock position of the motor support stand by noting the location of the windows
o
on the General Arrangement drawing. Rotate the motor support stand to obtain the correct orientation.
C
14.6.2.7 Install the motor support stand onto the pump cover. Be sure a “metal to metal” fit is made by
the mounting surfaces. Lubricate, install and torque the motor support stand mounting cap screws in an
r
alternating pattern. Tighten to the correct torque value.

Fo
14.6.2.8 Clean the motor mounting flange surface.
14.6.2.9 Apply a light lubricant to the motor support stand mounting surface. This will allow the motor to
slide during the alignment process.
14.6.2.10 Verify the proper clock position of the motor. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for the
location of the main conduit box. Rotate the motor to obtain the correct orientation.
201 of 241
14.6.2.11 Lift the motor and lower it down onto the motor support stand. Verify that the motor register
bore matches the support stand register fit and that the two mounting surfaces make up a “metal to metal”
fit.
14.6.2.12 Lubricate and install the motor mounting cap screws. Tighten the cap screws only finger-tight.
14.6.2.13 Couple the pump and motor. Various coupling styles are used on OH4 pumps. Follow the
y
OEM’s procedures for installing the coupling based on the specific application. Vertical spacing is not
crucial at this point.
n nl
14.6.2.14 Position a dial indicator on the motor shaft to measure the alignment of the motor shaft to the
tio O
bore and face of the mechanical seal cavity.
bu se
14.6.2.15 Sweep the bore and re-position the motor so that the TIR does not exceed 0.003 in (0.076
mm). If alignment screws are not installed, a soft faced hammer blow on the motor mounting flange will
be sufficient to move the motor on the motor support stand.
tri U
14.6.2.16 Tighten evenly and torque the motor mounting cap screws/studs to the correct value in an
alternating pattern.
is 0
D 01
14.6.2.17 Measure the alignment of the pump shaft to the bore and face of the mechanical seal cavity.
14.6.2.17.1 If the TIR exceeds the renewal value in Annex W, this indicates that the shaft, coupling or
al 5
motor support stand needs correction by re-machining or replacement.
er lot
14.6.2.17.2 If the TIR is less than the renewal value in Annex W, drill and dowel the motor mounting
flange to the motor support stand at two locations 180 degrees apart. Install tapered dowels.
en al

14.6.2.18 Re-verify the alignment of the pump shaft to the mechanical seal cavity and record.
B

14.6.2.19 Disassemble the coupling and proceed to remove the motor, the pump shaft and cover.
rG e
14.6.2.20 Set the components aside in preparation for the final assembly.
Fo itte
14.6.2.21 This completes the process for installing the motor support stand and the motor to pump
alignment process dry run.
ot m
14.6.3 Shaft /Impeller Assembly

N m
This section provides information for assembling the impeller on the shaft.
o
14.6.3.1 Clamp the pump shaft to the work table or vise with v-type soft jaws to prevent marring the shaft
C
surface.
14.6.3.2 Install the Impeller Key into the keyway in the shaft. The key to keyway fit should be per Annex
r
W.
Fo
14.6.3.3 Verify the pump rotation and the correct orientation of the impeller for installation on the shaft.
14.6.3.4 Slide the impeller assembly onto the shaft until it fully contacts the shaft shoulder. This is a snug
fit and some heating of the impeller can be necessary.
14.6.3.5 Install the washer and the impeller retention nut (with lubricant) and torque to the correct value.
14.6.3.6 Complete the assembly process by positively locking the nut. The design can include a cap
screw and tab washer.
202 of 241
CAUTION: Most impeller retention nuts use reverse threads to remain tight. Do not cross thread.
14.6.3.7 Complete the assembly process by positively locking the nut with the setscrew or if provided a
tab washer.
14.6.3.8 Apply lubricant to the front and back impeller wear ring running surfaces.
y
14.6.3.9 This completes the process for assembling the shaft to the impeller.
n nl
14.6.4 Cover Assembly to the shaft assembly
tio O
This section provides information for assembling the cover to the shaft assembly:
bu se
14.6.4.1 Install all mechanical seal studs into the holes provided in the cover.
tri U
14.6.4.2 Install any eyebolts as needed for lifting the cover assembly.
14.6.4.3 Position and support the cover assembly.
is 0
D 01
14.6.4.4 Pass the Shaft /Impeller assembly through the bore in the throat / throttle bushing from the case
side of the cover until the impeller wear ring is fully registered inside the cover wear ring. Take care to not
to chip the carbon insert in the throat/throttle bushing as the shaft is passed through.
al 5
14.6.4.5 Support the shaft on the drive end so that it does not rest on the carbon throat / throttle bushing.
er lot
14.6.4.6 This completes the process for assembling the cover assembly to the shaft assembly.
en al
14.6.5 Pump Case Assembly

B
This section provides information for assembling the pump case:

rG e
14.6.5.1 Apply lubricant to the inside bore of the case wear ring.
Fo itte
14.6.5.2 Set the pressure casing up in its normal vertical orientation with the case firmly mounted to a
work table or work stands.
ot m
14.6.5.3 Lubricate, install and seat all case/cover studs.

N m
14.6.5.4 Install the case/cover gasket in the pressure casing.

o
14.6.5.5 Attach eye bolt or clamp arrangement to shaft end. Lift the Impeller/Cover/Shaft assembly via
the shaft end.
C
14.6.5.6 Lower the Impeller/Cover/Shaft assembly into the case, carefully aligning the front impeller wear
r
ring OD to the case wear ring I.D and the cover register to the register fit in the pump case.
Fo
14.6.5.7 Install the case/cover nuts onto the case studs and evenly tighten the nuts to draw the
assemblies together. Use an alternating pattern while tightening these nuts to bring the joint together,
metal to metal.
Note: Some older OH4 designs do not have a metal to metal joint and have a gap that is measured and
evenly set with feeler gauges. Refer to the OEM operating manual for these pump designs.
14.6.5.8 Tighten all nuts to the proper torque value in the proper sequence.
203 of 241
14.6.5.9 Lift and rotate the shaft to determine if there is any binding or rubbing and correct as necessary.
Remove the eyebolt or clamp from the shaft end.
14.6.5.10 Install the motor support stand onto the pump cover. Be sure a “metal to metal” fit is made by
the mounting surfaces.
14.6.5.11 Verify the proper clock position of the motor support stand by noting the locations of the
y
windows and the piping connections on the mechanical seal gland. Rotate the motor support stand to
obtain the correct orientation. Follow match marks or dowel locations.
n nl
14.6.5.12 Lubricate, install the motor support stand mounting cap screws/studs in proper sequence.
tio O
Tighten to the correct torque value.
bu se
14.6.5.13 Lift the electric motor and lower it onto the motor support stand.
14.6.5.14 Lubricate and install the dowels through the motor mounting flange into the support flange.
tri U
14.6.5.15 Lubricate and Install the motor mounting cap screws to the support stand. Tighten the motor
mounting cap screws/studs in an alternating pattern to the correct torque value.
is 0
D 01
14.6.5.16 Couple the pump and motor. Various coupling styles are used on OH4 pumps. Follow the
coupling OEM’s procedures for installing the coupling based on the specific application and setting the
vertical spacing. There are numerous methodologies for setting axial positioning based on the pump
al 5
and/or coupling design such as:
er lot
a) Fixed axial location from top contact position. Refer to OEM documentation for dimensions
b) Half of total float

en al
c) Aligning rotor shoulders within the seal chamber.

B
14.6.5.17 Measure and record coupling assembly positioning (such as match mark, or number of shims)
rG e
for use after seal installation.

Fo itte
14.6.5.18 Measure the alignment of the motor shaft to pump shaft by positioning an indicator on the case
cover and measure the TIR of the pump shaft
ot m
14.6.5.19 If the TIR exceeds 0.002 in., reposition the shaft in the coupling. Rigid couplings with clearance
fit to pump shaft and adjusting nut may not provide consistent readings.
N m
14.6.6 Installing and Setting the Mechanical Seal

o
This section provides information for installing and setting the mechanical seal:
C
14.6.6.1 Remove the coupling and carefully lower the pump shaft into the pressure casing.
r
Fo
14.6.6.2 Refer to 14.2 for seal assembly information.
14.6.6.3 Guide the mechanical seal gland assembly onto the mounting studs. Install the nuts finger-tight
until the shaft is positioned in the coupling.
14.6.6.4 Re-assemble the coupling to the motor and lift the pump shaft and verify axial position as
documented in 14.6.5.
14.6.6.5 This completes the process for installing and setting the mechanical seal.
204 of 241
14.6.7 Motor / Pump Final Assembly
This section provides information for completing the motor/pump assembly:
14.6.7.1 Install the coupling guard(s) to the motor support stand with cap screws/studs. Tighten and then
torque the cap screws/studs to the correct torque value.
y
14.6.7.2 If necessary, remove the coupling spacer and motor for transportation.
n nl
14.6.7.3 Refer to sections 14.14 and following for other final assembly recommendations.
tio O
14.6.7.4 This completes the motor/pump assembly.
bu se
14.6.8 Proceed to 14.14.
14.7 OH 5 (Specific Final Assembly)
tri U
14.7.1 For assembling OH5 style pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.3 in addition to the
is 0
D 01
The assembly steps indicated in this section apply to the majority of OH5 type pumps, however special
circumstances can apply to the particular equipment design. Always start by following the OEM’s manual
as the first guide to any re-assembly process.
al 5
The motor should have been inspected to verify that it is acceptable. Inspections should include, as a
er lot
minimum; dimensional, lift and end float measurements, runouts and that the motor is electrically and
mechanically sound.
en al
14.7.2 This section provides information for installing the diffuser to pressure casing.
B
NOTE: Not all OH5 pumps have removable diffusers.

rG e
14.7.2.1 The pump case and diffuser should be clean and free of burrs.
Fo itte
14.7.2.2 Install new O-rings.
14.7.2.3 Verify the diffuser orientation and insert the diffuser into the pump case. Diffuser installation can
ot m
require brackets to press the diffuser into the pump case. Install the diffuser until it bottoms out in the
pump case.
N m
14.7.2.4 This completes the process for installing the diffuser into the pump case.
o
14.7.3 This section provides information for installing seal housing and the seal assembly to the motor.
C
Note: These steps are easier if the motor is in the vertical position with the shaft pointing upward.
r
14.7.3.1 Clean all mounting surfaces on the seal housing and motor support.
Fo
14.7.3.2 Install the thermal barrier gasket, if used.
14.7.3.3 Refer to 14.2 for seal assembly information.
14.7.3.4 As the seal housing has a circular register fit, verify the proper clock position of the seal housing.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for the correct installation of the seal housing.
205 of 241
14.7.3.6 Place the seal housing onto the motor, center seal housing to motor and torque the bolting.
Runouts should be measured. Standard motor runouts can create excessive runouts of the seal housing
face or seal housing positioning that should be corrected per Annex W.
14.7.3.7 Install mechanical seal along with the O-rings.
14.7.3.8 Install the cover along with the O-rings.
y
14.7.3.9 Install the impeller and inducer, if used onto the motor shaft.
n nl
Install the impeller bolt and lock washer and torque the impeller bolt.
tio O
14.7.3.10 Measure the gap between the back of the impeller to the cover. If the gap is out of range,
disassembly the assembly and re-measure all components.
bu se
14.7.3.11 Measure the impeller to cover/case vane clearance. If the clearance is out of range,
disassembly the assembly and re-measure all components.
tri U

14.7.3.12 This completes the process for installing throttle bushing, seal housing and the seal assembly
is 0
to the motor.
D 01
14.7.4 This section provides information for installing the motor, seal housing and component, impeller
and motor to the pump case.
al 5
14.7.4.1 As the seal housing and pump case have a circular register fit, verify the proper clock position of
the components. Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for the correct orientation of these
er lot
components.
en al
14.7.4.2 Position the motor assembly in the vertical position with the shaft point downward and lower the
assembly into the pump case.
B
14.7.4.3 Install the pump case to seal housing fasteners. Lubricate the threads and torque the fasteners.
rG e
14.7.4.4 Rotate the motor shaft to confirm there is no rubbing of the impeller to the diffuser. If rubbing
Fo itte
occurs, remove all components and determine the problem.
14.7.4.5 This completes the process for installing the motor, seal housing and component, impeller and
motor to the pump case.
ot m
14.7.5 Proceed to 14.14.

N m
14.8 BB (Final Assembly General)

o
C
14.8.1 General
14.8.1.1 Section 14.8 contains information for the specific pump types that should be used in conjunction
r
with the information in 14.2. The rotor and as appropriate, bundle assembly, should have been
Fo
assembled in section 13 unless it requires assembly with the pump components.
14.8.1.2 Preparatory steps for BB final assemblies:
14.8.1.2.1 Install any one piece stationary wear rings or bushings that have not been previously installed
onto the rotor assembly.
14.8.1.2.2 Install split wear rings or bushings into the pressure casing for BB1, BB3 and BB5 volute type
pumps.
206 of 241
14.8.1.2.3 Protect proximity probe target areas during handling and pump assembly
14.8.1.3 Horizontal split line gaskets such as for BB1 and BB3 should be cut out with a sharp edge tool.
14.8.1.3.1 Do not cut the gasket by peening or hammering on the inside and seal chamber surface edge
to form the gasket. Peening can cause rounded edges on the casing and improper fitting gaskets.
Peening on the bolt holes and outside edges are permissible.
y
14.8.1.3.2 Verify that the holes are cut for the dowels.
n nl
14.8.1.3.3 Allow about 0.010 in overhang at all ring fits and at the seal chamber as identified as #1 and #2
tio O
on Figure 14.7
bu se
14.8.1.3.4 Cut small windows as identified as #3 for feeler gauge measurements during gasket crushing
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Figure 14.7 - How to cut a parting flange gasket

Fo itte
14.8.1.4 Verify that any anti-rotation pin(s) for stationary components such as wear rings or bushings are
engaged into their corresponding groove or slot and have sufficient clearance to not restrict seating of the
ot m
component. Insufficient clearance can occur after machining of the split line.
N m
14.8.1.5 Keep shaft burnished locations (vibration or axial position probe target locations) protected as
long as possible. When removing the protective material tools should not be used that could scratch the
o
tracking surfaces.
C

r
14.8.2.1 Hydrodynamic Radial Bearing to Bearing Housing Fit Verification

Fo
14.8.2.1.1 This verification can be completed with the bearing housing installed onto the pump or the
bearing housing supported on a rigid support stand. This verification is typically completed prior to the
bearing housing being final fitted to the pump with the rotor installed.
14.8.2.1.2 Verify outside diameter of bearing with the inside diameter of the bearing housing with a
micrometer and either with plastic gauging material or soft wire.
14.8.2.1.3 For hydrodynamic radial bearings, the fit to the bearing housing can be verified by performing a
fit verification measurement. The bearing top and bottom halves are installed in the bearing housing. A
207 of 241
shim, typically about 0.005 in (0.127 mm) is installed at the horizontal split line on both sides of the
bearing housing. For clearance fits, a shim might not be needed. A crushable material should be installed
at the top of the bearing that is a little thicker than the shim thickness. The top bearing housing is
installed and bolted down. The top half of the bearing housing is then removed, and the thickness of the
crushable material is determined and compared to the shim thickness. The resulting fit should be
compared to Annex W. Correct the fit as necessary. When present, gasket compressed thickness should
be considered.
y
14.8.2.2 Bearing Housings Positioning Verification
n nl
14.8.2.2.1 The mechanical seals should not be installed until the positioning of the bearing housings has
tio O
been verified.
bu se
14.8.2.2.2 Install the bearing housings with the capability of being repositioned using the previous dowels.
tri U
a) The positioning of the bearing housings should be verified for both radial and angular positioning.
b) If the bearing housings or pressure casing has been reworked on the split line, do not install the previous
is 0
dowels.
D 01
c) For rolling element style bearings:
al 5
1. Install the rolling element bearings on the rotor assembly per 14.8.3.1.
2. Typically used bearings (in good condition) are used for this assembly as the bearings will have
er lot
to be removed prior to final assembly).
3. If the bearings are not in good condition, new bearings may have to be used, however because
the bearings require removal after the bearing housing measurements, it is recommended to
en al
discard these bearings and replace with new bearings for the final assembly.
4. For the bearings to be installed for the bearing housing positioning verification, the bearing bore
B
can be slightly opened up to allow easier installation and removal to prevent possible damage to
the shaft.
rG e
5. A flapper wheel can be used to slightly increase the bearing bore to shaft fit.
Fo itte
d) For hydrodynamic bearings, install the bearing bottom halves into the bearing housings, per 14.8.3.2,
apply service lube oil, and then install the rotor.
ot m
e) Mount a dial indicator onto the shaft and sweep the face of the seal chamber to determine the angular
positioning of the bearing housings.
N m
1. Using the dial indicator mounted on the shaft, determine the radial positioning of the bearing
housing by sweeping the bore of the seal chamber.
o
2. Results should be compared to Annex W.

C
3. If either of the bearing housings are out of tolerance in the radial direction, remove previously
installed dowels and adjust the position of the bearing housing accordingly.
4. If out of tolerance in the angular direction, a machining problem can exist, and more reviews are
r
Fo
necessary.
5. Once the bearing housings are verified to be within tolerances, maintain the existing dowels (if
provided bearing housing positioning within tolerance) or install new dowels as necessary.
14.8.3 Bearing Pre-installation
14.8.3.1 Rolling Element Style Bearings installation is found in 14.2.11.1 and Annex F
14.8.3.2 Hydrodynamic radial bearing assembly
208 of 241
14.8.3.2.1 General
14.8.3.2.1.1 Common bearing designs include the following:

a) Spherical seat bearings are shaped on the OD of the bearing to settle in their natural aligned position
during assembly. Realignment during operation is a misconception with this design.
b) Fixed geometry bearings such as axial groove, elliptical, multi-lobe, offset, and pressure dam bearings
y
are used to improve rotordynamics compared to a plain journal bearing.
n nl
1. Direction of rotation is critical to the performance of some types of fixed geometry bearings.
tio O
2. They are based on precise engineering and have specific orientation, depth and width of the relief
track.
bu se
c) Tilt pad bearings are the most stable bearing for rotor dynamics. Following the bearing OEM installation
drawings is critical so that the pads are loaded properly during operation.
tri U
d) Bearings with a pressure dam should be arranged so that the rotation of the shaft rotates into the dam
(larger depth of groove) as shown in Figure 14.8
is 0
D 01
Bearings with a wedge tri-land should be arranged so that the rotation of the shaft rotates as shown in
Figure 14.9
al 5
er lot
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
C
Figure 14.8 - Pressure Dam Bearing

r
Fo
209 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
Figure - 14.9 Wedge Tri-Land Bearing
tri U
14.8.3.2.1.2 Verify that all components are accounted for and properly installed. Refer to bearing
is 0
assembly design cross sectional drawings.
D 01
14.8.3.2.1.3 Verify the following as a minimum:
a) tilting pads move freely (if used)
al 5
b) rotation arrow matches machine rotation for bearings that are rotation dependent
er lot
c) bearing housing to bearing fit inspection has been verified per 14.8.2.1.3.
en al
14.8.3.2.1.4 Dowels and Anti-Rotation Pins

B
14.8.3.2.1.4.1 Dowel pins are used to provide repeatable positioning if the component is removed and
then reinstalled for applications such as:
rG e
a) bearing housing dowels

Fo itte
1. top to the bottom half

2. end cover to the bearing housing
ot m
3. bearing housing to pump

b) hydrodynamic bearings
N m
c) top to bottom bearing halves

o
C
d) Pump pressure casing
1. Top to bottom halves

r
Fo
2. Radial split line components
Each dowel pin is to fit tight into the mating hole and should not bottom out into the mating component.
14.8.3.2.1.4.2 Anti-rotation pins will typically be required for the bearings. Verify that the bearing housings
have the provisions for the pins and that they are located in the correct position for the bearings. Verify
that the orientation of the pins matches the proper bearing rotation.
14.8.3.2.2 Shaft to bearing contact verification
210 of 241
14.8.3.2.2.1 Contact verification indicates that the shaft rests in the bearing and bearing housing
correctly.
a) Verify all components (shaft, bearing and bearing housing) are all clean and do not have any burrs.
b) Prior to performing the contact verification, the bearing housing to bearing fit should have been verified
and that the bearing properly sits in the bearing housing. Dimension and clearance measurements
should have already been performed in 14.8.2.
y
n nl
14.8.3.2.2.2 Verification of the shaft to bearing contact:
tio O
a) Confirm that the bearing housings, bearings, bearing bores and bearing journal areas of the shaft are
clean, free of burrs and oil or any other materials that would provide a contact verification error or not
allow the contact verification paste to be accepted.
bu se
b) All components should be at equilibrium temperature.
tri U
c) Contact check should be done in a horizontal position.
is 0
d) Install the bottom half of each bearing into the bearing housings. Depending on the type of BB pump,
D 01
the rotor can be set into the bearings otherwise roll the bottom halves of the bearings into the bearing
housing with the rotor already in position.
al 5
e) Place a thin coating of soft, non-drying, contact verification paste sparingly and evenly onto the entire
shaft surface at the bearing areas (apply the paste beyond the ends of the areas for the bearings). The
er lot
entire surface should be covered with a thin uniform coating of the paste. The coating should be just
thick enough to record contact on the mating surfaces. Excessive bluing will cause erroneous readings.
en al
f) Install the rotor onto the bearings.

B
g) Install the top half of the bearings.

rG e
h) Install the bearing housing covers and tighten the bolting.

Fo itte
i) Rotate the shaft 1 full turn in the normal direction without applying excessive side force.
ot m
j) Inspection of contact verification paste:
1. The part being inspected should have a very light coloring on the surface. Inspect the quality of
N m
the transfer such as for indications of scratches, out of round areas, or flat areas.
2. Evaluate the degree of contact and pattern in the bore on each of the bottom halves of the
o
bearings. Compare the results of the bluing to the information in Figure 14.10. There should be a
C
minimum of 85% contact. If this percentage is less than 85% or the pattern is not acceptable,
review the bearing to bearing housing mounting and evaluate the positioning of the bearing
housing. Adjust until a good pattern and contact percentage is obtained.
r
3. Do not expect to see a coating that looks as if it was painted. If this occurs, too much bluing was
Fo
applied. If no contact is seen, it could be caused by either too light a coating of bluing..
4. Typically, the first verification will have too much bluing on the mating part. The bluing should be
removed from the part verified while leaving it on the part that the bluing was applied.
k) The contact verification process may have to be completed several times to allow the correct amount of
bluing transfer. Redoing of the bluing will typically start with step f.
l) If the contact verification has to be redone, compare the redone bluing results to the results from step j
211 of 241
and the information in Figure 14.10
m) If the contact is still unacceptable, remove all components and verify the condition of the parts. Replace
or machine parts as necessary to correct. If the design of the bearing to bearing housing fit is such that
the bearing does not self-align, the bearing or bearing housing may not be parallel.
n) Do not correct the contact by scraping as this will affect the oil wedge.
y
n nl
o) Do not shim the bearing outside diameter to the housing as shims will fret.
tio O
p) Measure and record the final contact using transparent tape lift off and photograph the contact in the
lower half of the bearings.
bu se
q) After the contact verification is completed, remove all paste.
tri U
is 0
Correct Contact
D 01
al 5
er lot
Incorrect contact
en al
Horizontal angularity
B
rG e
Fo itte
Incorrect contact
Vertical angularity
ot m
N m
Note 1: If there is misalignment in the vertical plane between bearings, then the contact pattern will be
o
only on one end of the bearing and not the other.

C
Note 2: If there is misalignment in the horizontal plane between bearings, then you may see a diagonal
pattern.
r
Fo
Figure 14.10 - Contact Verification
14.8.4 Bearing Final Installation
14.8.4.1 General
14.8.4.1.1 Once inspections have been completed, the bearings are ready to be installed per 14.8.3.2.
14.8.4.1.2 Install the bearings, any oil rings or other components and top bearing housing.
212 of 241
14.8.4.1.3 Service oil should be placed on the bearing during installation. Any instrumentation should be
installed and its condition verified.
14.8.4.2 Hydrodynamic thrust bearing assembly
14.8.4.2.1 Verify that all components are accounted for and properly installed. Refer to bearing assembly
design cross sectional drawings.
y
14.8.4.2.2 Install the thrust bearing pads with any instrumented pads in the position for the wires to exit
n nl
the housing. It is common for instrumented pad wiring to be tested during assembly to avoid loss of wire
continuity.
tio O
14.8.4.2.3 If spacer rings are used between the thrust collar and shaft shoulder to control rotor running
bu se
position, spacer rings should have faces parallel within 0.0005in (0.013mm).
14.8.4.2.4 Thrust collar nut should be installed and torqued per bearing or pump OEM’s
tri U
recommendations. As with other fasteners, this torque is dependent upon nut and shaft materials and
size.
is 0
14.8.4.2.5 Measure the thrust bearing collar runout. The total indicator runout (TIR) should be a within the
D 01
tolerance of Annex W. Runout readings should be taken on both collar faces and recorded.
14.8.4.3 Radial lift measurement for BB Pumps

al 5
14.8.4.3.1 Radial lift measurements for BB pumps are typically performed with and without the bearings in
er lot
place to verify rotor to case binding or interference.
a) Either verification should not have the mechanical seals installed as the seals will not provide the desired
en al
results.
B
b) Radial lift measurements without the bearings installed will be close to the wear ring clearances and with
the bearings installed close to the bearing clearance.
rG e
c) For horizontal split BB pumps, a gasket of the same material and thickness as the service gasket and
Fo itte
the top half of the pressure casing should be installed and torqued while performing the radial lift
measurement.
ot m
d) For BB5 pumps, measure the radial lift of the inner bundle assembly not installed into the outer case and
also with the inner bundle assembly installed into the outer casing. The radial lift measurement with
N m
the bearings installed will only be done with the inner bundle installed in the outer case.
o
14.8.4.3.2 To perform the lift measurement, use a dial indicator, verify for radial play in the bearing
C
housings and shaft assembly by gently lifting and pushing down on the shaft (one end at a time) to verify
clearance within the rotor assembly with the wear rings installed as shown in Figures 14.11 through
14.13. Do not exert excessive force as this will deflect the shaft and give a false reading. The total lift
r
should be approximately equal to the wear ring clearances. The clearance value is influenced by;
Fo
a) the clearance in the wear rings
b) the clearance in the wear ring to pump case for floating style wear rings
c) the closeness of the dial indicator to the wear rings
14.8.4.3.3 If the measured value exceeds the recommended wear ring values, re-measure and compare
the values. Take into account the location of the dial indicator. If the readings seem excessive, determine
if there could be a problem and address accordingly.
213 of 241
14.8.4.3.4 If the measured value is less than the recommended wear ring values, re-measure and
compare the values. If the readings still seem low determine if there could be a problem and address
accordingly.
14.8.4.3.5 The figures are representative for the examples of the different types of pumps and the results
will vary with hydrodynamic style bearings as compared to rolling element style bearings.
y
14.8.4.3.6 The values in 14.8.4.3.2 are target values and not necessarily definitive values. If the value
n nl
exceeds the values then the housing, shaft and bearings should be disassembled and individually
compared against specification.
tio O
bu se
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
Figure 14.11 - Example of a Lift Measurement for BB Pumps
en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m
Figure 14.12 - Example of a Lift Measurement for Inner Bundle Assembly of BB Pumps
o
rC
Fo
14.8.4.3.3 Measure and record the final lift measurement on the assembly documents for future
reference.
14.8.4.4 Axial End Float measurement for BB pumps
14.8.4.4.1 Axial end float measurements for BB pumps are typically performed to:
214 of 241
a) Achieve proper rotor hydraulic positioning
b) Verify if there is any rotor/case binding or interference
c) To determine clearance in the thrust bearing housing and bearings
14.8.4.4.2 The axial end float measurement can be done either with or without the bearings in place.
y
Either measurement should not have the mechanical seals installed as the seals will not provide the
n nl
desired results.
tio O
14.8.4.4.3 For horizontal split BB pumps, a gasket of the same material and thickness as the service
gasket and the top half of the pressure casing should be installed and torqued while performing the radial
lift measurement.
bu se
14.8.4.4.4 For BB5 pumps, measure the axial end float of the inner bundle assembly not installed into the
outer case and also with the inner bundle assembly installed into the outer case.
tri U
14.8.4.4.5 To perform the axial end float measurement, use a dial indicator to measure the axial end float
is 0
by gently pushing back and forth on the rotor assembly as shown in Figures 14.14 through 14.16. Do not
exert excessive force as this will deflect the shaft and give a false reading. This value is influenced by;
D 01
a) Impeller to volute/diffuser contact
al 5
b) bushing to sleeve or shaft shoulder contact
er lot
c) wear ring axial contact
Support heavy rotors with slings to enable this measurement.

en al
B
rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
C
Figure 14.13 - Example of an Axial End Float Measurement for BB Pumps

r
Fo
215 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
Figure 14.14 Example of End Float Measurement of the Inner Bundle Assembly
bu se
tri U
14.8.4.4.5.1 The end float without bearings should be approximately 0.250 in. (6.4 mm). If the value is
is 0
smaller than this value, then the stationary components to rotating components should be evaluated for
any obstruction.
D 01
14.8.4.4.5.2 The end float with the thrust bearing in position should be as indicated in Annex W.
al 5
14.9 BB1 (Specific Final Assembly)
er lot
14.9.1 For assembling BB1 style axially split, volute pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.8 in
addition to the recommendations in 14.9. Begin the assembly by following the OEM’s manual as the first
en al
guide to any re-assembly process.

B
NOTE: The assembly steps indicated in this section are typical for the majority of BB1 type pumps,
however special circumstances can apply to the particular equipment design.
rG e
14.9.2 Installing and positioning of bearings, housings and rotor assembly

Fo itte
This section provides information for installing and positioning the bearing housings, rotor assembly and
pressure casing top half.
ot m
14.9.2.1 The pump case, diffuser, bearing housings and rotor should be clean and free of burrs.
N m
14.9.2.2 Install pump case split line bolting with lubricant per 14.2.7.
o
14.9.2.3 Install split wear rings or remaining bushings into the pressure case. Verify that the anti-rotation
C
pins align.
14.9.2.4 Install remaining wear rings and bushings onto the rotor assembly.
r
Fo
Note: Rotor assembly was assembled in section 13.
14.9.2.5 Install rotor assembly into the pressure casing without the mechanical seals or bearing housing
sealing devices (these will be installed later).
14.9.2.6 Measure and record rotor axial float (end float) without the bearings or seals installed per
14.8.4.4.
216 of 241
14.9.2.7 Establish and mark the running position so the impeller to the volute is aligned within 0.0625 in.
Provide some method of verifying the rotor’s running position after the top half of the case has been
installed.
14.9.2.8 Install the horizontal case gasket. Verify that the gasket fits properly. Adhesive can be used on
the gasket surface to hold the gasket in the correct position during assembly.
y
14.9.2.9 Verify all wear rings, bushings and anti-rotation devices are in position.
n nl
14.9.2.10 Install the top half of the case and install the case top half dowels. Verify there is correct
alignment of the split line at the seal chamber.
tio O
14.9.2.11 Lubricate the studs, washers, and nuts and tighten the split line bolting to the recommended
bu se
torque in the recommended sequence. For applications with cap nuts, verify the cap nut does not bottom
out on the stud.
tri U
14.9.2.12 Rotate the rotor to confirm that it rotates freely.
14.9.2.13 Perform gasket crush verification by using feeler gauges at the cut windows, identified as #3 on
is 0
Figure 14.7. The result of the feeler gauge measurement should be closely matched to the shim
D 01
thickness that was used during case boring and as established by the pump OEM.
14.9.2.14 Perform a lift measurement per 14.8.4.3, without the bearings or seals installed.
al 5
14.9.2.15 Repeat the axial float measurement per 14.8.4.4.
er lot
Note: Some minor difference in the axial float will be expected due to less movement of the case wear
rings with the top half of the case installed.
en al
14.9.2.16 Install bearings and bearing housings without sealing components.

B
14.9.2.16.1 Install rolling element bearings onto the rotor per 14.8.3.1
rG e
Fo itte
14.9.2.16.2 Install hydrodynamic radial bearings per 14.8.3.2
14.9.2.16.3 Install bearing housings per 14.8.2.

ot m
14.9.2.17 Using a dial indicator positioned onto the shaft, sweep the face of the seal chamber to
determine the TIR and sweep the bore of the seal chamber to determine the positioning of the bearing
N m
housing as described in 14.8.2.2.2. Correct the positioning of the bearing housings as necessary.
o
14.9.2.18 Establish thrust bearing axial end float with the bearings installed to achieve clearance using
technique in 14.8.4.4. See Annex W for clearance recommendations.
C

r
Fo
14.9.2.20 This completes the process of the positioning of the bearing housings, rotor assembly and
pressure casing top half.
14.9.3 Final installation of the bearings, housings and mechanical seals
14.9.3.1 Remove the bearings (replace rolling element bearings with new bearings).
14.9.3.2 Lubricate and install the seal studs/bolting per 14.2.7.
217 of 241
14.9.3.3 Install any gaskets/O-rings onto the shaft or mechanical seals. Install oil rings, other bearing
housing sealing devices or other components as necessary.
14.9.3.4 Determine the correct rotational positioning of the seal gland so that all connections are properly
located. Install any fittings to the seal gland that are not possible to install once the seal is installed and
positioned.
y
14.9.3.5 Slide the mechanical seals onto the shaft and into the seal chambers, do not tighten the seal
chamber bolting/studs or release the seal setting devices. Lift the rotor if necessary to concentrically
n nl
engage the gland in the seal chamber.
tio O
14.9.3.6 Install the new rolling element bearings onto the rotor, if applicable, per 14.2.12.

bu se
14.9.3.7 Reinstall the bearing housings and dowels.
14.9.3.8 Torque the bearing housing bolting to the pump to the proper torque value and in the correct
tri U
sequence.
is 0
14.9.3.9 Install the top half of the hydrodynamic bearings, if used.
D 01
14.9.3.10 Finish installing and setting the bearing and other bearing housing components in the proper
sequence such as oil rings, deflectors, cooling fans, heat deflectors, sealing devices and spacers.
al 5
14.9.3.11 Install the top half and end cover of the bearing housings along with any dowels and torque the
bolting to the proper value using the correct sequence. Use a thin sealing compound on the bearing
er lot
housing component split lines.
en al
14.9.3.12 Repeat the axial float measurement with the bearings installed and in correct position and
mechanical seal unbolted. The measurement should be the same as previous.
B
14.9.3.13 Rotate the rotor assembly to confirm it rotates freely.

rG e
14.9.3.14 Complete the mechanical seal installation per seal drawing or 14.2.9
Fo itte
14.9.3.15 Remove the seal setting devices and verify that the seal takes the proper set.
14.9.3.16 Rotate the rotor assembly to confirm it rotates freely with a slight drag due to the mechanical
ot m
seals.
N m
14.9.3.17 This completes the process for final installation of the bearing housings and mechanical seals.
o
14.9.4 Proceed to 14.14.

C

r
14.10.1 For assembling BB2 style pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.8 in addition to
Fo
14.10.1.1 Always start by following the OEM’s manual as the first guide to any re-assembly process.
14.10.1.2 BB2 single stage versions typically will utilize a rotor assembly completed in section 13.
14.10.1.3 BB2 two stage versions can require the final rotor and stationary stage components be
assembled in conjunction with the case build.
218 of 241
14.10.1.4 Pump original documentation should be referenced for rotor running position guidance. In the
absence of original design documentation guidance, place the rotor in the center of its axial float.
NOTE: The assembly steps indicated in this section are typical for the majority of BB2 type pumps,
however special circumstances can apply to the particular design of the equipment.
14.10.2 Installing, positioning of bearings housings and rotor assembly and radial head
y
This section provides information for installing, positioning the bearing housings, rotor assembly and
n nl
radial head.
tio O
a) The pump pressure case, diffuser, casing spacer, bearing housing, rotor and any additional rotor
components not yet installed on the rotor should be clean and free of burrs.
bu se
b) Install pressure case split line bolting with lubricant per 14.2.7.
tri U
c) Install any components such as gaskets into the pressure case prior to rotor assembly
d) Install split wear rings or remaining bushings into the case as appropriate. Verify that any anti-rotation
is 0
pins align.
D 01
e) Install remaining wear rings and bushings onto the rotor assembly as appropriate.
al 5
Note: Rotor assembly was assembled in section 13.
er lot
f) Install the rotor assembly from section 13 into the casing without the mechanical seals or bearing housing
sealing devices (these will be installed later). This rotor assembly can be a complete assembly
including stationary components between impellers or a partial assembly. For partial assemblies,
en al
additional components are installed after the installation into the casing. Locknuts should be positioned
to the markings previously determined during the rotor assembly in section 13.
B
g) The rotor to stationary position should be set. If it is possible to view the impeller(s) to stationary
rG e
components, establish and mark the running position so that the impeller to the stationary components
is aligned within 0.062 in. If the visual positioning cannot be determined, set the rotor in the center of
Fo itte
the axial float. Provide some method of verifying the rotor’s running position when the head is installed.
h) Install pressure case bolting using lubricant.

ot m
i) Install head/cover with gaskets and dowels.

N m
j) Lubricate the, washers, and nuts; tighten the split line bolting to the recommended torque in the
o
recommended sequence. For applications with cap nuts, verify the cap nut does not bottom out on the
C
stud.
k) Rotate the rotor to confirm that it rotates freely.

r
Fo
l) Measure and record rotor axial float (end float) without the bearings or seals installed per 14.8.4.4.
m) Perform a lift measurement per 14.8.4.3, without the bearings or mechanical seals installed.
n) Install bearings and bearing housings without sealing components.
1. Install rolling element bearings onto the rotor per 14.2.12.

2. Install hydrodynamic radial bearings per 14.8.3.2
3. Install bearing housings per 14.8.2.
219 of 241
o) Using a dial indicator positioned onto the shaft, sweep the face of the seal chamber to determine the TIR
and sweep the bore of the seal chamber to determine the positioning of the bearing housing as
described in 14.8.2.2.2. Correct the positioning of the bearing housings as necessary.
p) Establish thrust bearing axial end float to achieve clearance using technique in 14.8.4.4. See Annex W
for clearance recommendations.
y
q) Rotate the rotor to confirm that it rotates freely.
n nl
This section completes the process of the positioning of the bearing housings, rotor assembly and radial
tio O
head.
14.10.3 Final installation of the bearing housings and mechanical seals
bu se
Refer to 14.9.3.
tri U
14.10.4 Proceed to 14.14.
is 0
D 01
14.11.1 BB3 Volute (Specific Final Assembly)
al 5
14.11.1.1 Refer to the recommendations of BB1 volute style pump with consideration of multiple
impellers. When locating the position for the rotor, consider any thermal expansion of the components.
er lot
14.11.1.2 Proceed to 14.14.
en al
14.11.2 BB3 Diffuser (Specific Final Assembly)

B
14.11.2.1 Refer to the recommendations of a BB5 diffuser style pump with consideration of multiple
impellers. When locating the position for the rotor, consider any thermal expansion.
rG e
The BB3 diffuser style pump typically requires sealing components such as O-rings or other types of
Fo itte
sealing devices for each stage to the outer casing.
14.11.2.2 Proceed to 14.14.

ot m

N m
14.12.1 For assembling BB4 style pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.8 in addition to the
recommendations in 14.12. Always start by following the OEM’s manual as the first guide to any re-
o
assembly process.
C
Acceptable methods for assembling BB4 pumps are described in 14.12.1.1 and 14.12.1.2. This document
uses the method in 14.12.1.2 so that rotor axial end floats can be verified for each stage during assembly.
r
Fo
14.12.1.1 Start with one end section, add the impellers and diffusers and then add the other end section.
Typically, this method is used for smaller pumps.
14.12.1.2 Install the impellers and diffusers as an assembly (bundle) and then the two end sections are
added to the assembly (bundle). Typically, this method is used for larger pumps.
14.12.1.3 The BB4 pump should be assembled in a vertical orientation. Build up the assembly on a flat
plate or build-up stand so that the orientation of the mounting feet for the suction and discharge heads is
coplanar.
220 of 241
14.12.1.4 Pump original documentation should be referenced for rotor running position guidance. In the
absence of original design documentation guidance, place the rotor in the center of its axial float.
NOTE: The assembly steps indicated in this section are typical for the majority of BB 4 type pumps,
y
14.12.2 Assembling rotor and diffuser assembly (bundle) onto the suction and discharge end
sections
n nl
This section provides information for assembling the rotor and diffuser assembly (bundle) onto the suction
tio O
and discharge end sections.
bu se
14.12.2.1 All components, instructions, measurements, tooling and safety equipment should be readily
available.
tri U
14.12.2.2 Install any components such as gaskets, wear rings or remaining bushings onto the pump
components, as appropriate. Verify that any anti-rotation pins align.
is 0
14.12.2.3 Install remaining wear rings and bushings onto the rotor assembly as appropriate.
D 01
14.12.2.4 Assemble using either method A or method B.
al 5
14.12.2.4.1 Assembly method A (horizontal assembly)
er lot
With the bundle assembly sitting on a stand in the horizontal position, install each pressure casing
(suction and discharge) end section onto the ends of the bundle assembly.
en al
14.12.2.4.2 Assembly method B (vertical assembly)

B
Position one end section (suction or discharge) flat on a table and lower the bundle assembly vertically
onto the pressure casing section. Install the other casing section onto the bundle assembly.
rG e
Fo itte
14.12.2.5 Install the tie rods and apply lubricant to the tie rods, washers and nuts. Partially tighten the tie
rods.
14.12.2.6 Set the bundle assembly with the two casing end sections attached onto a flat mounting plate,
ot m
loosen the tie rods and allow the pump to reposition to the flat plate. Tighten the tie rods to the correct
torque and sequence.
N m

o
14.12.2.8 Perform a lift measurement per 14.8.4.2 and determine if the lift is acceptable.
C
14.12.2.9 Verify the axial float per 14.8.4.3 without bearings or seals installed. If a problem exists,
r
determine the reason for the problem and correct.

Fo
14.12.2.10 This completes the process for assembling the rotor and diffuser assembly (bundle) onto the
two end sections.
14.12.3 Installation of the bearing housings, bearings and balance compensating device
This section provides information for assembling the bearing housings, bearings and balance
compensating device.
14.12.3.1 Install balance compensation device, if used.
221 of 241
14.12.3.2 Set running position per 13.3.4.2
14.12.3.3 Complete installation of any other components such as spacers, shaft sleeves, shaft sleeve
nuts, keys, spring washers or gaskets onto the rotor assembly.
y
a) Install rolling element bearings onto the rotor per 14.8.3.1.
n nl
b) Install hydrodynamic radial bearings per 14.8.3.2
tio O
c) Install bearing housings per 14.8.2.
bu se
14.12.3.5 As applicable, using a dial indicator positioned onto the shaft, sweep the face of the seal
chamber to determine the TIR and sweep the bore of the seal chamber to determine the positioning of the
tri U
bearing housing as described in 14.8.2.2.1. As applicable, correct the positioning of the bearing housings
as necessary.
is 0
14.12.3.6 Establish thrust bearing axial end float with the bearings installed to achieve clearance using
D 01
technique in 14.8.4.3. See Annex W for clearance recommendations.

al 5
This section completes the process of the positioning of the bearing housings and the balance
er lot
compensating device.
14.12.4 Final installation of the bearing housings and mechanical seals - Refer to 14.9.3
en al
14.12.5 Proceed to 14.14

B

rG e
For assembling BB5 style pumps, use the information in 14.2 and 14.8 in addition to the
Fo itte
recommendations in 14.13. Always start by following the OEM’s manual as the first guide to any re-
assembly process.
ot m
BB5 style pumps can be either volute or diffuser design.

N m
Pump original documentation should be referenced for rotor running position guidance. In the absence of
original design documentation guidance, place the rotor in the center of its axial float.
o
There are two styles of BB5 pump, volute and diffuser. Section 13 prepared the inner bundle assembly
C
(rotor and inner pressure casing which is either a volute or diffuser style),
r
Note: The assembly steps indicated in this section are typical for the majority of BB5 type pumps,
Fo
14.13.2 Preparation of pump case for installation of inner bundle assembly
This section provides information for preparing the pump case for installation of the inner bundle
assembly.
14.13.2.1 The pump case and head should be clean and free of burrs.
222 of 241
14.13.2.2 For pump arrangements with a separate head at the on the opposite end where the inner
bundle is installed:
14.13.2.2.1 Install the studs into pressure casing per 14.2.7
14.13.2.2.2 Install head gasket or O-rings as appropriate
y
14.13.2.2.3 Install the head assembly ensuring it fits into the pump case
n nl
14.13.2.2.4 Lubricate case bolting and nuts, install any washers and nuts, install the dowels and tighten
the head bolting to the recommended torque. For applications with cap nuts, verify the cap nut does not
tio O
bottom out on the stud.
bu se
14.13.2.3 Locate the special tooling for installation of the inner bundle assembly into the pressure casing.
14.13.2.4 This completes the preparation of the pump case for installation of the inner bundle assembly.
tri U
14.13.3 Determination of spacers and gaskets for inner bundle assembly to the pump case
is 0
This section provides information for determining the spacer thickness and gaskets for the inner bundle
D 01
assembly to outer pump case.
Establish the spacer thickness and gaskets for the inner bundle assembly to the outer casing using
al 5
Figures 14.17 and 14.18 (measurement CL) and 14.19 and 14.20 (measurement CM). The difference
between the CL and CM measurements should be compared to the OEM recommendation for that
er lot
particular pump. The spacers and the gaskets are detailed by the OEM that includes consideration of the
thermal growth and pump design.
en al
These dimensions are necessary in order to verify that the inner bundle to outer case axial clearance is
within pump design tolerance.
B
This completes the determination of the spacer thickness and gaskets for the inner bundle assembly to
rG e
outer pump case.

Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Fo
Figure 14.15 - Example of Outer Casing for BB5 pump with Discharge on End
223 of 241
y
n nl
tio O
bu se
Figure 14.16 - Example of Outer Casing for BB 5 pump with Discharge in Center
tri U
is 0
D 01
al 5
er lot
en al
B
Figure 14.17 Example of Volute Style Inner Bundle Assembly

rG e
Fo itte
ot m
N m o
rC
Figure 14.18 - Example of Diffuser Style Inner Bundle Assembly

Fo
14.13.4 If the inner bundle to casing sealing surfaces have been machined, it is recommended to perform
a contact verification check of the two components per 14.13.4.1. (This is not the final installation steps
as the inner assembly will be removed prior to final assembly).
14.13.4.1 Perform a contact verification of the high pressure and low pressure sealing surfaces and
locating diameters. This is performed by applying a thin coat of contact verification paste on the inner
barrel high and low pressure seal faces and locating diameters.
224 of 241
14.13.4.2 Position the inner assembly for installation. Make sure that any shims are removed from
between the diaphragms at the high pressure sealing surface.
14.13.4.3 The use of lubricant on the fit area of the diffusers and case at the high pressure and low
pressure sealing areas and lugs of the last stage diffuser will interfere with performing the contact
verification.
y
14.13.4.4 Guide the inner barrel into the case. Make sure that the studs on the suction diffuser are
aligned with the holes in the suction end of the case. Install and tighten the nuts and washers on the
n nl
suction diffuser studs.
tio O
14.13.4.5 Remove any supports.
bu se
14.13.4.6 Install any other components such as rings or spring washers and the end head (without gasket
or O-rings) with at least 25% of the studs/nuts.
tri U
14.13.4.7 Reverse the above steps to remove the inner barrel assembly from the case.14.13.4.8 Inspect
the contact at the seal faces for uniform, continuous contact. Stone, if necessary, and recheck contact.
Repeat this process until a uniform, continuous circumferential contact is obtained of at least 80%.
is 0
D 01
14.13.4.9 After an acceptable contact is obtained at both the high pressure and low pressure seal faces,
perform a final installation of the inner barrel.
al 5
14.3.4.10 This completes the contact verification inspection of the high and low pressure sealing
surfaces.
er lot
14.13.5 Installation of the inner bundle assembly into the pump case
en al
This section provides information for installing the inner bundle assembly into the pump case.
B
14.13.5.1 The inner bundle assembly and pump case should be clean and free of burrs.
rG e
14.13.5.2 Install the special tooling for installation of the inner bundle assembly into the casing.
Fo itte
14.13.5.3 Install any case bolting at the back head per 14.2.7.
14.13.5.4 Utilize spacers and gasket arrangement as determined in 14.13.3

ot m
14.13.5.5 Determine if components are utilized for inner bundle to outer casing alignment and position
N m
inner bundle accordingly.

o
14.13.5.6 Set the inner bundle assembly onto the special installation tooling
C
14.13.5.7 Slide the rotor/diffuser assembly (bundle) into the pump case along with any other components
such as gaskets or O-rings.
r
Fo
14.13.5.8 Install spacers and gaskets as appropriate onto the inner bundle
14.13.5.9 This completes the installation of the inner bundle assembly into the pump case.
14.13.6 Installation of the compensating device (balance drum)
This section provides information for installing the compensating device (balance drum), if used.
There are two styles of compensating devices, balance drum with a radial clearance (OD to ID) and
flange style (clearance of the face of the compensating device to the face of a stationary component). In
225 of 241
addition, the mounting of the compensating device is different and needs to be determined. It is important
to know which style of compensating device and the mounting method that is used for the device and for
setting.
14.13.6.1 Determine which style compensating device is used and how the clearances should be
established.
y
14.13.6.2 Determine which mounting method is used for the compensating device and how the device
should be installed.
n nl
14.13.6.3 Establish the rotor in the running position as previously determined in 13.3.4.2.
tio O
14.13.6.4 Install the compensating device and establish the setting/positioning of the compensating
bu se
device.
14.13.6.4.1 For taper fit balance drums, verify the contact between the rotating balance drum and shaft
tri U
taper.
14.13.6.4.2 Surface contact should be greater than 80%.
is 0
D 01
14.13.6.4.3 This completes installation of the compensating device (balance drum), if used.
14.13.7 Installation of the back head

al 5
14.13.7.1 Install the head gasket or O-rings. Verify that the gasket/O-rings fit properly. Lubricate any O-
er lot
rings for the head. Adhesive can be applied to the gasket surface to hold the gasket in correct position
during assembly.
en al
14.13.7.2 Install the head assembly confirming it fits into the pump case.
B
14.13.7.3 Lubricate case bolting and nuts, install any washers and nuts, install the dowels and tighten the
head bolting to the recommended torque. For applications with cap nuts, verify the cap nut does not
rG e
bottom out on the stud.

Fo itte
14.13.7.5 Measure and record rotor axial float (end float) without the bearings or seals installed per
ot m
14.8.4.3. This measurement should be the same as the previous similar measurement taken when the
inner bundle assembly was assembled in 13.3.4.2.
N m
14.13.7.6 Perform a lift measurement per 14.8.4.2, without the bearings or mechanical seals installed.
o

C
14.13.7.7.1 Install rolling element bearings onto the rotor per 14.8.3.1.
r
Fo
14.13.7.7.2 Install hydrodynamic radial bearings per 14.8.3.2
14.13.7.7.3 Install bearing housings per 14.8.2.
14.13.7.8 Using a dial indicator positioned onto the shaft, sweep the face of the seal chamber to
determine the TIR and sweep the bore of the seal chamber to determine the positioning of the bearing
housing as described in 14.8.2.2.1. Correct the positioning of the bearing housings as necessary.
14.13.7.9 Establish thrust bearing axial end float to achieve clearance using technique in 14.8.4.3. See
Annex W for clearance recommendations.
226 of 241
14.13.7.11 This completes the installation of the back head.
14.13.8 Final installation of the bearing housings and mechanical seals - Refer to 14.9.3
y
14.13.9 Proceed to 14.14
n nl
14.14 Final Accessory Assembly – General (all pumps)
tio O
14.14.1 Coupling Assembly
bu se
14.14.1.1 General
14.14.1.1.1 Verify the type of coupling that is used such as a general purpose or a special purpose
tri U
coupling. Obtain OEM coupling drawing or information. The type of coupling can make a difference with
the balancing, bolting and installation. Using the wrong procedures or components can result in a
problem during operation of the pump.
is 0
D 01
For proper installation, the following should be included:
a) Shaft to hub fit details
al 5
b) Tapered coupling hub advancement
er lot
c) Which components can be disassembled without affecting the balance
en al
d) Bolting materials and strengths

B
e) Bolting torque
rG e
f) Bolting weight
Fo itte
14.14.1.1.2 All components should be verified for installation such as:

a) Keys fitted
ot m
b) Contact verification for tapered fit couplings (keyed or hydraulic)

N m
14.14.1.1.3 Obtain special tooling and/or materials for the hub installation process such as:
o
a) For hydraulic fit coupling, O-rings, back-up rings and hydraulic tooling.
C
b) For keyed style coupling, keys, stop, nuts and heating capability (referenced in API RP 687 Chapter 1,
Appendix C)
r
Fo
14.14.1.1.4 Prepare the shaft for installation of the hub by cleaning and fitting with keys or O-rings/backup
rings. Prepare the hub for installation by cleaning and fitting with O-rings/backup rings or stop.
14.14.1.1.5 For applications requiring expansion of the coupling hub (non-hydraulic), verify that a proper
heating method is available per 13.1.6
14.14.1.1.6 For hydraulic fit style coupling hub, install the coupling hub per the OEM recommendations. If
these recommendations are not available, install per API RP 687 Chapter 1, Appendix C.
227 of 241
14.14.1.1.7 For non-hydraulic coupling hub installation, install the coupling hub per the OEM
recommendations. If these recommendations do not exist, utilize the information in 14.14.1.1.7.1 and
14.14.1.1.7.2.
14.14.1.1.7.1 Install a stop for the coupling hub onto the shaft at the location where the coupling hub
should be advanced. This stop should be installed prior to installation in case the heating of the coupling
hub allows excessive advancement.
y
14.14.1.1.7.2 For cylindrical fit coupling hub, typically the coupling hub should be installed flush with the
n nl
end of the shaft. However, verify coupling position with the as found position per 9.1.1.
tio O
14.14.1.1.7.3 Heat the coupling hub per 13.1.6. Using a gauge, verify that the coupling hub has
sufficiently been expanded for installation onto the shaft. Install the coupling hub to the correct location.
bu se
Install the hub following the applicable procedure. Once hub and shaft have stabilized with temperature,
remove tooling-stop. Verify the coupling hub position relative to the shaft end. Verify hub rim and hub face
run out.
tri U
14.14.1.1.8 Install remainder of coupling hub components which can include coupling shaft nut, shaft nut
setscrews and hydraulic plugs in the shaft or hub.
is 0
D 01
14.14.2 Tubing and piping installation
14.14.2.1 General
al 5
14.14.2.1.1 Verify tubing or piping is not damaged.
er lot
14.14.2.1.2 Remove protective devices that have been installed to keep the tubing or piping clean while
the pump has been out of service.
en al
14.14.2.1.3 Replace tubing or piping as necessary.

B
14.14.2.1.4 All tubing and piping should be blown clean.

rG e
Fo itte
14.14.2.1.5 Verify any tubing or piping bends have the proper bend radius and that the bends are not
flattened, kinked or wrinkled.
14.14.2.1.6 Adequate supports or brackets should be used to support the tubing or piping.
ot m
14.14.2.1.7 Lubricate NPT connections per 14.2.7.

N m
14.14.2.1.8 PMI alloy tubing or piping

o
C
14.14.2.2 Tubing Installation
14.14.2.2.1 Insert tubing into the tubing fitting ensuring correct engagement.
r
Fo
14.14.2.2.2 Tighten tubing fitting per tubing fitting vendor’s recommendation

a) Typical re-tightening information for tubing 1/16 in through 3/16 in: Re-tighten tubing nut an additional ¾
turn past finger tight
Note: Tubing this size is rarely permitted in petroleum refineries or pipelines.

b) Typical re-tightening information for tubing ¼ in through 1 in: Re-tighten tubing nut an additional 1 ¼
228 of 241
turns past finger tight
14.14.2.2.3 Try to pull the tubing out of the fitting by hand to verify engagement
14.14.2.2.4 Inspect tube fittings for proper installation using a tubing gauge.
14.14.2.3 Auxiliary piping can be threaded or flanged
y
n nl
14.14.2.3.1 When installing threaded piping, apply a lubricant to the threads per 14.2.7 and tighten until
the connection is sufficiently tightened.
tio O
14.14.2.3.2 When installing flanged piping:
a) Install the correct gasket and studs/bolting
bu se
b) Tighten the flange studs/bolting in a star sequence to the proper torque typically in 3 steps of increasing
tri U
torque.
c) Verify that the flanges are square and parallel
is 0
D 01
14.14.2.4 Verify that all pipe plugs are tight and secure. Use only API type plugs. Square or socket head
pipe plugs are not to be used for pressure boundary connections.
al 5
14.14.3 Auxiliary Equipment
er lot
Verify that all auxiliary items have been properly re-installed onto the pump, as appropriate. Auxiliary
components include items such as:
en al
a) Lubrication devices for bearing housing

B
1. Oilers
2. Desiccant breathers
3. Oil level indication
rG e
Fo itte
b) Seal system components
c) Pressure gauges/transmitters
ot m
d) Temperature devices/transmitters
N m
e) Verify that all RTD’s and thermocouples function

o
f) Vibration devices
C
g) Guards
r
Fo
h) Labeling of all open connections
i) Labeling of all non-terminated wiring
14.14.4 Pressure Assembly Leak Test should be performed in accordance with Annex R
14.15 Tagging
229 of 241
14.15.1 Install new austenitic stainless steel metal pump tag indicating information such as: (DO NOT
REMOVE PUMP ORIGINAL MANUFACTURER TAG)
a) Repair shop name
b) Date of repair
c) Repair job number
y
n nl
d) Impeller trim diameter and number of stages
tio O
e) Customer’s PO number
bu se
14.15.2 Attach caution tag that the bearing housings do not have oil installed.
14.15.3 Attach caution tag to the mechanical seal setting devices if owner does not want seals set until
tri U
pump is installed at site.
14.15.4 Attach tags to all loose components to identify proper assembly location.
is 0
D 01
14.15.5 Attach tags stating “temporary plug” to plugs intended for removal in the field
14.15.6 If tags have not already been installed or are not cast into the bearing housing, attach an
al 5
austenitic stainless steel tag for the rotation arrow and the oil level. When attaching tags onto the bearing
housing, use austenitic stainless steel pins and do not tap through the bearing housing wall.
er lot
14.16 Paint
en al
● The pump should be painted with the repair shop’s standard paint for the application while considering
the operating conditions. If specified, the paint should be per the owner’s approved paint type and color.
B
14.17 Shipping preparation

rG e
14.17.1 Ship separate items that have been requested by owner to not be installed during re-assembly.
Fo itte
Provide a written list of all loose parts that should be shipped back with pump.
14.17.2 Install soft material such as sheet neoprene or gasket paper between pump feet and metal
ot m
shipping legs to avoid shipment 'chattering' damage to pump foot flatness.

N m
14.17.3 Unused Piping flanges of the pump and the process piping should have temporary gasketed
covers or blinds. Any open threaded connection not connected at the repair shop should have a solid
o
metal plug of material equal to the component it is attached. The plugs are to have a thread sealant and
should be tightened. The metal plugs should be solid round or solid hexagonal head plugs furnished in
C
accordance with the dimensional information per ASME B16.11. Square head plugs should not be used,
due to their tendency to be damaged during installation and removal. ASME B16.11 is referenced to
r
prevent the supply of hollow or cored plugs.

Fo
14.17.4 Annex X.14.2 should be used to confirm conformance to work scope
14.17.5 Information in 16.2 should be included with the pump shipment.
14.17.6 Notify owner that the pump is ready to ship.
14.18 Ship the pump and any additional components per 15.0.
15 Shipment of equipment or components from repair shop
230 of 241
Section 7 provides information for shipping the pump or components to the repair shop. That section can
be used for returning the pump or components back to the owner.
16 Documentation
16.1 General
y
All documentation supplied to the owner should include:
n nl
a) The owner’s corporate name
tio O
b) The owner’s job/project/inquiry/purchase order number
bu se
c) The owner’s equipment item number and service name
tri U
d) The repair shop’s identifying proposal number, shop order number, serial number, or other reference
number.
is 0
16.2 Documentation with Equipment Shipment
D 01
Documentation recommended with the equipment being returned to the owner should include as a
minimum:
al 5
a) As completed work scope including repaired/replaced components and material changes
er lot
b) As repaired/assembly clearances
en al
c) Photographs for field assembly of auxiliary components

B
d) Photographs of equipment loaded on the delivery truck from repair shop

rG e
e) Documentation of conformance to work scope (Annex X.14.2)

Fo itte
This information can be preliminary hand-written copies that are not in the final format. The final
documentation in 16.3 can be submitted with the equipment shipment, if available.
ot m
16.3 Final Documentation

N m
16.3.1 The following documents should be included in the final repair report at a minimum, as applicable:
a) Cover page
o
C
b) Updated bill of material specifying repaired/replaced components and material changes
c) As-found/disassembly inspection forms

r
Fo
d) Photographs, as found and as repaired (photographs of sufficient quality to assure that any discrepancy
is clearly seen. An overall view and then detail views to highlight the discrepancy such that no question
may arise in further reviews should be provided, even if the discrepancy has been removed or repaired)
e) As completed work scope including repaired/replaced components and material changes
f) As repaired/assembly inspection forms
g) Balance reports
231 of 241
h) NDT reports and acceptance criteria used for repair
i) Material certifications
j) PMI results
k) Weld maps for major and minor repairs citing the WPS utilized.
y
n nl
l) Contact verification tape records
tio O
m) Hydrostatic test results
n) Performance test results
bu se
o) Documentation of conformance to work scope (Annex X)
tri U
p) Non-proprietary drawings and procedure for the repair or manufacture of replacement components
is 0
q) Revised drawings, such as possibly cross sectional or assembly
D 01
r) Revised data sheets
al 5
s) Engineering dispositions of non-conformances and photographs
er lot
t) Final work scope summary
en al
u) Results of any failure investigations that were completed by the repair shop
B
16.3.2 Final documentation should be provided to the owner within 2 weeks of shipment of the
equipment.
rG e
16.3.3 Final documentation should be made available in both a hard copy and an electronic copy.
Fo itte
16.3.4 See 10.7.5 for nameplate recommendations.
16.4 Document Retention and Information Updating

ot m
16.4.1 Repair Shop should store and maintain the repair records in such a way that they are readily
N m
retrievable. While in storage, quality records should be protected from damage, loss, and deterioration
due to environmental conditions. Records should be maintained a minimum of 20 years. Records should
o
be made available for owner evaluation with reasonable notification.

C
16.4.2 Owner
r
16.4.2.1 The owner should update their equipment history file and bill of materials to reflect any changes
Fo
to the pump made during the repair.
NOTE: Failure to update information can affect future replacement parts.
16.4.2.2 The owner should forward a change notice, if applicable, to the OEM to document the changes
that were made so that the OEM’s documentation and information can be revised.
NOTE: Failure to provide information to the OEM can affect future replacement parts.
232 of 241
17 Receipt of Repaired Pump by Owner
17.1 Initial Receipt Review
The pump and any other components should be received by the owner’s receiving department from the
repair shop, the owner’s repair shop or the owner’s storage. Site personnel should be ready and
equipped to off-load the pump and components. The pump and component should be inspected for
y
shipping damage.
n nl
The owner will compare:
tio O
a) Owner’s list of all items sent out during the repair
b) Correspondence with the repair shop about items to be discarded or added during the repair (example:
bu se
owner did not send oilers and later requested that the repair shop purchase/install new)
tri U
c) The packing list that arrives with the shipment
d) The items that actually arrive with the shipment
is 0
D 01
e) Documentation from repair shop is present and complete
f) Any problems or damage should be identified to the appropriate people immediately. Early detection of
al 5
discrepancies before the pump or components are off-loaded from transport prevents undesired re-
handling.
er lot
17.2 Detailed Receipt Review
en al
17.2.1 Pump
B
a) Pump nameplate is correct

rG e
b) Repair shop has attached their repair nameplate (do not remove original OEM nameplate)
Fo itte
c) Condition of coupling components
d) Correct coupling installation including axial position on shaft

ot m
e) Pump mounting feet are in good condition

N m
f) Suction and discharge flange gasket surfaces are covered and protected with a gasket
o
C
g) Fasteners are all installed and tightened
h) Open holes in pressure case are plugged with pipe plugs

r
Fo
i) Balance pipe present
j) Piping is not bent or damaged
k) Rotor is held (gagged) in position from axially sliding back and forth
l) Paint is in good condition
17.2.2 Mechanical seal and system
233 of 241
a) Open holes in seal gland or auxiliary components are plugged with pipe plugs
b) Seal gland orientation is correct, ports are identified and any fittings that require installation during
assembly are installed
c) Between bearings pumps have correct seal on each end
y
d) Fasteners are all installed and tightened
n nl
e) Orifices are installed and are of correct diameter and location
tio O
f) Seal setting devices are tagged
bu se
g) Piping connections terminated (type of welding or threaded)
tri U
h) Drive collar setscrews and seal setting devices are per owner’s request (tags are to identify whether the
setscrews are loose or tight and if the seal setting devices are engaged or not engaged)
is 0
17.2.3 Bearing housing / lubrication system
D 01
a) Oil level is marked on bearing housing(s)
al 5
b) Opening(s) in bearing housings are plugged
er lot
c) Bearing housing trim components are correct design, location and orientation
d) Instrumentation wiring is tagged

en al
B
e) Tag is on bearing housing stating there is no oil in the bearing housing
f) Guards are in position

rG e
Fo itte
17.2.4 Auxiliary components should be identified and their condition should be reviewed. Verify all
components are accounted for.
17.3 Items that do not meet the requirements of the owner should be reviewed for the correction and also
ot m
for any consequences that could have occurred due to the situation.
N m
18 Reinstallation of Pump and Systems in Field

o
This section assumes that the pump has been repaired and all receiving inspections have been
C
completed and the pump is ready for installation.
18.1 Prior to Field Installation of Pump

r
Fo
Confirm all site permitting and energy isolation is in place. Verify that the items in 18.1.1 through 18.1.13,
have been completed.
18.1.1 Field work and inspections have been completed per section 5.0.
18.1.2 All equipment is properly tagged and labeled
18.1.3 All equipment is properly grounded
18.1.4 Equipment, components, auxiliary piping and tubing are clean.
234 of 241
18.1.5 Equipment and components are ready for installation,
18.1.6 Fasteners, washers, gaskets (including full face with holes for cast or ductile iron flanges are ready
for installation.
18.1.7 Alignment should be per API 686.
y
Decisions that need to be made are:
n nl
a) Alignment method
tio O
b) If operating temperature alignment should be completed
bu se
c) Are coupling hubs to be placed flush with end of shaft (consider inspection from section 3)
tri U
d) Shaft Distance Between Shaft Ends (DBSE) is verified per coupling drawing or spacer recommendations
is 0
18.1.8 Special Tooling is available for installation such as:
D 01
a) Lifting
b) Alignment
al 5
c) Bolt Torqueing
er lot
d) Coupling installation
en al
e) Measurement tooling
B
Special tooling should be tagged with the equipment train identification number.
rG e
18.1.8.1 All lifting devices and tooling and measurement tooling should meet current certifications and
Fo itte
calibrations.
18.1.8.2 Alignment fixtures and brackets are appropriate for the type of equipment and alignment method
specified. For most pumps, alignment tooling is typically commercially available, but some pumps need
ot m
special alignment tooling. Special alignment tooling can be required for operating temperature
alignments.
N m
18.1.9 Equipment mounting and alignment calculations such as offsets for thermal growth are identified.
o
C
18.1.10 Determine if shims (spacers) are necessary for the pump to baseplate mounting from previous
installation, baseplate machining or foot repairs.
r
18.1.11 Shims should be per API 686. Shims should be in good condition with no burrs or wrinkles.
Fo
18.1.12 The torque value for mounting bolts has been determined. If there is no specification available
from the equipment vendor, Annex S can be used.
18.1.13 All mating surfaces for fasteners (such as threads and washer/nut faces) should be lubricated.
The friction coefficient of the lubricant should be considered for all fastener tightening values. If a
lubricant is not specified by the OEM, consider a nickel based lubricant.
18.1.14 Unused Piping flanges of the pump and the process piping should have temporary gasketed
covers or blinds to prevent debris from entering the pump or piping. Molded plastic flange covers or
235 of 241
plugs, rags and towels are not acceptable. The timing of the removal of these covers should be planned
to allow the cover to be on as long as practical. When removing the covers or blinds, verify that there are
no objects or debris in the piping.
18.1.15 For electric motors that had been removed, perform a motor solo test run and confirm rotation per
API 686. For electric motors with hydrodynamic bearings scribe the magnetic center.
y
18.1.16 For steam turbines that had been removed, perform a steam turbine solo test run and confirm
overspeed trip per API 686 and site-specific procedures.
n nl
18.2 Transport from Repair Shop or Warehouse to Field
tio O
Refer to section 7 for information for transporting the pump to the field.
bu se
18.3 Field Installation
tri U
18.3.1 Remove rust preventative from equipment and base plate equipment mounting locations.
is 0
18.3.2 Pumps should be properly rigged, lifted and set to avoid injury to personnel or damage to the
pump during installation.
D 01
18.3.3 The equipment should be installed on the baseplate, mounting plate or plates such that the
mounting bolts and alignment devices are centered. Install hold down bolting but do not completely
al 5
tighten. Consider using hardened washers.
er lot
18.3.4 Any devices or materials that were used for the packaging/shipping that interferes with shaft
rotation should be removed.
en al
18.3.5 The proper rotation of the pump and driver should be validated.
B
18.3.6 Mechanical seals should have the seal locking devices (tabs) disengaged (clear of rotating
components) before rotating the shaft.
rG e
Fo itte
18.3.7 Lubrication
18.3.7.1 Confirm all lubrication components (such as lubrication piping / tubing, oilers or fittings) have
been cleaned, inspected, tested, operation verified and replaced, as applicable. Replace sight glass if oil
ot m
levels are no longer visible. Verify that the lubrication system includes any upgrade recommendations.
N m
18.3.7.2 Drain any existing oil or preservative that is in the bearing housing or system. Flush components
with an appropriate fluid to remove any residual oil or preservative used for shipment or storage.
o
18.3.7.3 Add all components for the pump’s lubrication system and set the devices that maintain an oil
C
level. Add service oil to the oil system. Confirm oil viscosity and type match the recommendations for the
equipment. Document the type and the amounts of the lube oil.
r
Fo
18.3.7.4 For pump lubrication systems with oil rings, after pump has been installed, verify that the oil rings
are in their proper position.
18.3.7.5 Consider adding flushing screens or hoses to circulating system when reassembling the
components. Any flushing screens should have a method for identification. Refer to API 686 for
information on lube oil system flushing and API 614 for cleanliness level guidance.
18.3.7.6 Whenever possible, ring oil lubricated pumps should be checked for proper oil ring movement
while shaft is rotated during installation.
236 of 241
18.3.7.7 PTFE tape should not be used on lube oil piping systems or components. A PTFE paste or
thread lubricant/sealant can be used.
18.3.7.8 Oil mist applications
18.3.7.8.1 Oil mist reclassifier should be removed, inspected, cleaned, and reinstalled. Replace as
necessary. Record the number of the reclassifier.
y
18.3.7.8.2 Oil mist tubing should be checked for blockage, damage, locations that could trap oil, and be
n nl
replaced as necessary.
tio O
18.3.7.8.3 Place oil mist system in service and verify oil mist system is working properly. Pure oil mist
systems should be in service at least 3 hours before placing the equipment in service.
bu se
18.3.8 Alignment
tri U
18.3.8.1 Prior to beginning alignment activities, the coupling hubs should be installed in accordance with
the equipment arrangement drawing and instructions including design pull-up and final hub position on
the shaft. Consult the information from 9.1.1f to 9.1.1i for potential coupling hub positioning conflicts.
is 0
D 01
18.3.8.2 For OH4 pumps, adjust the shaft positioning as necessary.
18.3.8.3 Verify coupling hub runout readings.

al 5
18.3.8.3.1 Readings should be taken on each coupling hub rim on the machined surfaces perpendicular
er lot
to the centerline of rotation.
18.3.8.3.2 Readings should also be taken on the face of each coupling hub machined surfaces as far as
en al
practical from the shaft center of rotation.

B
18.3.8.3.3 When taking the face runout reading for each hub, verify that the shaft does not axially change
position by using a second indicator on that shaft end.
rG e
Fo itte
18.3.8.3.4 Installed coupling hubs should have 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) or less total indicated runout (TIR) or
the equipment OEM’s recommendation, whichever are more restrictive.
18.3.8.3.5 This limitation applies both to the coupling rim as well as to the coupling face.
ot m
NOTE: Special-purpose equipment coupling hub runout can be more restrictive.

N m
18.3.8.4 Verify pre-alignment of the driver shaft to the machine shaft. Verify that the machines are not
o
“bolt bound.” “Bolt bound” means that a machine foot is hard against a hold-down bolt and that further
movement to correct misalignment cannot be made.
C
18.3.8.5 The alignment should be completed without any process piping (suction and discharge) attached
r
to the pump. The installation of the process piping should be completed in 18.3.9. The method and
Fo
criteria for the alignment should be per 18.1.7 and API 686.
Typically:
a) The pump is the fixed component and the driver should be aligned to the pump
b) The pump should be centered in the mounting bolts and alignment devices
c) If a gearbox is used, the gearbox should be centered in its mounting bolts, possibly doweled and the
237 of 241
pump and driver should be brought into alignment of the gearbox
d) Most horizontal pumps or drivers are not doweled unless recommended such as for BB style pumps with
thermal growth devices
e) Most vertical pumps have the motor dowelled to the pump pedestal
y
18.3.8.6 After the alignment is completed, soft foot verification should be done per API 686.
n nl
18.3.8.7 All shims should be load bearing per API 686.
tio O
18.3.8.8 Maximum number of shims for each foot is 5 per API 686.
bu se
18.3.8.9 Washers for hold down bolting do not deform per API 686.
18.3.8.10 Verify all jackscrews used for alignment have been loosened clear of the foot pad with a
tri U
minimum of 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) so as to eliminate any residual load from the jackscrews that might
affect alignment.
is 0
18.3.8.11 Verify thermal growth or locating devices such as dowels or keys are installed and properly
D 01
positioned.
al 5
18.3.8.12 A complete set of alignment readings should be performed after final pipe installation and pipe
strain check is complete. This is considered the final alignment and should be documented on the Field
Inspection Document.
er lot
18.3.9 Process Piping Installation (suction and discharge)
en al
18.3.9.1 Remove any covers or blinds.

B
18.3.9.2 The process piping should be installed, one pipe at a time per API 686 using the proper
fasteners per 14.2.12 and gaskets per 14.2.13.
rG e
Fo itte
During the piping installation, one pipe at a time, the shaft movement of the pump should be monitored
per API 686.
18.3.9.3 Confirm that the connected (coupled) pump and driver turn freely after piping is connected.
ot m
18.3.9.4 Verify all jackscrews used for alignment have been loosened clear of the foot pad with a
N m
minimum of 0.010 in (0.254 mm) so as to eliminate any residual load from the jackscrews that might affect
alignment.
o
C
18.3.9.5 A complete set of alignment readings should be performed after final pipe installation and pipe
strain check is complete. This is considered the final alignment and should be documented on the Field
Inspection Document.
r
Fo
18.3.10 Installation of coupling and coupling guard
18.3.10.1 Verify that the installation of the coupling is complete and that the coupling bolts have been
torqued. Verify that any compression bolting to install coupling has been removed.
18.3.10.2 Install coupling guard.
18.3.10.2.1 Verify that the coupling guard does not touch any rotating component and expandable types
are extended properly to prevent access.
238 of 241
18.3.11 Auxiliary system installation
Verify the installation of all auxiliary systems has been completed and are ready to place into operation.
Auxiliary systems include, as applicable:
a) Process piping such as vents, drains, warm-up lines
b) Mechanical process seal system such as vents, drains, orifices, heat exchangers, reservoirs (including
y
fluids), separators, filters
n nl
c) Lubrication system such as oilers, breathers, sight glasses, bearing housing contamination drain sight
tio O
glass, filters, oil mist components, heat exchangers, filters
bu se
d) Instrumentation / control system such as switches, transmitters, control valves, pressure and
temperature gauges, RTD’s, TC’s, alarms and shut-downs, proximity probes and other components
tri U
18.3.11.1 Orifices should be identified with an austenitic stainless steel tag stating the hole diameter and the
identification number. Plate style orifices can have the information on the exposed tab.
is 0
18.4 Final Checks (as applicable to the particular pump)
D 01
18.4.1 Area has been cleaned-up.
al 5
18.4.2 The final installation checklist in Annex X-16-2 should be completed after all repairs and the
installation have been completed.
er lot
18.4.3 After all items and the checklist are completed, the installation of the repaired pump is considered
to be complete and the pump is ready for recommissioning.
en al
19 Start-up
B
19.1 Scope
rG e
Fo itte
This section describes the general checks and procedure for start-up of a pump following repair. The site
should review the OEM and site-specific recommendations to develop the start-up and operational
procedures.
ot m
Factors such as the process system, system arrangement, pump type, driver type, lubrication system and
pump seal plan influence the specific start-up and operational procedures.
N m
19.2 Process Pump Pre-Start Checks

o
19.2.1 Obtain confirmation that all work on pump, driver, auxiliary systems and process system(s) is
C
complete in accordance with site recommendations such as closed work permits and lock-out-tag-out
completion.
r
Fo
19.2.2 Verify that the lubricating system is functioning properly by checking items such as:
239 of 241
a) Oil level is correct in bearing housing
b) Constant level oiler full and functioning correctly
c) Sediment/water collection glass is drained of sediment and/or water.
d) Forced feed lube oil system is operating at the correct pressure and temperature
y
n nl
e) Oil mist system is operating correctly
tio O
f) For pure oil mist applications, the oil mist system has been providing lubrication per the site’s time
recommendations prior to placing the pump into service
bu se
19.2.3 Verify that pump’s sealing system(s) are functioning properly. Checks will be specific to the seal
plan utilized and site recommendations. Typical seal system checks include:
tri U
a) External seal flush is available and lined up correctly
is 0
b) Seal reservoir fluid is at correct level and pressure
D 01
c) Seal heat exchanger is lined up correctly
al 5
d) External quench is available and lined up correctly
er lot
e) Buffer gas system is available and lined up correctly
19.2.4 Verify that any cooling system(s) for lubrication, seal, pump or other components is functioning
en al
properly by checking items such as:

a) has been service flushed
B
b) has been vented

rG e
Fo itte
c) has been lined up correctly and has proper flow, temperature and pressure
19.3 Placing Pump Back into Service

ot m
19.3.1 Obtain appropriate approval for start-up of pump

N m
19.3.2 Line up process system per site’s specific pump’s plan:

o
a) Close pump drains

C
b) Fully open suction valve

r
c) If pump is equipped with pump temperature equalization arrangement, refer to Annex Y

Fo
d) If minimum flow line is provided assure it is properly lined up
e) Open vents (to safe location and procedure) to assure all vapor is removed from pump and seal chamber.
Close all vents after liquid full and pump is primed.
f) Place pump discharge valve in appropriate position
g) Some pumps should have the discharge valve partially open for start-up while others should have the
240 of 241
discharge valve fully opened due to the process system or the pump’s design
19.3.3 Start driver and slowly open discharge valve if not already opened.
19.4 Post-startup Checks
19.4.1 Verify process containment of the pump:
y
a) For pumps with mechanical seals check for seal leakage. Indication of leakage will depend upon type
n nl
of seal and sealing plan.
tio O
b) For pumps with packing observe leakage from stuffing box and after the proper run-in period adjust gland
to obtain proper leakage rate.
bu se
c) Monitor pump, connections, piping, and tubing for indication of leakage.
tri U
19.4.2 Verify mechanical operation of the pump:
a) Vibration, temperature, and noise are in normal range
is 0
D 01
b) Oil levels, pressures, and temperatures are correct for operating condition
c) Lube oil is not leaking

al 5
d) Seal system is operating correctly
er lot
e) Minimum flow system is operating correctly
en al
19.4.3 Verify the pump meets the process conditions.

B
19.4.4 Verify the pump’s hydraulic performance:

a) developed head (pressure) and flow are correct
rG e
Fo itte
b) driver power draw (amps or steam flow) is at expected level for developed head (pressure), flow and
temperature
ot m
c) suction pressure is at or above minimum required to provide sufficient NPSH margin for the application.
N m
19.5 Pump Monitoring

o
19.5.1 Observational monitoring frequency and parameters of the running pump will depend upon items
C
such as: criticality of the process, remote or on-site operation, installed remote monitoring capability or
site recommendations.
r
Fo
19.5.2 Observational monitoring consists of information such as:

a) flow and pressures are within normal range
b) changes in vibration, sound, temperature, flows and pressure
c) seal performance.
241 of 241

B5010-RP 697 Main 2019-12-18 4th Ballot - 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B5010-RP 697 Main 2019-12-18 4th Ballot - 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This document is not an API Standard; it is under consideration within an API technical committee but has not

API RECOMMENDED PRACTICE 697

1ST EDITION, XXXXXX 2019

4 Inspection of Installed Pump and Removal from Baseplate

8 Receipt of Pump and Components by Repair Shop or Owner

9 Disassembly and Cleaning of the Pump (in Repair Shop)

18 Reinstallation of Pump and Systems in Field

Annex A (Informative) Pump Designations and Descriptions

Annex B (Informative) Flowchart of Pump Review of Problem and Repair

Annex U (Informative) Imperfections in Flange Facing Finish for Raised Face Flanges

W.2.1 Couplings and Shaft Ends

W.2.4 Oil and Flinger Rings for Bearing Housings

W.3.4 OH4 Vertical In-Line, Rigidly Coupled Single-Stage Overhung Pumps

W.4.1.1 BB Shaft & Rotor

W.4.2 BB1 Horizontally Split Between Bearing Pumps

Annex X (Informative) Checklists

X.2 Inspection of Installed Pump and Removal from Baseplate Checklist

To be added by API Editors

To be added by API Editors

 inspections performed in the field and repair shop,

 Maintaining interchangeability with other units.

 Using existing spare parts.

 Maintaining its torque transmission capabilities

into the machine design.

1.1.4 The repair shop should assume order responsibility.

1.2 Alternative Procedures

1.3 Conflicting Requirements

1.4 Statutory Requirements

1.6 Selection of a Repair Shop

c) Experience repairing similar equipment.

d) Manufacturing of replacement components

e) Having a quality system in place including documentation

a) The owner’s corporate name.

b) The job/project number.

c) The equipment item number and service name.

d) The inquiry or purchase order number.

1.7.2 Electronic Drawing and Data Transmittal

a) Direct electronic links between computer aided design (CAD) systems.

b) Electronic mail including digital photography transmission.

c) Video and telephone conferencing.

exceed the American standards referenced.

document (including any amendments) applies.

API Standard 670, Machinery Protection Systems

API Recommended Practice 687, Special Purpose Rotating Equipment Repair

AGMA 9002-B04, Bores and Keyways for Flexible Couplings

ASME B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASTM A388/A388M, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Forgings

Ultrasonic Examination Thereof

ASTM E94, Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination

ASTM E709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing

SSPC SP 1, Solvent Cleaning

be in other colors such as red.

distance between shaft ends

Split with the joint perpendicular to the shaft centerline.

above the 1st critical speed.

3.2 Acronyms and Abbreviations

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials